JP2018110799A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a Pachinko game machine capable of improving game amusement.SOLUTION: The Pachinko game machine is configured in such a manner that a decorative symbol combination which is temporarily stop-displayed at a timing before it is settled and stop-displayed in the case that the result of a first winning/losing determination or the result of a second winning/losing determination is a jackpot becomes the same as a decorative symbol combination which is settled and stop-displayed in the case that the result of the first winning/losing determination or the result of the second winning/losing determination is a loss, in a variable display regarding which the number of times of variable display of first symbols and second symbols is within X counting after the end of a special game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 115

Description

  The present invention relates to pachinko gaming machines.

  In general, pachinko gaming machines acquire a random number for lottery when a game ball enters the starting port, and temporarily store it as a predetermined upper limit number of balls as operation holding balls. Each such operation holding ball is sequentially digested one by one every time a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and whether or not it is a big hit is determined. If the result of the determination is a big hit, the symbols consisting of a plurality of columns are displayed in a variable manner, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner. Special games (big hit games) to be established.

  In this type of pachinko gaming machine, there are various types such as a probabilistic gaming state in which the winning probability of winning / failing determination is increased and a short-time gaming state in which the efficiency of symbol variation for suggesting or notifying the result of the winning / failing determination is increased. The game state is provided, and a variation effect according to the type of the game state is developed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-115441 A

  A large number of pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration already exist as conventional models. Therefore, in order to differentiate from the conventional models, it is required to improve the interest of the game by the big hit effect.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a subject, and it aims at providing the pachinko game machine which can aim at the improvement of the interest property of a game.

  In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention includes a game board in which a game area is formed, a first start port provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and the game A second start port that is provided at a position different from the first start port in the region and changes between an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and a ball entering the first start port A first success / failure determination means for executing a first success / failure determination by using as a trigger, a second success / failure determination means for executing a second success / failure determination by triggering a ball entering the second start port, and the first success / failure determination A first symbol display device in which the first symbol indicating the result of determination is displayed in a variable manner and stopped, and a second symbol display device in which the second symbol indicating the result of the second success / failure determination is displayed in a variable manner and stopped. The first selection of the variable display time of the first symbol according to the result of the first success / failure determination Dynamic display time selecting means, second variable display time selecting means for selecting the variable display time of the second symbol in accordance with the result of the second success / failure determination, and the result of the first success / failure determination or the second When the determination result is a big hit, the special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player, the first determination result and the second determination result result in a big hit with a predetermined probability. A low-probability state and a high-probability state in which the result of the first success / failure determination and the result of the second success / failure determination become a big hit with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. The lottery state control means for performing the control to shift, the normal entry state, and the easy entry state in which the ease of entering the second starting port is higher than the normal entry state, and the normal entry state Or control to shift to the easy entry state An entry state control means, an effect display device displaying an effect suggesting the result of the first success / failure determination or the result of the second success / failure determination, and the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device are determined. And a plurality of decorative symbols that variably display the result of the first success / failure determination or the result of the second success / failure determination. The combination is configured to be displayed as a temporary stop display or a fixed stop display, has a plurality of types of variation selection states, and is configured to be able to shift the variation selection state between a plurality of types of variation selection states, The selection tendency of the variable display time differs depending on the type of the variable selection state, and the first display in the situation where the number of variable displays of the first symbol and the second symbol is within X times from the end of the special game. As a result of determination of success or failure or the second winning The number of candidates for the variable display time of the first symbol or the second symbol that can be selected when the result of the negative decision is out of date is calculated from the number of variable display times of the first symbol and the second symbol after the end of the special game. Than the number of candidates for the variable display time of the first symbol or the second symbol that can be selected when the result of the first success / failure determination or the result of the second success / failure determination is out of place under the situation of X times or more In the variable display where the number of variable displays of the first symbol and the second symbol is within X times after the end of the special game, the result of the first success / failure determination or the second The decorative symbol combination that is temporarily stopped and displayed at a timing before the fixed stop display when the result of the determination is a big hit is not the same as the result of the first determination or the second determination. If A decorative symbol combination to be definitive confirmation stop display characterized in that it is configured to be identical.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a control block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and effect control board of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol winning / losing lottery table based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern table based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the extended villa production | presentation pattern table of the pending renzo production based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production image of the reserved in-rensou production based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 10 of the main process by the main control side based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting port monitoring control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation start monitoring process in FIG. 14 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control general-purpose process in FIG. 16 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. 17 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process in FIG. 17 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop symbol display middle process in FIG. 17 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 20 of the special symbol stop symbol display process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 22 of the special electric accessory control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 23 of the special electric accessory control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reset start process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process based on this embodiment. 27 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in FIG. 26 according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation state transfer process in FIG. 27 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect content determination process in FIG. 27 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding villa rendition effect A determination process in FIG. 29 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit effect content determination process in FIG. 27 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | reserved in-range resort effect B determination process in FIG. 31 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit effect replacement | exchange process in FIG. 31 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control command reception interruption process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the image control command transmission interruption process based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of a special continuous effect based on this embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the relationship between the on-hold consecutive resort production and special continuous production based on this embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the relationship 1 of the on-hold extended resort effect and special effect which concerns on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the relations 2 and 3 of the reservation in-resort resort effect and the special effect based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect determination process based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold extended resort production A determination process based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold extended resort production B determination process based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the extended villa production | presentation pattern table of the retained villa extended production based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit effect content determination process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation button monitoring control process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation state transfer process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold extended resort production A determination process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold extended resort production B determination process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of the on-hold extended resort effect B based on the 3rd modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the extended villa production | presentation pattern table of the retained villa reproduction production based on the 3rd modification of this embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd big prize opening based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of the special winning opening based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit effect content determination process based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the success / failure prior determination table based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol winning / losing lottery table based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern table based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the extended villa production | presentation pattern table of the retained renso production in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process based on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process based on 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating an effect | action based on 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the action pattern of the special winning opening based on 5th Embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship between the jackpot classification and promotion effect based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of a probability change promotion effect based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the probability variation promotion effect pattern table based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of a round promotion effect based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the round promotion effect pattern table based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of the promotion effect based on the 1st modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol winning / losing lottery table based on 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern table based on 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation production pattern table based on 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the consecutive resort production | presentation pattern table of the reserved resort in a 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation production pattern replacement table based on 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation production pattern selection process based on 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows pending | holding consecutive resort production B determination processing based on 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment. The big prize opening device based on 7th Embodiment is shown, (a) is a perspective view of a big prize opening device, (b) is a top view of a big prize opening device. The big prize opening device based on 7th Embodiment is shown, (a) is a front view which shows the state which removed the shielding cover member of the big prize opening device, (b) is the shielding cover member of a big prize opening device. It is a top view which shows the state removed. The big prize opening device based on 7th Embodiment is shown, (a) is a perspective view which shows the non-operation state of the big prize opening device which removed the shielding cover member, (b) removed the shielding cover member similarly It is a perspective view which shows the operating state of a big prize opening device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which decomposed | disassembled the special winning opening apparatus based on 7th Embodiment from diagonally upward. It is a perspective view which shows the state which decomposed | disassembled the special winning opening apparatus based on 7th Embodiment from diagonally downward. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 7th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the action pattern of the special winning opening based on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating various winning effects based on 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol winning / losing lottery table based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special winning opening operation pattern table based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table based on 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram (A) which shows the selection state transition table based on 8th Embodiment, and the schematic diagram (B) which shows a selection state setting table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 0 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 1 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 2 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 3 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 4 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 5 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 6 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 7 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 8 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 9 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table 10 based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence of the variation pattern selection state and effect mode based on 8th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of effect mode based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the design attribute of the decoration design based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the jackpot symbol table based on 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram (A) which shows the jackpot start demonstration time setting table based on 8th Embodiment, and the schematic diagram (B) which shows the jackpot end demonstration time setting table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation production pattern table based on 8th Embodiment. It is a timing chart of the reservation continuous mode production based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the chance up effect lottery table according to the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production | presentation of the hold continuous mode deviation effect based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production | presentation of a reservation continuous mode jackpot effect based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the count-up effect pattern table according to the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the count-up effect lottery table according to the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a count-up effect based on 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of prize ball number alerting | reporting effect based on 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram of a prize ball number counter and a consecutive game number counter concerning an 8th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram (A) which shows the selection state transition table based on the 1st modification of 8th Embodiment, and the schematic diagram (B) which shows a selection state setting table. It is a mimetic diagram showing change pattern table 2A concerning the 1st modification of an 8th embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing change pattern table 2B concerning the 1st modification of an 8th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of the number-of-balls notification effect and consecutive resort frequency notification effect which concerns on the 2nd modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing change pattern table A concerning the 3rd modification of an 8th embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing change pattern table B concerning the 3rd modification of an 8th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table C based on the 3rd modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of effect mode based on the 3rd modification of 8th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional first type pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and the first game (first special symbol game) and the second game (first game). 2 special symbol games).

[First Embodiment]
A front view and a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment are shown in FIGS.

<Basic configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PM is configured with a rectangular frame size adapted to the front of the opening of the outer frame 1 which forms a vertically fixed holding frame configured in an outer rectangular frame size, and can be opened and closed. The front frame 2 that forms a frame is attached so that it can be opened and closed laterally and opened and removed by upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3a, 3b arranged on the left front edge of each other, and is called a double lock provided on the front right edge. The locking device 4 is always used to maintain the closed state engaged with the outer frame 1.

  On the front side of the front frame 2, a glass frame 5 and a ball tray unit 6 are assembled so that they can be opened and closed laterally and detachably using hinge mechanisms 7 a, 7 b, 7 c provided on the left side of the front side. It is always used in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame 2. A game board 20 is detachably set and held on the upper part of the front frame 2 located behind the glass frame 5, and a game area PA in front of the game board 20 through the double-layer glass of the glass frame 5 that is always held closed. Can be viewed.

  On the front side of the glass frame 5, there are provided a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the game development status, and a speaker 11 that generates sound effects according to the game development status. The ball tray unit 6 is provided with upper and lower ball trays (an upper ball tray 8 and a lower ball tray 9) for storing game balls, and an effect that is pressed by a player at the front center of the upper ball tray 8 is provided. A button 15 is provided, and a launch handle 12 for performing a launch operation of the game ball is provided on the front right side of the lower ball tray 9. In the following, for convenience, the operation input means for effect is referred to as “effect button 15”, but the effect button 15 in this example is an on / off operation type button-type switch, and an output corresponding to the direction of operation input. Cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross-button), tilt-operated lever-type switch, rotation-operated dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches, touch The concept includes all operation input means such as a sensor and a touch panel.

  The game board 20 is configured based on a board formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or an ABS resin. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail and an inner rail are fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which a game ball can roll is defined, and a windmill and a large number of games are formed in the game area PA. Along with the nail, in addition to various winning ports such as the first starting port 61, the second starting port 62, the operation gate 63, the first large winning port 64, the second large winning port 65, the first special symbol display device 71, the second Various display devices such as a special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reservation lamp 73, a second special symbol reservation lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a general symbol reservation lamp 76 are provided. A center ornament 22 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center ornament 22. At the lower end of the game area PA, there is provided an out port 29 through which the game balls that have tumbled down without entering each winning port are discharged to the back side of the game board 20. Hereinafter, each component provided in the game board 20 is demonstrated in order.

  The first start port 61 is provided as a start winning port corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first start port switch 611 for detecting the entrance of a game ball. Entering a game ball into the first start port 61 triggers the first special symbol lottery.

  The second start port 62 is provided as a start winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second start port switch 621 for detecting the entrance of a game ball. Entering a game ball into the second start port 62 triggers the second special symbol lottery. The second start port 62 includes a normal electric accessory 622 and a normal electric accessory solenoid 623 for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 622. The ordinary electric accessory 622 changes between a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 62 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than this state. Here, the second starting port 62 has a structure in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter unless the ordinary electric accessory 622 is opened. On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory 622 is opened, the ease of entering the second starting port 62 is enhanced.

  The operation gate 63 is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an operation gate switch 631 for detecting passage of a game ball. Note that the passing of the game ball to the operation gate 63 triggers the normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to expand the normal electric accessory 622 of the second start port 62.

  The first big winning opening 64 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape that is open when a big win or a small win is won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The first big prize opening 64 includes a first big prize opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first special electric accessory 642 called a so-called attacker device, and the first special electric combination. A first big prize opening solenoid 643 for opening and closing the accessory 642 is provided. The first special electric accessory 642 is variable between a normal state in which a game ball cannot enter or difficult to enter the first grand prize opening 64 and an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter.

  The second big winning opening 65 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape that is open when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined to be a big win or a small win. The second grand prize opening 65 includes a second special prize opening switch 651 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second special electric accessory 652 called a so-called attacker device, and the second special electric machine. And a second big prize opening solenoid 653 for opening and closing the accessory 652. The second special electric accessory 652 is variable between a normal state in which a game ball cannot enter or difficult to enter the second grand prize opening 65 and an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter.

  The first big prize opening 64 and the second big prize opening 65 are provided in the right side area in the game area PA. Therefore, in a special gaming state, when a game ball is launched toward the game area PA, it is easy to enter any of the big winning holes 64 and 65 by hitting the right area, so-called right hit. It has become.

  The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and fixed display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 61. The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, 7-segment LEDs, and the first special symbol variable display is expressed according to the blinking pattern of each segment, and the blinking of the segment stops and switches to the lit display. One special symbol is confirmed and displayed. The stop symbol of the first special symbol is formed by numbers or symbols expressed by combinations of segments.

  The second special symbol display device 72 performs a variable display and a fixed display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the second start port 62. The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, 7-segment LEDs, and the second special symbol variable display is expressed according to the blinking pattern of each segment. 2 Special symbols are finalized. The stop symbol of the second special symbol is formed by numbers or symbols expressed by combinations of segments.

  The first special figure reservation lamp 73 and the second special figure reservation lamp 74 are each composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is indicated by lighting / flashing display of the lamps. Express (up to 4). The number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol is a number related to the random number value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 61 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during execution of the special game. Yes, the acquired random number value is held, that is, the number of times the determination of the success / failure is temporarily held until the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value. The number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is a number related to the random number value acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 62 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during execution of the special game. Yes, the acquired random number value is held, that is, the number of times the determination of the success / failure is temporarily held until the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value.

  The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs normal symbol variation display and confirmation display by lighting and blinking display of the lamps. In the present embodiment, for example, the normal symbol variation display is expressed in such a manner that the two lamps are alternately turned on and off, and depending on which lamp is finally turned on and stopped, Notify the lottery result. The ordinary figure holding lamp 76 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and represents the number of reserved balls (up to four) for normal symbols by lighting / blinking display of the lamp. On the left side of the normal symbol display device 75, there is provided a round indicator 77 for displaying the number of round games in the special game (the number of rounds: the number of times that the special electric accessories 642 and 643 are continuously operated). .

  The effect display device 70 mainly displays an effect image including a decorative pattern and a notice effect that fluctuately display / stop in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Hold display. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, the first special symbol is synchronized with the decorative symbol display unit 700 on which the decorative symbol change display or the notice effect display is executed, and the first special symbol hold lamp 73. The first special figure hold display section 701 that executes the hold display of the second special figure hold display section 702 that executes the hold display of the second special symbol in synchronization with the second special figure hold lamp 74 Is provided. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the effect display device 70. The decorative symbol display unit 700 is provided with three rows of display areas (a left display area Z1, a middle display area Z2, and a right display area Z3) serving as a decorative display variable display area on a predetermined effective line (not shown). The left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left display area Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the middle display region Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the right display region Z3 are stopped and displayed. The In the special figure hold display sections 701 and 702, in a normal display mode, when an operation holding ball of a special symbol is generated, a holding image of a white circle is displayed, whereas when the operation holding ball is digested, it corresponds. The reserved image is lost. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order in which the special symbols actuated on-hold balls are generated (the order of entering the balls), and a maximum of four can be displayed on each of the on-hold display units 701 and 702.

  The center decoration 22 is installed around the effect display device 70, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the screen of the effect display device 70, and decoration. The center ornament 22 is provided with a movable accessory 24 that performs a production operation according to the game development status. The movable accessory 24 includes a driving source such as a stepping motor or a solenoid. Further, the center decoration 22 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light according to the game development status. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the panel lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as “effect lamp LP”.

  Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the back side of the front frame 2, a back set board 30 having a window that communicates with the front and rear at substantially the center and formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame 2 is detachably attached. Each part of the back set board 30 has a storage tank 31 for storing a large number of game balls, a tank rail 32 extending from the storage tank 31 with a gentle downward slope to the right, and a lower end connected to the right end of the tank rail 32. A ball supply passage 33 extending to the ball, a prize ball payout unit 34 for paying out a game ball guided by the ball supply passage 33, and a prize for guiding the game ball discharged from the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball tray 6. A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

  On the back side of the game board 10, there is a main control board 100 for comprehensively controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM, an effect control board 200 for performing overall control of the game, image display according to game development, and control of sound effects. An image control board 300 for performing is attached. In the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 constitute a liquid crystal unit in an assembled state integrated with the effect display device (liquid crystal display device) 70. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, the payout control board 400 that performs control related to the launch and payout of the game balls, and the power received from the game facility side to supply power to various control boards and electric / electronic components. A power supply board 500 or the like is attached. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are respectively placed at predetermined positions on the back of the game board 20 or the back set board 30 in an assembled state housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing structure. Arranged. These control boards and the electrical / electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) so that the pachinko gaming machine PM can be operated.

<Control configuration of pachinko machines>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, each control board mounted in the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

  The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes related to games, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area and buffer memory serving as a temporary storage area, a peripheral board, A main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured to include an I / O port circuit 104 for inputting / outputting signals to / from the device is mounted, and the main CPU 101 plays a game according to a control program stored in the ROM 102. It is configured to execute main control related to the progress. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the main control board 100 is reset when a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock and the main CPU 101 malfunctions or runs out of control. It operates as a separate system from the WDT circuit for returning to the normal state, the CTC circuit that enables real-time interrupt generation and time measurement, and the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 to generate a predetermined random number (built-in random number). A random number generation circuit and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The main CPU 101 executes various processes related to the main control of the game by reading various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performing arithmetic processing based on detection information from each switch. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a nonvolatile storage unit that is backed up by a backup power supply (VBB) generated in the power supply substrate 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as a stack pointer and each register held when the power is turned off when the power is turned off. ), The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before power-off based on the information in the backup area.

  The main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start port switch 611, the second start port switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the first big prize port switch 641, the second big prize port switch 651, and the like. In addition, detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. The main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol hold lamp 73, a second special figure hold lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a general figure hold lamp. 76, and is further electrically connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 623 and the special electric accessory solenoids 643, 653, and is controlled by the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Signals are sent to various display means and various solenoids.

  The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Various effect control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Data cannot be transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 cannot be requested to transmit data.

  The effect control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processes related to game effects based on an effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores an effect control program and various data, a work area that is a temporary storage area, Equipped with a rendering control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 that includes a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and devices. The sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control related to game effects according to a control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the production control board 200 is reset when a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, or when the sub main CPU 201 malfunctions or runs away. WDT circuit that returns to normal state, TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, etc. for inputting and outputting serial data A serial communication circuit and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The effect control board 200 is an effect control process based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command for instructing the image and sound to the image control board 300, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91. (Lamp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and image control commands related to images and sound are transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been successfully received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

  The effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 on which a plurality of LED drivers are mounted, and a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 is transmitted via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the production control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock-synchronized serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. In synchronization with the clock signal, the ramp control signal is transmitted bit by bit through the data line. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions in response to a lamp control signal for LED driving transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on / off the switches in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. Thus, the drive current is supplied to or cut off from the effect lamp LP, and the effect lamp LP is turned on or off.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 is transmitted to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by switching on / off the switch in the circuit based on the drive control signal for the accessory drive transmitted from the effect control board 200. Alternatively, control is performed so that each movable accessory 24 is operated by being shut off. The data transmission to the motor driver 92 employs a parallel communication method, but a serial communication method may be employed similarly to the data transmission to the lamp connection board 91. The effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the effect button 15, and a detection signal from an operation input detecting means (for example, a photo sensor) built in the effect button 15 is input and the effect button 15 is displayed. A control signal for operating (for example, up / down movement, left / right movement, vibration, rotation, etc.) is transmitted to drive drive means (for example, a motor or a solenoid) built in the effect button 15.

  The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes related to image effects based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores image control programs and various data, and a work area that is a temporary storage area. And an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 that includes a RAM 303 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and devices. The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute main control related to the image effect according to the control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the image control board 300 has a VDP that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301 and an effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301. It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, reads image data stored in the image ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and transmits a video signal (image data) generated by image processing to the effect display device. The VPD is connected to a high-speed VRAM used for developing / processing image data read from the image ROM. The sound source IC reads the acoustic data stored in the audio ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs the acoustic data generated by synthesizing the data to the speaker 11 via the amplifier (digital amplifier).

  The payout control board 400 is composed mainly of a payout CPU 401, ROM 402 and RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. The payout payout unit 34 is driven based on a payout control command from the main control board 100 to pay out a prize ball. And the ball feed mechanism 13 and the launch mechanism 14 are driven synchronously based on the operation amount of the launch handle 12 to control the launch of the game ball.

  Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 includes a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used by each control board based on a primary power supply supplied from the power supply facility of the game island, and a backup power supply. (VBB) is generated, and a power-off monitoring circuit for monitoring power-off due to a voltage drop is provided. The electronic / electrical parts such as control boards and game machines Supply the necessary power. A power switch for starting a power circuit is connected to the power board 500, and when the power switch is turned on on the assumption that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, the power board A predetermined power is supplied from 500 normal power supply circuits to each control board. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device on the amusement island is cut off. When the power supply is detected to be cut off, a power cut-off signal (NMI signal) for informing the fact is sent to the main control board 100. , To the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PM from the power supply device on the game island. Further, a RAM clear switch (not shown) is connected to the power supply board 500 for temporarily erasing the temporarily stored contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting initial values when the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500, for example.

<Basic operation of pachinko machines>
The pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above can be used in a game in which the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the gaming island of the gaming facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, the ball tray unit 6 and the like are closed and locked. The game is started by storing the game ball in the upper ball tray 8 and rotating the launch handle 12. When the firing handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 8 are launched one by one by a ball feed mechanism 13 (see FIG. 3) disposed on the back side of the glass frame 5. 14 (see FIG. 3), and is launched into the game area PA by the launch mechanism 14.

  When a game ball rolling down in the game area PA enters one of the first starting port 61, the second starting port 62, the first major winning port 64, and the second major winning port 65, the type of the winning port The award ball corresponding to is paid out to the upper ball tray 8 or the lower ball tray 9 by the prize ball payout unit 33. When a game ball enters the first start port 61 or the second start port 62, a lottery random number value of a special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as a reserved ball of the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a special symbol win / no-go determination, symbol determination, and variation pattern determination are performed on the lottery random number value related to the earliest holding ball, and in a manner according to the determination result, The special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 70. The variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed synchronously after the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern has elapsed.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in a stop mode indicating a big hit, the game shifts to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the first big prize opening 64 or the second The opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 65 is started. The stop pattern of the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is, for example, a mode in which the types of three symbols match. In the present embodiment, as a special game, a round game is set to 16 times (16 rounds), a 16R special game, a round game is set to 8 times (8 rounds), and a round game is 2 times. 2R special games set in (2 rounds) are provided.

  In this embodiment, regardless of whether the transition is made to the 16R special game, the 8R special game, or the 2R special game, the probability variation of the special symbol after the special game ends until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined end number. The function (also called “probability”) operates uniformly. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine called a so-called “ST machine”, which is a time-changing probability changing machine with a probability changing entry rate of 100%. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state in which the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (also referred to as “special symbol probability variation state”) does not continue until the next big hit, but the special symbol probability variation state is maintained. This period is limited to a predetermined period of time (also referred to as “ST number”). When the special symbol probability variation function is activated, a lottery with a special symbol jackpot probability higher than the normal probability state is performed, so that a new special game is generated relatively early.

  On the other hand, after the special game is over, a special symbol variation time shortening function (hereinafter also referred to as “short time”) is attached to the special symbol probability variation function or independently of the special symbol probability variation function. May work. When the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (also referred to as “special symbol time-short state”), the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than the normal state. In addition, the number of successful / unlucky lotteries per unit time is improved (ease of acquiring big hits per unit time can be increased).

  Furthermore, when the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, the electric chew support function is activated. In the electric chew support function, the probability of entering the second starting port 62 is improved by the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time shortening function, and the normal electric accessory 622 opening extension function being activated. This is a state (also referred to as “easy entry state”). Note that when the probability variation function of the normal symbol is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than the normal state. When the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol variation time is reduced. When the opening time extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 622 is activated, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 622 becomes longer than the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, the possibility that the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol per fixed time will increase more than usual and the ease of entering the second start port 62 will also increase, so that the second start port 62 will be entered. The possibility that the number of balls entering will increase. Therefore, by operating the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function, the chance to obtain a winning ball by entering the second starting port 62 increases during the period, so that the number of possessed balls is hardly reduced. The game can be continued.

<Main functional configuration of pachinko machines>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to the functional block diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 includes a ball entry judging means 110, a game lottery random number generating means 120, a holding control means 130, a prior judgment means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, a normal symbol lottery processing means 145, Special game control means 150, symbol display control means 155, electric accessory control means 160, gaming state control means 165, error monitoring control means 170, main information storage means 180, and command transmission / reception means 190 are included. Note that each of the above-described means in the main control board 100 is configured by main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, hardware such as an electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 or the like. Is a functional representation of things.

  Based on detection signals from the first start port switch 611, the second start port switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the first big winning port switch 641, the second big winning port switch 651, etc. Judgment of game balls entering the winning opening.

  The game lottery random number generation means 120 takes in the built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software and adds a soft random number per special symbol to be described later to this to be used for the lottery of special symbols. Generate random numbers per special symbol. The game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. As this software random number, a soft random number per special symbol that is added to the above-mentioned built-in random number to form a random number per special symbol, a soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining an initial value and an end value of the soft random number per special symbol, Special symbols for determining the random number of symbols per special symbol used for determining the winning symbol (the combination of symbols that will activate the condition device) as the stop symbol of the special symbol, the initial value and the end value of the symbol random number per special symbol The initial symbol random number per symbol, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per normal symbol, and the random number per normal symbol Includes initial value random numbers per normal symbol to determine, normal symbol variation pattern random number to use for selection of variation pattern of ordinary symbols, etc. That. These software random numbers are updated once every time timer interrupt processing occurs, and the remaining time of the interrupt cycle is maintained even when timer interrupt processing is not being executed for the initial value random number (during loop processing). Update using.

  The hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131 and a normal symbol hold control means 132.

  The special symbol hold control means 131 is a lottery random number value related to special symbol games, which is a random number value per special symbol, per special symbol, when the game ball enters the first start port 61 or the second start port 62. The design random number value and the special design variation pattern random value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation reserved ball information of the first special design or the second special design. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a main information storage means that combines the action holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4) with the entering order of the holding balls. The first special symbol reservation storage area of 180 or the second special symbol reservation storage area is temporarily stored.

  In the first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area, a reserved 1 storage area (first reserved storage area), a reserved 2 storage area (2 A reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area). Each reserved storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random number per special symbol, and a special symbol variation pattern random number as a set as the operating reserved ball information. The operation hold ball information is stored in the order of the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area, while the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage. Digested in order of area (first-in first-out principle). Further, when the reserved ball information in the hold 1 storage area is digested, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower numbered storage areas, respectively. The contents of the reserved 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

  Further, the special symbol hold control means 131 has a first special symbol hold ball number counter for counting the number of active reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol for counting the number of active hold balls of the second special symbol. It has a symbol holding ball number counter. The special symbol hold control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one special reserved action ball is acquired as an update process of the number of special reserved action balls. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

  Further, when the special symbol holding control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of active reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect control command ("symbol storage" This is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information on both the number of the operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of the operation reserved balls of the second special symbol. In principle, the action-reserved balls of each special symbol are digested in the order of entry, but in this embodiment, the variable special symbol is displayed with priority over the first special symbol. In order to adopt so-called preferential digestion, while there is an operation reservation ball related to the second special symbol game, regardless of the presence of the operation reservation ball related to the first special symbol game, the operation reservation related to the second special symbol game It is configured to preferentially digest spheres. In addition, under this priority digestion, if there is an operation reservation ball of the second special symbol, even if there is an operation reservation ball of the first special symbol, the operation reservation ball of the first special symbol is digested. Will be put on hold.

  The normal symbol hold control means 132 is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game, the random number value per normal symbol, the symbol random value per normal symbol, the normal symbol variation pattern, when the game ball enters the operation gate 63 A random value is acquired, and the random value is managed as the operation reservation ball information of the normal symbol. The normal symbol holding control unit 132 stores the normal symbol operation holding ball information in the normal symbol holding storage area of the main information storage unit 180 in a form combined with the order of entering the holding balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (four). Memorize temporarily. Further, the normal symbol hold control means 132 has a normal symbol hold ball number counter for counting the number of normal reserved operation balls. The normal symbol hold control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one normal reserved actuated ball is acquired as the update processing of the number of held normal symbols of the active normal symbol. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

  The pre-determination unit 135 executes a pre-determination for a pre-reading notice when the operation holding ball having a special symbol is acquired at a predetermined pre-determination timing. As an example of the pre-determination timing, (1) when waiting for hitting and when the action holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for hitting and When the support holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the support function is operating, (3) When the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or small hit, When you are satisfied. Specifically, the pre-determining means 135 reads out the random number value corresponding to the currently acquired operation holding ball from the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area of the main information storage means 180, and determines whether or not Pre-determination (pre-determined / unpredictable), symbol lottery pre-determination (design pre-determination), and variation pattern lottery pre-determination (variation pattern pre-determination) are sequentially executed. The pre-determination table used in each pre-determination is not shown, but each of the success / failure pre-determination table, the symbol pre-determination table, and the variation pattern pre-determination table is divided into a plurality of areas corresponding to the total number of random numbers. A lottery ID (a number indicating the result of prior determination (also referred to as “preliminary determination number”)) is assigned to each area (determination number). Therefore, the result of this preliminary determination is based on the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 described later (the result of the determination, the result of the symbol determination, the result of the variation pattern determination). Note that the success / failure pre-determination table, the symbol pre-determination table, and the like may be the same as the success / failure lottery table and the symbol lottery table used for the lottery when the change is actually started. Here, in the variation pattern prior determination table, there is a possibility that the game situation at the beginning of variation (presence / absence of probability change, presence / absence of time reduction, whether or not during a limited frequency period referring to a special table, the number of held balls, etc.) may change. For this reason, as described above, it is preferable to determine which of the plurality of regions is included. Then, the preliminary determination unit 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as a “preliminary determination command”) including information on the preliminary determination result (preliminary determination number) and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. Store.

  The special symbol lottery processing unit 140 includes a special symbol success / failure determination unit 141, a special symbol stop symbol determination unit 412, and a special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143. The special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the special symbol perturbation stored in the first storage area (hold 1 storage area) of the special symbol reservation storage area in the main information storage means 180 The numerical value, the random symbol value per special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are read out and stored in the special symbol success / failure determination region, the special symbol determination region, and the special symbol variation pattern determination region of the main information storage unit 180, respectively. Here, “the special symbol variation start condition is satisfied” is, for example, (1) that there is no big hit or small hit, and (2) both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation. (3) When all of the conditions of the operation holding ball exist in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are satisfied, and as a result, the special symbol can start to fluctuate. It is determined that the situation is not correct.

  The special symbol success / failure determination means 141 reads a random value per special symbol from the special symbol success / failure determination area of the main information storage means 180 and executes the determination of the success / failure, and the determination result corresponds to any one of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss. Decide what to do. The result of this determination is temporarily stored in a special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, loss data “00H”), and is used in the subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the special symbol changes. The special symbol success / failure determination means 141 holds a special symbol success / failure lottery table which is referred to in the determination of success / failure.

  Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol winning / losing lottery table, where (A) is referred to in the normal state (low probability state), and (B) is referred to in the probability variation state (high probability state). The In this special symbol success / failure lottery table, random numbers per special symbol and judgment results of big hits, small hits, and losing are associated with each other, and the winning probabilities for big hits and small hits according to the associated random number range Is determined. As can be seen from FIG. 5, in the special symbol game winning / losing lottery, in the normal state (low probability state), only when the random value falls within the range of “0 to 163”, it is a big hit. On the other hand, in the probability variation state (high probability state), the range of the jackpot is expanded, and not only when the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163” but also when it falls within the range of “164 to 1639”. Become. In other words, when the probability changing function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot lottery probability changes from the low probability state (1 / 399.6) to the high probability state (1 / 39.96). As described above, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state, but the winning probability of winning the jackpot is equal between the winning lottery of the first special symbol and the winning lottery of the second special symbol. Here, even if the random number value per special symbol does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it is a small hit. In this example, only the winning lottery of the first special symbol is configured to have a small win, but for example, a small hit is also provided in the winning lottery of the second special symbol, and the winning lottery of the second special symbol is determined. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the first lottery winning / losing lottery is a small hit with a higher probability.

  The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the symbol group to which the stop symbol belongs, based on the result of the first or second special symbol determination. To do. The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 includes a first special symbol per symbol table that is referred to when determining a stop symbol and a symbol group of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, It has a symbol table per second special symbol.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol table per first special symbol. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the random symbol value per special symbol is the stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the special symbol are activated, the first grand prize) The operation patterns of the mouth 64) are associated with each other. The numerical value “100” in parentheses means the number of operations of the special symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction function, that is, the ST number. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups A and B according to the type of jackpot.

  Specifically, symbols “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” have symbol group A (16R specified short-time symbol), symbols “5”, “6” have symbol group B. (8R specified short-lived symbol) is associated with symbols “7” and “8”, respectively, with symbol group C (2R specific short-lived symbol). In this embodiment, the “specific symbol” is a symbol that activates the probability variation function after the end of the special game, and the “normal symbol” refers to that the probability variation function is activated after the end of the special game. There is no symbol (the same applies to the second special symbol described later).

  Symbol groups A and B are specific symbols indicating so-called “probable hits” in which the gaming state after the end of the special game is shifted to a probable change state (high probability state), and the special symbol variation count is a big hit within the ST count. A special symbol probability variation function, variation time reduction function, and electric chew support function are provided only until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs. Will be. For the symbol group A, the specified number of rounds for the special game is 16 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. For the symbol group B, the specified number of rounds in the special game is 8 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  In the symbol group C, the number of times and the opening time of the first big prize opening 64 are different from the above “probability hit”, but the gaming state after the end of the special game is changed to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. It is a specific symbol indicating a so-called “sudden probability change hit” to be transferred, and the next big hit occurs within the ST count until the special symbol fluctuation count ends without generating a big hit within the ST count. In the meantime, a special symbol probability variation function, a variation time shortening function, and an electric chew support function are provided. The specified number of rounds for the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the result of the lottery determination is a small hit, the symbol determination by the random number per special symbol is omitted, and the symbol “9” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol. The symbol “9” is associated with the symbol group F (special electric operation symbol 1). In the case of small hits, the game state (probability variation function, variation time shortening function, electric chew support function) and variation pattern selection state will not be triggered, and the game state is maintained before and after the winning lottery. Is done. In addition, when the result of the lottery determination is out of place, the symbol “0” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

  Subsequently, FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol table per second special symbol. In the symbol table per second special symbol, the random symbol value per symbol special symbol, stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the special symbol is activated, the second grand prize The operation patterns of the mouths 65) are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols “11” to “18” of the second special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups D and E according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, symbols “11”, “12”, “13”, and “14” include symbols “15”, “16”, “17”, “ 18 ”is associated with the symbol group E (8R specific time short symbol).

  Symbol groups D and E are specific symbols indicating so-called “probable hits” in which the gaming state after the end of a special game is shifted to a probable change state (high probability state). A special symbol probability variation function, variation time reduction function, and electric chew support function are provided only until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs. Will be. For the symbol group D, the specified number of rounds in the special game is 16 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 65 in one round game is about 30 seconds. For the symbol group E, the specified number of rounds in the special game is 8 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 65 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is a small hit, the symbol determination by the random number per special symbol is omitted, and the symbol “19” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol. The symbol “19” is associated with the symbol group G (special electric operation symbol 2). In the case of small hits, the game state (probability variation function, variation time shortening function, electric chew support function) and variation pattern selection state will not be triggered, and the game state is maintained before and after the winning lottery. Is done. In addition, when the result of the lottery determination is out of place, the symbol “0” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, there are three types of big hit types: 16R big hit (16R specific time short symbol), 8R big hit (8R specific short symbol) and 2R big hit (2R specific short symbol). ing. The expected value for winning a prize ball in the special game (the expected value for winning a prize ball) is 16R big hit> 8R big hit> 2R big hit. Therefore, hereinafter, the 16R jackpot is also referred to as a “high profit jackpot” having the highest prize ball winning expectation value, and the 2R jackpot is also referred to as a “low profit jackpot” having the lowest prize ball winning expectation value. In addition, even if the same number of execution rounds, when a long open unit game (30 seconds) and a short open unit game (0.05 seconds) are mixed, the big hit with many long open unit games is “high” "Large profit". Specifically, special games that have a common number of execution rounds, such as unifying the number of execution rounds to 16 rounds, may include special games that change so that the mode of unit games differs in a predetermined round, In that case, a special game of a type consisting only of short opening unit games in which the opening times of the big winning openings 64 and 65 are relatively short, and the opening times of the big winning openings 64 and 65 after a predetermined number of execution rounds are relative. Special long-open unit games may be included, and the latter constitutes a “high profit jackpot”. Further, even if the same number of execution rounds is a big hit, the substantial profit, that is, the expected value for winning a winning ball may be different depending on the difference in the big winning opening opening pattern.

  Here, as can be seen from the above description, when a big win is won in the first special symbol winning lottery, 16R big hit is selected with a probability of 50%, whereas the second special symbol is positive or negative. In the case of a big hit in the lottery, a 16R big hit is selected with a probability of 75%, so that the player who wins the second starting port 62 wins more balls than the first starting port 61. It is advantageous to the player in that it can be acquired. In this example, a special game that opens and closes the first big winning opening 64 is executed when the first special symbol wins or fails, and the second special symbol wins or loses A special game for opening and closing the two large winning holes 65 is to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special winning hole 65 when the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit. A special game that opens and closes the first special winning opening 64 may be executed when the second special symbol is determined to be a big hit. Also, in this case, a special game for opening and closing the second big prize opening 65 is executed in the case of a big win in the second special symbol success / failure determination than in the case of a big hit in the first special symbol success / failure determination. You may raise the ratio done. At this time, it may be set such that the player is more advantageous to enter the second grand prize opening 65 than to enter the first grand prize opening 64, for example, per round. May be set so that the number of winning balls is high, the expected value of winning balls is high, the number of winning balls per ball is large, and the ease of entering is high. Further, even when there are a plurality of jackpots with special games of the same number of rounds, the substantial profit (expected value for winning a winning ball) may be different depending on the opening pattern of the big winning opening. The count number (regular count number) is the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the big winning openings 64 and 65 in a unit game.

  The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143 selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state and the result of the lottery determination. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines a plurality of types of variation patterns. In each figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a decision value (range of random values) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. The variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation pattern random value belongs to. As for the various variation patterns, the variation time is determined for each variation pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and it is assumed that the symbol variation by the decorative symbol composed of multiple symbols is also executed at the variation time. Is defined as In this example, for convenience of explanation, only a plurality of types of variation patterns will be described as an example, but actually there are more than 100 types of variation patterns.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a variation pattern table for big hits / small hits. The upper (A1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (A2) is a probability variation pattern table, and the lower (A3) is a special variation pattern table. In this example, the selected variation pattern is set to be different according to the variation pattern selection state or according to the jackpot type even in the same variation pattern selection state.

  In the normal fluctuation pattern table (A1), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, either the fluctuation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected, and if the big hit type is 8R big hit, the fluctuation Either the pattern PY2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PY3 (super reach A) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of 2R big hit or small hit, either the fluctuation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. In this normal variation pattern table for big hits / small hits, non-reach variation patterns are not selected, and only the reach variation pattern is selected when a big or small hit is made in a normal state. obtain.

  In the probability variation pattern table (A2), when the big hit type is 16R big hit or 8R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PX7 (super reach B) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of 2R big hit or small hit, either the fluctuation pattern PZ6 (normal reach B) or the fluctuation pattern PZ8 (super reach D) is selected. In this probability variation pattern table for big hits / small hits, non-reach variation patterns are not selected, and if a big hit or small hit is made in a special symbol probability variation state, only the reach variation pattern Can be selected.

  In the special variation pattern table (A3), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PX9 (non-reach C) is selected, and when the big hit type is 8R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PY10 (super reach C) is selected. Is done. . On the other hand, in the case of 2R big hit or small hit, only the fluctuation pattern PZ10 (super reach C) is selected. Here, the variation pattern PX9 in the non-reach C mode is configured as a very short variation time (2 seconds), while the variation pattern PY10, PZ10 in the super reach C mode is configured as a relatively long variation time (120 seconds). Is done.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a variation pattern table for loss. Upper (B1) is a normal variation pattern table, middle (B2) is a probability variation pattern table, and lower (B3) is a special variation pattern table. In this example, the selected variation pattern is set differently depending on the variation pattern selection state.

  In the normal variation pattern table (B1), any one of the variation pattern PH1 (non-reach A), the variation pattern PH2 (normal reach A), the variation pattern PH3 (super reach A), and the variation pattern PH4 (super reach D) is selected. . In the probability variation pattern table (B2), any one of the variation pattern PH5 (non-reach B), the variation pattern PH6 (normal reach B), the variation pattern PH7 (super reach B), and the variation pattern PH8 (super reach D) is selected. . In the special variation pattern table (B3), only the variation pattern PH9 (non-reach C) is selected. Here, the variation pattern PH9 in the non-reach C mode is configured as a very short variation time (2 seconds).

  In the above description, the variation pattern table for deviation is expressed as a single table in any case. However, when the result of the lottery decision is lost, the number of reserved balls for special symbols ( Different variation pattern tables may be selected depending on 0-4). That is, by using a variation pattern table according to the number of reserved balls for special symbols, the proportion of relatively short variation times is increased as the number of activated balls is increased, and the number of reserved operations is small. As a result, a relatively long variation time can be selected.

  The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 selects the special symbol variation pattern, and then instructs the production control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol. (Referred to as “variation pattern designation command”), special design (design group) and production control commands (referred to as “design designation commands”) including information on the gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “designation command”) This is referred to as a “variation start command”), and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

  The normal symbol lottery processing unit 145 includes a normal symbol success / failure determination unit 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination unit 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination unit 148. When the normal symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol lottery processing unit 145 reads the normal symbol random number value and the normal symbol variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol holding storage area, They are stored in the normal symbol success / failure determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180, respectively.

  The normal symbol success / failure determination unit 146 reads out a random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol success / failure determination area of the main information storage unit 180 and executes the determination of success / failure, and determines whether the determination result corresponds to hit or miss. decide. The result of this lottery lottery is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180, and after being used in the subsequent processing, it is cleared when the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. The normal symbol success / failure determination means 146 holds a normal symbol success / failure lottery table which is referred to at the time of the success / failure lottery. In the normal state (low probability state), for example, the normal symbol hit / decision unit 146 Referring to the symbol winning / losing lottery table, in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the normal symbol, for example, referring to the normal symbol winning / losing lottery table with a probability of “282/283”, the normal symbol winning / losing lottery is executed. To do.

  The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to the symbol lottery table and assigns a predetermined winning symbol when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a win, and allocates a predetermined off symbol when the result is wrong. It has become.

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination unit 148 reads the normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180, and refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table to display the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal state. In, a relatively long variation time is selected (for example, seven types of “4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds” are uniformly selected). On the other hand, a relatively short variation time (for example, “0.5 seconds”) is selected in the short time state (easy entry state) of the normal symbol. In the normal symbol game control, in order to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100, the normal symbol lottery winning probability is set to “0” or the normal symbol variation time in the non-electric Chu support state. It is also possible to adopt a specification with a single unit.

  The special game control means 150 relates to the start demonstration effect and the end demonstration effect that are displayed on the effect display device 70 or the like during the special game according to the determined type of jackpot when the result of the lottery is a big hit. Determine the demonstration performance time. Also, the special game control means 150 provides an effect control command (referred to as a “hit start demo command”) for instructing execution of the start demo effect to the effect control board 200 side, and an effect for instructing execution of the end demo effect. A control command (referred to as “big hit end demo command”) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Note that the jackpot start demo command also serves as an opportunity to determine the contents of a series of jackpot effects (start demo effect, round effect, end demo effect) developed during the special game on the effect control board 200 side. The special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “round effect designation command”) for instructing the start of a round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the special game. This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds, information on opening and closing of the big winning openings 64 and 65, information on detection of the big winning opening switches 641 and 651, and the like. Regarding the above demonstration time, not only the big hit symbol, but also the same big hit symbol depending on the gaming state at the time of the big hit (normally or during short time etc.), the demo time related to the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo is different. It may be allowed.

  In addition, when the result of the lottery is a small hit, the special game control means 150 calculates the demonstration performance time related to the small hit start demonstration effect and the small hit end demonstration effect displayed on the effect display device 70 or the like during the small hit game. decide. The special game control means 150 also provides an effect control command (“small hit start demo command”) for instructing execution of a small hit start demo effect and an effect control command (“small hit for start of a small hit end demo effect). An end demo command ") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

  The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 71 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms and displays the first special symbol after the variation display. Let Further, the special symbol display control means 156 displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 72 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status in the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the display of the decorative symbol when the variation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes “0”). An effect control command (referred to as “variation stop command”) is generated. The normal symbol display control means 157 variably displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 75 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol, and displays the regular symbol after the variation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

  When the result of the special symbol winning / losing lottery is a big win, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoids 643 and 653 as a special game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. The electric accessories 642, 652 are opened according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the special game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 642, 652 is set as one round game, and the round game is continuously executed for the specified number of rounds (16R, 8R, 2R in this example). It is. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a special prize opening opening counter for storing the number of operations of the special electric accessories 642 and 652 (that is, the number of rounds being executed). Here, when the type of jackpot is a so-called 16R jackpot (symbol group A, D) or 8R jackpot (symbol group B, E), the first grand prize port 64 or the second grand prize port in one round game. 65 is opened for a maximum of about 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the big hit type is so-called 2R big hit (symbol group C), the first big winning opening 64 is opened for about 0.05 seconds at the maximum in one round game. Here, the closing condition of the special winning openings 64 and 65 in the special game (unit game ending condition) is a lapse of a winning period for a predetermined number of game balls or a predetermined number of seconds.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is a small hit, the electric accessory control means 160 sends a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoids 643 and 653 as a small hit game process after the special symbol is determined and displayed. The special electric combination 642, 652 is opened only for a short period. The small hit game is composed of one round game, and is distinguished from a special game (big hit game) composed of a plurality of round games. Here, when the 2R special game and the small hit game described above are compared, although they are internally different, the point of the same opening / closing time (0.05 seconds) and the number of times of opening / closing are the same (the former is Since one opening and closing per round is twice in two rounds, and the latter is common in two opening and closing per round twice, a game with an approximate opening time / opening pattern is developed.

  In addition, when the winning combination of normal symbols is won, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 623 to open the ordinary electric accessory 622 for a predetermined opening time. Here, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the ordinary electric accessory 622 for an extremely short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the normal state, whereas it is normally electric in the easy to enter state (electric chew support state). The accessory 622 is opened for a relatively long time (for example, 4 seconds) compared to the normal state.

  The gaming state control means 165 determines the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the type of symbol group related to the jackpot when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is a jackpot, and after the special game is over. Switch the gaming state of. In the following, among the functions related to the special symbol and the normal symbol described above, 1) the gaming state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol, and the electric chew support function operate is referred to as “probability variation state”. 2) A gaming state in which only the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are operated is referred to as a “short-time state”. 3) A gaming state in which only the special symbol probability variation function is activated is referred to as a “latency probability variation state”. 4) A state in which all functions are not activated is referred to as a “normal state”. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, since it is a so-called ST machine that cuts the number of times, the gaming state after the end of the special game has a predetermined number of times that the number of changes in the special symbol is counted from the end of the special game, In other words, the probability variation state continues until the number of STs is reached (however, if the next big hit occurs within the number of STs, the probability variation state ends with the variation). When the small hit is made during the ST period, the ST number is not reset (revived) to 0, and the ST number is continuously counted before and after the small hit occurs. In the present embodiment, the ST number is set to 100 times, but it is needless to say that the ST number may be set to another number. In addition, when changing to the probability variation state, the probability variation function of the special symbol, the special symbol variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function operate simultaneously, and each function will continue as long as the probability variation state continues. Become. If the result of the special symbol winning lottery is a big hit, regardless of whether the game state before the big hit is the normal state or the probable change state, the special state is the normal state and after the special game the ST The number of times is limited and the probability is changed uniformly. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol winning / losing lottery is a small hit, if the game state before the small hit is the normal state, the game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also in the normal state. In addition, when the gaming state before the small hit is the special symbol probability changing state, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the special symbol probability changing state. It should be noted that the “probability change state”, “time-short state”, and “latency probability change state” are all advantageous game states for the player as compared to the “normal state”. In the following, each game state is divided into a combination of a special symbol game operation state (high probability / low probability) and a normal symbol game operation state (open extension / no open extension). "High probability / open extension", (2) Short time state is "low probability / open extension", (3) Latency probability change state is "high probability / non-open extension", (4) Normal state is "low probability / non-open" It may also be called “extension”.

  Further, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the special game based on the type of the big hit (types of the symbol groups A to E) when the result of the lottery is a big hit, and the special lottery Switch the variation pattern selection state after the game. The variation pattern selection state is one of the conditions referred to when selecting the above variation pattern table. The switching timing of the variation pattern selection state is when the special game ends or when the end number of times of the variation pattern selection state has expired. In the present embodiment, there are three types of variation pattern selection states, such as “low probability normal variation state α”, “high probability reduced variation state β”, and “high probability special variation state γ”. Here, the low probability normal variation state α refers to a normal pattern variation pattern (A1, B1 in FIG. 7) selected when the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state). This is the state to be determined. The high probability shortening variation state β refers to a probability variation pattern table (A2, B2 in FIG. 7) selected when the gaming state is a probability variation state of a special symbol (excluding a limited period described later). This is a state in which the variation pattern is determined. The high probability special variation state γ is a state in which the game state is a probable variation state of a special symbol, and the number of symbol variation corresponding to a certain period immediately after the end of the special game (the maximum number (4) of active reserve balls of the second special symbol In a state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the special variation pattern table (A3 and B3 in FIG. 7) that is allowed to be selected only (period of the (four times) variation display: referred to as “limited period”). is there. In the present embodiment, regardless of which of the symbol groups A to D is selected, the variation pattern selection state is (1) immediately after the end of the special game, and the high probability special variation state γ only for a limited period of four symbol variation times. Stay, (2) after the limited period, and when the number of executions is within the ST number (100 times), stay in the high probability shortening variation state β, and (3) after the end of the ST number, The number of executions stays in the low probability normal fluctuation state γ after the 101st time. Of course, the period until the first hit occurs stays in the low probability normal fluctuation state α. The gaming state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as “gaming state designation command”) including the current gaming state information and variation pattern selection state information, and stores this command in the main information storage means 180. Store in the area.

  The error monitoring control unit 170 monitors input information of the I / O port circuit 104 and inspects a magnetic detection signal by a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, a radio wave detection signal by a radio wave sensor, a door / frame opening signal, and the like. Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, an effect control command including the error information (“error effect designation command”) is requested to indicate an error state effect to the effect control board 200. Although not shown in FIG. 3, the door opening switch is a detecting unit for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is opened, and the frame opening switch is a detecting unit for detecting whether or not the front frame 2 is opened. The back set release switch is a detecting means for determining whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting a so-called goto action.

  The main information storage means 180 stores random number value information acquired in special symbol games and normal symbol games, operation holding ball information of special symbols and normal symbols, game states related to special symbol games and normal symbol games (probability change state, time reduction state, Information on easy entry), information on variation pattern selection status, result information on winning / failing lottery (big hit, small hit, loss), information on stop and variation patterns on special symbols and regular symbols, information on special games (round) Number, release time, release mode (number of releases per round game), etc.), status information indicating the operating state of the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 642, production control command It is configured to temporarily store data information and the like, and has a predetermined storage area for storing each information.

  The command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is made. Has been. Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. Bit 7 of the MOD data is “1” to distinguish MODE and EVENT. Bit 7 of the EVENT data is “0”. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output to each of MODE and EVENT. In principle, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted for each interrupt period in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the effect control board 200 includes an effect lottery random number generation means 210, an effect control means 220, a lamp effect control means 230, an accessory effect control means 240, an error effect control means 250, and a sub-main information storage means 260. , Command transmission / reception means 270. Note that each of the above-described units in the effect control board 200 is configured by sub-main CPU 201, ROM 202, RAM 203, hardware such as an electronic circuit arranged on the effect control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 202. Is a functional representation of things.

  The effect lottery random number generation unit 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub main CPU 201. These random number counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. This software random number includes a pre-reading notice lottery random number used for the lottery of whether or not the pre-reading notice effect can be executed, a pre-reading notice pattern random number used for selecting the pre-reading notice pattern, a decoration design random number used for selecting a stop pattern of the decoration design, and a decoration. Fluctuation effect pattern random number used for selection of design variation effect pattern, notice effect pattern random number used for selection of notice effect pattern, jackpot effect pattern random number used for selection of jackpot effect pattern, whether or not to execute execution of rendezvous villa effect The lotus lottery lottery random number used for lottery, the lotus lotus production pattern random number used for selection of the lotus hall production pattern of the on-hold Renzo production, etc. are included. The update time of these random numbers is updated using the remaining time when the command analysis is not performed in the production control side main process described later.

  The effect supervising means 220 includes an effect mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a prefetch notice control means 223, a decoration symbol determination means 224, a variable effect determination means 225, a notice effect determination means 226, and a big hit effect determination means 227. Including.

  The holding information display control means 222 includes a first reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a second reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol. Have. When the holding information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the first holding ball number counter and the second holding ball are based on the information of the operation holding ball number included in the symbol storage number command. Update the value of the number counter. In addition, the hold information display control unit 222 applies the action hold ball of the first special symbol to the hold display portions 701 and 702 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter. Control is performed to display the number of reserved images corresponding to the number and the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of active reserved balls of the second special symbol. In the normal display mode, when a special design actuating ball is generated, a white-colored hold image is displayed. The reserved image can take any one of “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow” as a special display mode (display color) from “white” of the normal display mode (display color) . The above four special display modes are related to the reliability that the lottery result is a big hit (referred to as “big hit reliability”). The jackpot reliability is set to be higher step by step. In this example, when the reserved image changes to “rainbow”, the big hit is deterministic in the pre-reading operation holding ball. Note that, in the hold change prefetch notice effect, the change in the display mode of the hold image may be expressed by a shape, a pattern, or the like instead of the display color.

  The prefetch notice control means 223 determines whether or not the prefetch notice can be executed by a lottery when the predetermination command is received from the main control board 100. The pre-reading notice control means 223 distinguishes the information of the first special symbol pre-determined result and the information of the second special symbol pre-determined result, and enters each of up to a predetermined upper limit number (4) of the operation holding balls. Temporarily stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form combined with the order. This pre-read information storage area has the same configuration as the reserved storage area of the main control board 100, and in the order of entering the starting ports 61 and 62, the reserved 1 storage area (first reserved storage area), A hold 2 storage area (second hold storage area), a hold 3 storage area (third hold storage area), and a hold 4 storage area (fourth hold storage area) are provided. Each reserved storage area can store information on the result of prior determination, information on the design prior determination result, and information on the variation pattern prior determination result as a set.

  When the prefetching notice control means 223 determines whether or not the prefetching notice can be executed, the prefetching notice control means 223 makes a prefetching judgment (“prefetching judgment”) for the operation holding ball that is the target of the prefetching notice based on the result of the preliminary judgment by the main control board 100. (Also called). In the present embodiment, the prefetching notice includes a normal prefetching notice and a special prefetching notice (a later-described on-hold consecutive villa effect). Usually, the pre-reading notice is generated as one aspect of a so-called continuous notice effect that predicts the possibility of a big win or reach effect over a plurality of continuous display of decorative symbols. When it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) can be executed, information on the pre-determining command from the main control board 100 (pre-judgment result) and information on the symbol memory number command (the number of currently operating suspended balls) are obtained. Analyzing, a pre-reading notice effect pattern over a plurality of continuous variable displays is determined by lottery for an operation hold ball (referred to as “trigger hold”) that triggers the generation of this pre-reading notice effect. Note that the normal look-ahead notice includes various variations such as a pending change look-ahead notice effect, a chance eye look-ahead notice effect, and a background change look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, the special look-ahead notice corresponds to a reserved-in-village production that suggests or informs that there is a possibility that there is an operation holding ball that becomes a big hit when the big hit is won. Hereinafter, an outline of the “reserved in-resort villa production” will be described.

  First, the “holding renrenso” means that, when a success / failure determination result is obtained when a certain operation holding ball has been digested, the winning / failing determination related to the operation holding ball is permitted until the end of the special game. This means that there is an operation holding ball (also referred to as “specific holding”) that is expected to be a big hit in one or more subsequent operation holding balls that exist at a predetermined timing within a specific period. In the following, among the subsequent operation holding balls, the operation holding balls that are expected to be out of play are also referred to as “out of hold”, and the operation holding balls that are expected to be in a small hit are also referred to as “small hit holding”. .

  In the present embodiment, so-called preferential digestion is adopted, in which the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation reservation ball of the first special symbol, and the subsequent operation that is the target of the in-hold extension resort As the holding ball (specific holding), the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is targeted. Thus, in this embodiment, since the preferential digestion which preferentially digests the operation reservation ball of the 2nd special symbol is adopted in this embodiment, the reservation in the retreat in the reservation when the previous operation reservation ball is won by the big hit It occurs on the assumption that the gaming state is a specific gaming state. The “specific game state” is a state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than the normal state, and is at least one of a special symbol probability variation function, a special symbol variation time reduction function, and an electric chew support function. This is a state in which the function is activated. In this example, it is a condition that at least the electric chew support function (the easy entry state) is activated as the specific gaming state. Here, in this embodiment, during the ST period after the end of the special game, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function operate (the operation starts simultaneously and the operation ends simultaneously). Since it is configured, it can be said that it is always in a specific gaming state during the ST period. . In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, if the result of the determination is a probable big hit (when the special game is finished, the situation is shifted to the specific gaming state), the subsequent Even if there is a specific hold in the operation hold ball, it is configured so that a hold-in-ream zone effect does not occur during the special game.

  Subsequently, the “reserved-in-ream resort production” is an effect for suggesting or notifying that it is a reserved-in-ream resort. The reserved-ream villa production includes a first-reserved-ream villa effect (referred to as “reserved-reservoir rendition A”) that occurs during symbol variation, and a second reserved-ream villa that occurs during a special game. Production (referred to as “reserved in-rensou production B”) is included. In addition, in this embodiment, although both the 1st on-hold consecutive villa production and the 2nd on-hold consecutive villa production are provided, you may provide either one of the on-hold consecutive villa production. .

  Whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect A can be executed is determined by lottery when the first execution condition is satisfied at the timing when the preceding operation holding ball is digested. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the preceding operation holding ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and the specific hold that becomes the high profit big hit (16R big hit) in the subsequent operation holding ball is the first specific hold. If included, the first execution condition is satisfied. In other words, even if there is a specific hold (scheduled to be a big hit) in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type related to the specific hold is not a high profit big hit, Not executed. Furthermore, “In the situation where there are multiple specific holds in the subsequent operation hold, the jackpot type related to the first specific hold is not a high profit jackpot, and the jackpot type related to the next specific hold is a high profit jackpot. Even in the case, the on-hold consecutive resort production A is not executed. Therefore, in this example, when the on-hold extended villa production A occurs, it becomes deterministic to perform the on-hold extended villa with a high profit big hit (16R big hit). Even if a specific hold that becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit) is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, the hold scheduled to be digested before that specific hold is “lost. However, if it is a specific fluctuation pattern (if it is a fluctuation pattern of a predetermined time or longer, for example, a fluctuation pattern other than the shortest fluctuation time or a fluctuation pattern related to reach) is planned to be selected " A configuration may be adopted in which A is not executed.

  Whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort production B can be executed is determined by lottery when the second execution condition is satisfied at the timing before the start of the special game. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the preceding operation holding ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and in addition to the case where the specific holding is included in the subsequent operation holding ball, all the subsequent operation holding balls are held off. Even in this case, it is assumed that the second execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, even if the on-hold consecutive villa production B occurs, it may not be determined that it is the on-hold consecutive villa production, and a so-called gasse production may occur. Similarly to the on-hold consecutive villa production A, when the on-hold consecutive villa production B occurs, a configuration in which the on-hold consecutive villa production becomes definite may be adopted. Similarly to the on-hold consecutive villa production A, when the on-hold consecutive villa production B occurs, a configuration in which the on-hold consecutive villa production becomes definite may be adopted. Also, in the in-holding Renren production B, similarly to the in-holding Renren production A, it is assumed that the preceding operation holding ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and the high profit in the subsequent operation holding ball The second execution condition may be satisfied when a specific hold that is a big hit (16R big hit) is included as the first specific hold. In other words, even if there is a specific hold (scheduled to be a big hit) in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type related to the specific hold is not a high profit big hit, Not executed. Furthermore, “In the situation where there are multiple specific holds in the subsequent operation hold, the jackpot type related to the first specific hold is not a high profit jackpot, and the jackpot type related to the next specific hold is a high profit jackpot. Even in the case, the on-hold consecutive resort production B is not executed. Therefore, in this case, when the on-hold extended resort production B occurs, it is definite to perform the on-hold extended resort with a high profit big hit (16R big hit). Even if a specific hold that becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit) is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, the hold scheduled to be digested before that specific hold is “lost. However, if it is a specific fluctuation pattern (if it is a fluctuation pattern of a predetermined time or longer, for example, a fluctuation pattern other than the shortest fluctuation time or a fluctuation pattern related to reach) is planned to be selected " It is good also as a structure which does not perform B.

  The prefetch notice control means 223 refers to the information of the predetermination result stored in the prefetch information storage area (hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area) of the sub-main information storage means 260. Then, the pre-reading determination is performed in the order of the hold 1 storage area → the hold 2 storage area → the hold 3 storage area → the hold 4 storage area, that is, in order from the earliest one of the subsequent operation hold balls. In the case where a plurality of specific holds are included in the operation hold ball, the prefetch determination of the on-hold extended game effect A only targets the first specific hold, while the pre-read determination of the on-hold extended game effect B Now, we will target multiple specific holds. That is, while the number of specific holds notified in the on-hold consecutive resort effect is always one, the number of specific holds notified in the on-hold extended resort effect B is not limited to one. There may be times.

  Subsequently, the content of the on-hold consecutive villa production (referred to as “renso production pattern”) is determined based on the continuous villa production pattern table. In this example, a plurality of types of consecutive-village effect pattern tables that are referred to when determining the consecutive-village effect pattern are held.

  FIG. 8A shows the extended villa production pattern table to be referred to when selecting the extended villa production pattern of the on-hold extended villa production A, and FIG. It is a consecutive resort production pattern table referred when doing. A plurality of types of consecutive-village effect patterns are defined in each consecutive-village effect pattern table, and the contents of the effects and the execution timing are determined corresponding to each consecutive-village effect pattern. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is shown, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining the villa effect pattern according to the villa effect pattern random value Is set, and based on which judgment value the random number value of the renage effect pattern belongs to, the renage effect pattern is determined. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, effect images AX and BX are prepared as specific effect modes of the on-hold consecutive resort effect, but the “effect image” is composed of a still image. An effect image composed of both an effect image, an effect image composed of a moving image, and a still image and a moving image can be exemplified.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (A), in the effect pattern table of the on-hold consecutive resort effect A, a plurality of types of effect patterns PA1, PA2 are defined. When the consecutive-village effect pattern PA1 is selected, a special effect image “AX1” that does not appear in any scene other than the reserved consecutive-village effect during the decoration design change is displayed. As shown in FIG. 9A, as the effect image AX1, for example, an effect in which a shooting star crosses the screen during the variation of the decorative design is applicable. When the Renso production pattern P2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 9B, a special jackpot symbol “S. An effect in which “S / S” is determined and displayed is applicable.

  In addition, in this example, in the reserved internal ranger production A, the preceding operation reservation ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R specific big hit), and the high profit big hit (16R specific big hit) in the subsequent operation hold ball. Occurs only when a specific hold is scheduled. Therefore, it is determined that high profit jackpots will continue at the time of the on-hold consecutive villa production A.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (B), a plurality of types of effect patterns PB <b> 1 to PB <b> 9 are defined in the effect pattern table of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B. When the production pattern PB1 is selected, a special production image “BX1” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold Renren production is displayed during the start demonstration production. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the start demonstration effect, character information “bonus” is displayed as the effect image BX1. When the effect patterns PB2 to PB7 are selected, a special effect image “BX2” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold consecutive villa effect during the round effect is displayed. As shown in FIG. 9D, the effect image BX2 corresponds to, for example, an effect in which one image imitating a secret book appears in the screen. When the production pattern PB8 is selected, a special production image “BX3” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold Renren production is displayed during the round production. As shown in FIG. 9E, the effect image BX3 corresponds to, for example, an effect in which two images imitating a secret book appear in the screen. This effect pattern PB8 can be selected when there are a plurality of specific holds in the subsequent operation hold balls. When the production pattern PB9 is selected, a special production image “BX4” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold Renren production is displayed during the end demonstration production. As shown in FIG. 9 (F), in the end demonstration effect, character information “mystery tradition” is displayed as the effect image BX4.

  As described above, the on-hold consecutive villa production B occurs in any of the start demonstration production, the round production, and the demonstration end production in the series of the big hit production. In addition, the on-hold consecutive resort effect B may occur only once (single round) or may occur multiple times (multiple rounds) in multiple round effects. In addition, in this example, on-hold consecutive resort production B is a case where a specific hold is included in a subsequent operation hold ball on the premise that the preceding operation hold ball is a high profit big hit (16R specific big hit). In addition, it may occur even when a specific hold is not included in a subsequent operation hold ball (that is, only a hold off). That is, the production patterns PB1 and PB9 that are selected as the on-hold consecutive resort production B that occurs during the start demonstration production and the end demonstration production can be selected only when specific suspension (one piece) is included. For this reason, the production patterns PB2 to PB8 that are selected as the on-hold consecutive resort production B that occurs during the round production correspond to the production that informs the confirmation of the on-hold consecutive resort. 2), it can be selected not only when a specific reservation is included, but it corresponds to an effect that suggests the possibility of a suspended resort. Therefore, even if a mystery book (one or two) appears as the reservation-in-rensou production B, the reservation-in-rensou is not necessarily fixed, and when the reservation-in-rensou production B related to the mystery book occurs. In the following operation hold ball, there is a specific hold (when the notification of the on-hold consecutive villa is true) and there is no specific hold (when the notification of the on-hold consecutive resort is Gase) It can occur alternatively. In addition, the production patterns PB2 to PB7 selected as the on-hold consecutive resort production B that occurs during the round production can be selected when one specific hold is included or when no specific hold is included. Therefore, the effect image BX2 corresponding to this can notify only the possibility that one specific hold is included in the subsequent operation hold ball, whereas the effect pattern PB8 has a plurality of specific hold. Since it can be selected when it is included or when specific hold is not included, the effect image “BX3” corresponding to this indicates the possibility that a plurality of specific holds are included in the subsequent operation hold ball. It can be notified. That is, the number of specific holds included in the subsequent operation hold ball is suggested to the player in a form corresponding to the number of secret books.

  In addition, when the on-hold extended game effect occurs, that is, when a big hit occurs in each of the preceding operation holding ball and the subsequent operation holding ball, a plurality of special games may occur in a short period of time. When scheduled, a special continuous effect for making these special game states appear as one special game state in appearance is generated. In other words, the special continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the special game continues during the symbol variation effect, even though the special game has actually ended once and has shifted to the symbol variation effect. It is. In this example, for convenience of explanation, two jackpots are assumed as a plurality of jackpots. Here, the big hits and special games based on the preceding active holding balls are also referred to as “first big hits” and “first special games”, and the big hits and special games based on the subsequent active holding balls are called “subsequent big hits” and “after” It is also called “special game”.

  The special continuous performance is at least the end demonstration effect in the previous special game ("special end demonstration effect") and the symbol variation effect ("special symbol variation effect") that occurs between the previous special game and the later special game. ) And a start demonstration effect ("special start demonstration effect") in a later special game are continuously connected. Specifically, the special end demonstration production, the special symbol variation production, and the special start demonstration production are executed as a series of continuous productions, and the production has a consistent storyline in the production from the previous special game to the later special game. By using the contents, related production contents, or a series of moving image displays, it can be shown as one special game in which the previous special game and the subsequent special game are continued. For this reason, unlike the normal end demo performance, the special end demo performance at the big jackpot does not display a message to announce the end of the special game, and similarly, the special start demo performance at the subsequent big hit Then, unlike a normal start demonstration production, a message telling the start of a special game is not displayed. In addition, as the above-described modification, the special continuous effect is configured by continuously connecting the end demonstration effect in the previous special game and one or more symbol change effects until the symbol change effect related to the subsequent jackpot. It may be.

  In this example, the execution condition of the special continuous performance is that the previous jackpot is a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) and the subsequent jackpot is a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot), that is, the preceding operation holding ball. Is that the 16R jackpot is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball. In addition, when the subsequent operation hold balls are all out of hold, or when the 8R big hit is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold balls, a special continuous effect is produced as a so-called “gasse effect”. End halfway.

  The special symbol variation effect constituting a part of the special continuous effect occurs within a limited period immediately after the end of the previous special game. Therefore, the content of the special symbol variation effect is based on a variation effect pattern (referred to as a “special variation effect pattern”) selected while staying in the special effect mode. In this example, the special variation effect pattern is selected only when the lottery result is 16R big hit or miss. That is, in this limited period, when the 16R big hit or lose, a special variation effect in which the variation time is set to 2 seconds shorter than the average variation time (the shortest variation time in this example) occurs. The special variation effect pattern is selected even in the case of a loss, because the earliest specific hold (16R big hit) is not necessarily the earliest in the subsequent operation hold ball, and there is a gap hold between them. However, this is because it is necessary to connect with special variation effects until the first specific hold (16R big hit) is consumed. Specifically, on the main control board 100 side, there is a transition to the high probability special variation state γ within a limited period after the special game, and the special variation pattern table is referred to in selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. In the special variation pattern table, when the 16R big hit or miss, special variation patterns PX9 and PH9 that both have a very short variation time (2 seconds) are selected. On the side of the effect control board 200, while staying in the special effect mode, the special change effect pattern is selected in association with the change patterns PX9 and PH9, and the special change effect is executed. The reason for configuring the special variation effect from the ultra-short variation time (2 seconds) is to shorten the variation effect that occurs between the previous special game and the later special game, This is to connect seamlessly with the special game later.

  Note that if all of the subsequent operation holding balls are off, a special variation effect will occur during the limited period, but the subsequent big hit (16R big hit) will not occur. The process ends with (so-called Gase production). On the other hand, if the subsequent jackpot is an 8R jackpot, a super reach effect will appear during the limited period, and the special continuous effect will end in the middle (so-called “gase effect”), resulting in a high profit jackpot. Is also denied. Therefore, within the limited period, as the variation effect pattern, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is 16R big hit, only the super short variation mode (special variation production: 2 seconds) is selected, whereas when the result is 8R big hit. Since only the long-time variation mode (super reach production: 90 seconds) is selected, it is denied that the high-profit big hits will be held at the time when the decoration pattern variation mode has been developed into a reach production. In addition, when all the subsequent operation hold balls are only out of hold, or when the 8R big hit is included as the first specific hold in the subsequent operation hold balls, the special continuous effect is not executed. It may be configured (that is, a special continuous effect is generated only when the earliest specific hold is 16R big hit). In such a case, it is preferable that the reserved in-ream villa is determined by the occurrence of the in-hold reed villa production B without including the gasse effect in the on-reserved ream villa production B.

  In the present embodiment, the special continuous effect includes a pseudo-count effect that occurs in a round effect in a later special game. This pseudo count effect is displayed by adding the number of rounds and the number of winning prize balls in the previous special game to the number of rounds and the number of winning prize balls in the later special game (details will be described later).

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are the following constraint conditions for executing the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38).

  1-1) In the case where the on-hold extended game effect A is generated during the symbol variation display based on the digestion of the preceding operation reserved ball, the on-hold extended game effect B is not generated during the special game after the variable display. The reason for this is that if the on-hold extended villa production B is generated again during the special game, the number of on-hold extended villa times (the number of specific holdings in the subsequent operation holding ball) is one. Regardless, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that there are multiple times, and because in this example it is a reserved area rendezvous production B that is not a confirmed notification effect, the player is worried about whether a retained reed resort will really occur. This is because there is a risk of memorizing it. In addition, even when the on-hold extended rens production A occurs during the symbol variation display based on the digestion of the preceding operation holding ball, the on-hold renso production B is generated during the special game after the variation display. In that case, it is preferable to configure the on-hold consecutive villa production B as a confirmed notification production of the on-hold consecutive villa production.

  1-2) In the case where the on-reserved range rendition effect A is generated during the symbol variation display based on the digestion of the preceding actuated reserve ball, the on-hold ranger during the symbol variation display when the subsequent actuated reserve ball is digested Production A does not occur again. This is because, even when trying to show two special game states as one special game state with the occurrence of the special continuous production, the on-holding renja production A as the symbol variation production occurred during the execution of this special continuous production. Then, there is a possibility of losing the meaning of concealing that the design variation effect is being performed. In addition, when the special continuous production is started in response to the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort production A, the variation time when the subsequent operation holding ball is digested during this special continuous production (within a limited period) is extremely short. Since it is set to (2 seconds), the production effect is low even if the on-hold consecutive resort production A is generated within this short time, and both productions are produced by the competition between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production. This is because the effect may be diluted.

  1-3) In the case where the holding-in-ream zone effect A occurs during the fluctuation display based on the digestion of the preceding operation-holding ball, the reservation-in-ream resort during the jackpot effect when the subsequent operation-holding ball becomes a big hit Production B can occur. This is because even if it is during the special succession production, if it occurs during the big hit production, the player feels that the normal on-hold range resort production B has occurred, and it is not possible to create a sense of discomfort. In addition, since the special continuous production is connected to a series of productions from at least the end demonstration production during the previous jackpot production to the start demonstration production during the subsequent big hit production, This is because there is no inconvenience that the on-hold consecutive villa production and the special continuous production compete with each other as long as the on-hold consecutive villa production is generated at the timing after the round presentation in the special game.

  The effect mode control means 221 controls the transition of the effect mode in accordance with the game state designation command from the main control board 100 and the consistency with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Execute. In the present embodiment, a normal effect mode α, a probability change effect mode β, and a special effect mode γ are included as the three types of effect modes, and the variation patterns of the special symbols instructed from the main control board 100 are the same. In addition, the variation effect pattern (details will be described later) for specifying the specific content of the symbol variation effect is set differently for each effect mode. On the effect display device 70, an effect mode notification image (in this example, a background image to be displayed on the back of the decorative symbol) corresponding to the effect mode currently staying is displayed, and this background image is different for each effect mode. Since it is set, the player can recognize which effect mode he is currently staying in from the type of background image.

  Each production mode will be outlined. First, the normal effect mode α is set when the low probability normal variation state α is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side, and “normal background” is displayed as the background image. The probability variation effect mode β is set when the high probability reduction variation state β is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side, and “probability variation background” is displayed as the background image. The special effect mode γ is set when the high probability special variation state γ is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side. This special effect mode stays for a period of four times (limited period) immediately after the end of the special game, and when this limited period is exceeded, transition to the probability change effect mode β. When the on-hold consecutive resort effect B occurs during the special game, that is, when the continuous variation effect is executed, “special background” is displayed as the background image. This special background is common to the background display in the special start demonstration production and the special end demonstration production, and as a series of processes during the special continuous production, a common background display is performed, so that it is an element of the special continuous production. Also works. On the other hand, when the on-hold consecutive resort effect B does not occur during the special game, that is, when the continuous variation effect is not executed, the “probable change background” common to the probability change effect mode is displayed as the background image.

  The decorative design determining means 224 is configured to combine the final stop symbols of the decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, The left symbol is determined by lottery. In this example, three symbol sequences including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured. This decorative design is formed by, for example, an identification element made up of numbers or letters. In this example, ten types such as numbers “1” to “9” and characters “S” are set as identification elements. Each decoration symbol circulates in each display area Z1, Z2, Z3 in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” →... → “8” → “9” → “S” Display.

  The decorative symbol determination means 224 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. As the plural types of tables, there are a stop symbol pattern table for big hits, a stop symbol pattern table for small hits, a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach, a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach. The decorative symbol stop symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes “stop symbol indicating jackpot (big hit symbol)” and “stop symbol indicating loss (loss symbol)”. The big hit symbol indicating the specific big hit (probable big hit) is a combination of stop modes (for example, “7 · 7 · 7”) in which three symbols having the same odd number are arranged. The big hit symbol indicating the normal big hit (non-probable big hit) is a combination of stop modes (for example, “2.2-2.2”) in which three symbols with the same even number are arranged. The off symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, “1 · 3 · 8”) in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol having a number different from the other numbers. Here, of the out-of-order symbols, the out-of-reach symbol is a combination of stop modes in which only the middle symbol is shifted back and forth by several frames in a state where the left symbol and the right symbol are coincident (for example, “3 · 1 · 3”). Become. In the case of a “stop symbol indicating a small hit (small hit symbol)” or a 2R big hit symbol even if it is a big hit symbol, for example, a combination of predetermined stop modes such as “3, 5, 7” is used. There is a case. In the present embodiment, as described above, “S · S · S” is provided as a special jackpot symbol for definite notification of the on-hold range resort. When it is determined to execute the on-hold consecutive-village effect A, the decorative symbol determining means 224, when the consecutive-village effect pattern PA2 is selected, the normal jackpot symbol ("3.3.3" or the like) ) Is replaced with a special jackpot symbol (“S, S, S”).

  Based on the information (variation pattern information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, the variation effect determining means 225 defines the variation process (effect process) from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative symbol. Determine the production pattern. In this embodiment, the design variation effect (reach effect) performed after the reach display includes a reach effect with a simple effect content (normal reach effect) and a reach effect (super reach effect) where the effect content develops in the middle. . The variation effect determining means 225 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation effect pattern, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol is selected from the plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables. ) Is selected. In the variation effect pattern table, the variation effect pattern random value and the variation effect pattern are associated with each other according to the result of the variation pattern lottery of the special symbol (that is, the reach type). Here, a basic pattern (for example, “normal reach A”, “super reach A”, etc.) of the symbol variation is determined as the variation pattern on the main control board 100 side, whereas the variation control pattern on the effect control substrate 200 side Based on the basic pattern, a detailed pattern of design variation (for example, “normal reach A1, A2, A3...”, “Super reach A1, A2, A3. In this way, the variation display pattern of the decorative design defines a variation display mode of the decorative design, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of variation of the decorative design to the end of the variation. The timing for generating the notice effect at the stage is also defined as a time schedule. Note that the stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each variation effect pattern. In this embodiment, in principle, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol. However, if it is a variation effect pattern with a short variation time, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are stopped almost simultaneously, and if it is a specific variation effect pattern, the left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol It can also be stopped. At this time, if it is not the stopping order of the above principle (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the big hit expectation degree tends to be relatively high.

  The notice effect determining means 226 determines the notice effect pattern that defines the content of the notice effect that is executed at each stage of the decorative symbol change process according to the scenario of the change effect pattern described above. The notice effect pattern includes an effect pattern that displays an image or animation of a specific character temporarily or stepwise, an effect pattern that outputs a specific sound, an effect pattern that operates a movable accessory, and the like. The notice effect is executed in parallel with the variation display of the decorative symbol and suggests in advance that the jackpot reliability that the symbol variation stops in the jackpot mode is high. The notice effect includes a notice effect that is executed before the reach state occurs (including when the reach occurs) in the process of changing the decorative symbol, and a notice effect that is executed after the reach state occurs. Each of the announcement effects has different jackpot reliability. Basically, the announcement effect displayed after the occurrence of the reach has a relatively higher reliability of the announcement effect displayed after the occurrence of the reach. It is high. The notice effect determining means 226 maintains a notice effect pattern table to be referred to when selecting the notice effect pattern for each type of the notice effect, and according to the type of the notice effect generated according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. A notice effect pattern table is selected. The notice effect determining means 226 refers to the notice effect pattern table selected above and, based on the notice effect pattern random number obtained from the effect lottery random number generator 210, draws a lot of kinds of notice effect patterns. Choose one. In addition, as a kind of specific notice effect pattern, a comment notice effect pattern, a background notice effect pattern, an SU (step-up) notice effect pattern, a group notice effect pattern, a cut-in notice effect pattern, an accessory movable notice effect pattern, Etc. are prepared. This notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing one or a plurality of notice effects with the decorative display of the effect display device 70. For this reason, even in the case of decorative display variation display using the same variation production pattern, various production modes can be generated by combining with one or a plurality of notice productions.

  The jackpot effect determining means 227 determines the contents of the jackpot effect (a jackpot effect pattern) for notifying that the special game is being played. The jackpot effect includes a start demonstration effect for notifying the start of a special game, a round effect for notifying that a round game is in progress, and an end demonstration effect for notifying the end of a special game. When the jackpot effect determining means 227 receives the jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100, the jackpot effect pattern (start demo effect pattern, round effect, etc.) based on the jackpot type information stored in the sub main information storage means 260, etc. Pattern, end demo production pattern). In the jackpot production pattern, a jackpot start demonstration production time, a round production time (production time according to the opening pattern of the big winning openings 64 and 65), and a jackpot end demonstration production time are set according to the type of jackpot. A series of production contents are set along the time axis. In addition, the jackpot effect determining means 227 executes the start demonstration effect in response to receiving the jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100 according to the jackpot effect pattern, and receives each round effect designation command as an opportunity. An effect is executed, and an end demo effect is executed when a jackpot end demo command is received.

  Here, in the normal jackpot start demonstration effect, for example, the word “start the jackpot” is displayed on the screen to announce the start of the special game. In a normal round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of winning prize balls on the screen are displayed, and various images (such as animation images) that excite the special game are displayed. Then, in the normal jackpot end demonstration effect, for example, the word “End of jackpot” is displayed on the screen to notify the end of the special game.

  In addition, when a special continuous production is executed, the end demonstration production in the previous jackpot is replaced with a special production content (a production content that has a unity with the special variation production) and the character of the big hit end Is not displayed. In addition, when a special continuous production is executed, the start demonstration production in the later jackpot is replaced with a special production content (a production content that has a unity with the special variation production), and the character that starts the big hit Is not displayed. In addition, when a special continuous production is executed, in the round production in the later special game, the number of rounds of the later special game is added to the number of rounds of the previous special game, and the rear A pseudo-count effect is provided in which the number of prize balls obtained for the special game is added to the number of prize balls obtained for the previous special game. The jackpot effect determining means 227 executes a promotion effect (promotion success effect, promotion failure effect) as a jackpot effect during the special game (details will be described later).

  As described above, the production control unit 220 performs image control commands relating to images and sound based on the determined production content (prefetching production pattern, consecutive resort production pattern, variation production pattern, notice production pattern, stop design pattern, jackpot production pattern, etc.). And is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

  The lamp effect control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, and the like according to the effect contents set by the effect control means 220. The lamp effect control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for lighting control of the effect lamp LP (the frame lamp 10, the panel lamp 25), and the lamp according to the determined effect pattern. Data is read, and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

  The accessory effect control means 240 controls the driving of each movable accessory 24 according to the effect contents set by the effect supervision means 220. The accessory effect control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable accessory 24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. To do.

  The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100 and to notify the gaming machine that an error state has occurred according to the error effect pattern. Yes.

  The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decoration symbol information, variation effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like, and a predetermined number for storing each information. A storage area is provided. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing an effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing an image control command to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300 ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

  The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interruption based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100 and executes an effect control command reception interrupt process (details will be described later). In this interrupt process, various effect control commands are sent. To get. When the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the effect control command reception interrupt process preferentially over other interrupt processes (interrupt processes with a priority level less than 7 described later). ing.

  Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 stores in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to instruct execution of the effect contents (variation effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative symbol information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The image control command thus transmitted is transmitted to the image control board 300 by a serial communication method. In principle, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined period (500 μs in this example) in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. Thereby, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative design according to the scenario of the change effect pattern. The notice effect is displayed in a manner superimposed on the design variation effect at each stage of the variation display process. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer.

<Processing on the main control board>
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

<Main control side main processing>
10 to 11 are flowcharts showing main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. In the main process on the main control side, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by reset at power-on, the program starts and the processes after S1 are started.

  First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, a head address is set as an initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S1), and access to the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table storing the start address of a program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in a built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). If the RAM clear switch is on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9 described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read to determine whether or not the information on normal power-off is stored (S6).

  Here, when the information indicating that the power is off normally is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). Note that the checksum at power-on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off process described later, so if it has been backed up normally, Sam becomes “0”. In this way, it is determined when the power is turned on whether the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power interruption. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70 and the effect lamp LP, an effect control command (“effect initial command”) is requested to the effect control board 200 (S11).

  Next, in the power-off recovery setting process, power-on normal information setting, various error initial settings, and communication initial setting with the payout control board 400 are sequentially performed in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power was correctly turned on, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag and the information on the occurrence of power-off is initialized. Turn off the power-off confirmation flag. Next, a data transfer source address, a data transfer destination address, and a transfer byte number are set, and data corresponding to the transfer byte number is transferred (S13). Then, a special symbol game status value at the time of power-off is read, and a power-off recovery process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

  Subsequently, a transmission request for an effect control command (“power failure return command”) at the time of power failure recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is made (S15). The power-off recovery command includes information related to the inspection of the communication line, the special symbol operating state, the probability variation count, the time reduction count, the easy-to-enter state count, the variation pattern selection status, and the error status. It should be noted that the command requests for untransmitted before the power is turned off are cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, the information on the number of suspended balls in the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power-off is read, and an effect control command including the information on the number of suspended balls is requested ( S16).

  Subsequently, a return setting is made to return the ordinary electric accessory 622 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the second start port 62 is opened) (S17). Further, a return setting is made to return the special electric accessory 642 to a state before the power is cut off (for example, the big prize opening 64 is opened) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the special symbol mode flag is read, and the operation state of the probability variation function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (S19). The special symbol mode flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, in order to start a timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as an initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, as a preparation for restarting the watchdog timer, clear word 1 (“55H”) is set (S22).

  Next, in order to determine the occurrence of a power interruption, the value of the power interruption confirmation flag is read to determine whether or not a power interruption has occurred (S23). If no power interruption has occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value.

  Next, interrupt permission is set so as to allow the generation of the timer interrupt process (S25), the process returns to the above-described process for prohibiting the interrupt (S21), and the loop process of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but using the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt process until the next interrupt process occurs, S21 to S25. Repeat the process up to. If there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, timer interrupt processing is started when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, if a power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 to execute the power-off process described below.

  Next, as power-off processing (S26 to S32), first, clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is power-on normal information (S27: Yes), power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if the power-on normal information is not found (S27: No), the power-off abnormality data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

  Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, a complement for the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition setting of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

《Main control timer interrupt processing》
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed by interrupting the main process on the main control side. In addition, as the terms used below, the terms “condition device” and “actual accessory continuous actuating device” mean a conceptual control device, and “condition device” means a big hit in a special symbol game. The “actual accessory continuous actuating device” is capable of operating the special electric accessory 642 continuously a plurality of times.

  First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then an interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

  Next, a clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 are sequentially written in the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset time-out period, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are periodically set, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before time-out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input process, information of switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, input information such as the first start port switch 611, the second start port switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the big prize port switch 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, the magnetic sensor, the radio wave sensor, etc. Is read, and after the state is determined, the detection information is stored.

  Next, various random number update processes are executed (S54). In these various random number update processes, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number are updated. As for the normal symbol variation pattern random number, 1 is added to the numerical value of the random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value. On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. When the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

  Next, initial value update type random number update processing is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random numbers per ordinary symbol, the soft random numbers per special symbol, and the symbol random numbers per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value. Further, when the counter value makes one round, the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

  Next, an initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value.

  Next, timer subtraction processing is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted by an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this example). The various timers include special symbol game timers for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72.

  Next, a second start port effective period setting process is executed (S58). In the second starting port effective period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 62 are determined, and the effective period data or invalid period data of the second starting port 62 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, a game ball switch passage test is performed based on the detection information of the first starting port switch 611, the second starting port switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, and the big winning port switch 641 in the input process (S53). As a result, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through each switch, a transmission request for an effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch is made.

  Next, a prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning prize, and the received data from the payout control board 400 is monitored to pay out the payout control board 400. Perform communication inspection with.

  Next, normal symbol operation gate monitoring processing is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 63 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 63, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as the operation holding ball information. In addition to updating the number of suspended balls for a maximum of 4 balls, random numbers related to normal symbol lottery are stored.

  Next, normal symbol control processing is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, since a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the ordinary electric accessory 622 is performed, the normal symbol changing process, the normal symbol stop symbol displaying process, according to the value of the normal symbol game status The processing during normal electric accessory operation, the processing during normal electric accessory operation end demonstration, etc. are executed. In the normal symbol changing process, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) so that the normal symbol is variably displayed or fixedly displayed.

  Next, normal symbol variation start monitoring processing is executed (S63). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, when the normal symbol operation state is monitored and it is determined that the normal symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol operation holding ball number is digested by one, and the normal symbol variation is monitored. Determination, determination of design, determination of variation pattern, setting of variation time, and the like are performed in order.

  Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start port monitoring control process, the winnings of the game balls to the first start port 61 and the second start port 62 are monitored, and when there is a winning game ball, the number of reserved balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is concerned. Random number storage, prefetching notice effect determination, command memory number command request, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, according to the value of the special symbol game status, a special symbol variation start process (S420) and a special symbol variation process (S430) which will be described later in detail. ), Special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440), and the like.

  Next, a special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, as the operation process related to the special electric accessory 642, the operation start and end setting of the special electric accessory 642, Update of the opening time and the number of times of opening the winning opening 64, the operation start setting of the probability variation function, the operation start setting of the variation time shortening function, the setting of the variation pattern selection state, etc. are executed in order.

  Next, a special winning opening valid period setting process is executed (S67). In this big winning opening effective period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning invalid period of the big winning opening 64 are determined, and the effective period data or invalid period data of the large winning opening 64 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process, when there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the number of the holding balls is digested, and a command request for the number of stored symbols, whether the special symbol is successful or not is determined. The determination of the special symbol, the determination of the probability variation function, the determination of the time shortening function, the setting of the operation pattern of the special electric accessory, the setting of the demonstration performance time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, an abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is generated to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

  Next, an entrance passage time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this incoming ball passing time abnormality detection process, when the ON signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, the incoming ball passing time abnormality is set, and an effect control command (“error” A request for a production designation command ") and a request for outputting a security signal for output to an external terminal are made.

  Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times that the special electric accessory 642 is continuously operated (the number of specified rounds), the number of reserved balls for normal symbols and special symbols, and the like are created. In addition, display data for displaying the information on the error state detected in the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

  Next, an LED output process is executed (S73). In this LED output process, the special symbol control process (S65), in order to display special symbols and normal symbols, display the number of reserved balls, the number of times that the special electric accessory is operated continuously, display an error, etc. The display data created in the abnormality detection process (S69), the game state display process (S71), etc. are used as the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the normal symbol display device 75, the special symbol hold lamps 73 and 74, and the general figure hold. In addition to outputting to the lamp 76, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, etc., the display in these various display devices is initialized.

  Next, a firing control signal output process is executed (S73). In this launch control signal output process, when no communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or an abnormality in the short circuit power supply is detected, a fire permission signal is output to the payout control board 400, and the game ball is allowed to be launched. To do. On the other hand, if an abnormality in communication with the payout control board 400 or an abnormality in the short circuit power supply is detected, a firing prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of the game ball.

  Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, in the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric accessory control process (S66) to operate each electric accessory 622, 642. Based on the acquired control data, an excitation signal is output to each of the electric accessory solenoids 623 and 643.

  Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In the effect control command transmission process, the effect control command designated by the pointer is read out from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the process described above. The control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

  Next, external information output processing is executed (S76). In the external information output process, the operating state information of the gaming machine is output as external information to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board.

  Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set in an interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

  If the main control board 100 detects a power-off (a decrease in supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during the main control-side main process or interrupt process, a non-maskable interrupt is generated and the power-off confirmation flag is turned on. To do. Then, after returning to the original process, the above-described power-off process (S26 to S32) is executed.

≪Special design game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The process related to the special symbol game includes the above-described start port monitoring control process (S64), special symbol control process (S65), special electric accessory control process (S66), special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68), etc. Is applicable.

(Start-up port monitoring control process)
First, the start port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the start port monitoring control process (S64).

  First, it is determined whether or not a game winning at the first start port 61 has been detected (S201). When the winning to the first start port 61 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of the operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S202).

  When the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), as a lottery random value for the first special symbol game, a random value per special symbol, a random symbol value per special symbol, a special symbol Fluctuation pattern random values are acquired, and each random value is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entry (S203). Then, as an update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first start port 61 is completed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a game winning in the second starting port 62 has been detected (S205). When a winning at the second starting port 62 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S206). When the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), a random number per special symbol, a random symbol value per special symbol, a special symbol, as a lottery random value related to the second special symbol game Fluctuation pattern random values are acquired, and each random value is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entry (S207). Then, as the update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S208), and the winning check at the second start port 62 is finished.

  Subsequently, whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. Is determined (S209). When there is an update of the number of balls with an operating reserve (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information on the number of balls with an operating reserve of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is stored as main information storage means. The command is stored in the command storage area 180 (S210).

  Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether it is a prior determination timing (S211). If it is a prior determination timing (S211: YES), a random number value per special symbol is read from the random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and a prior determination is made (S212). Then, a validity pre-judgment command including information on the pre-judgment result (pre-judgment pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S213).

  Further, the symbol random number value per special symbol is read from the symbol random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and symbol preliminary determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-determination command including this pre-determination result information (symbol pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and the variation pattern prior determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern advance determination command including information on the prior determination result (variation pattern advance determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S217).

(Special symbol variation start monitoring control process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S68).

  In this special symbol fluctuation monitoring and monitoring control process (S68), a special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process to be described later is applied to the special symbol side satisfying the fluctuation start condition among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (S310) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the variation start condition, the process on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as described above.

  First, it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is being made (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for change, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both “00H (waiting for change)”. It is determined whether or not (S302).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of retained balls in the second special symbol is “0” (S303). If the number of retained balls is not “0” (S303: NO), the second special symbol is determined. It is assumed that the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and after setting the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (addresses of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) (S304) Then, the process proceeds to the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310) on the second special symbol side. That is, in the present embodiment, when there is an operation holding ball of the second special symbol, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is given priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. Digested. Details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is “0” (S303: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol is “0” (S305). . If the number of reserved balls is not “0” (S305: NO), it is assumed that the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol variation start monitoring table (hereinafter referred to as “the first special symbol variation start monitoring table”). After setting the addresses of the various tables used in the processing and the addresses of the RAM storage area (S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

  Note that if the variation start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. .

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310).

  In the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310), the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table or the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table set in S304 or S306 described above is referred to The special symbol side process will be executed, but the processing method is the same on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, so the first special symbol side process is the exception unless otherwise specified. Whether or not there is a process on the second special symbol side will be described as a group without distinction.

  First, 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved balls on the special symbol side that is the subject of the current fluctuation start (S311). Then, a symbol memory number command including information on the number of suspended balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the subtraction is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol holding storage area on the side of the special symbol subject to the start of the current change is accessed, and the random number value per special symbol and the special symbol stored in the first reserved storage area (holding 1 storage area) In order to sequentially read the design random number value and the special design variation pattern random value, and use these random number values for the special symbol success / failure determination process (S320), the symbol determination process (S330), and the variation pattern selection process (S423) described later, Transfer to the special symbol success / failure determination area, special symbol determination area, and special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as the update of the hold storage area, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower hold storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

  Subsequently, a special symbol success / failure determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol success / failure determination process (S320), first, a special symbol success / failure lottery table is acquired. At this time, if the gaming state is a special symbol probability changing state, a high-probability lottery table is obtained, and if the gaming state is a normal state, a low-probability lottery table is obtained. Next, a random value per special symbol is read from the special symbol success / failure determination area of the main information storage unit 180. Then, referring to the special symbol success / failure lottery table, the special symbol success / failure determination is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. Further, values corresponding to the determination result (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, and loss data “00H”) are stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, a symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), a special symbol stop symbol, a symbol group type, and a character effect number (variable added symbol information) are determined according to the result of the determination. Then, the special symbol stop symbol, the symbol group type, and the character effect number determined this time are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The character effect number includes the determined symbol group type (seven patterns of symbol groups A to G) and the special symbol and normal symbol probability variation function operating states (special symbol probability change ON / special symbol probability change OFF). Any one of 28 patterns in total is determined based on a combination of (4 patterns of normal symbol probability variation ON / normal symbol probability variation OFF). If the result of the determination is wrong, the character effect number “0” is determined.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit (S341), and whether or not the result of the determination is a big win (S342). If the result of the determination is a small hit (S341: YES), the process proceeds to S347, and if the result of the determination is out of order (S341: NO, S342: NO), the process proceeds to S349.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a big hit (S341: NO, S342: YES), the special symbol is displayed as the gaming state after the special game based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 (the jackpot type). It is determined whether or not to operate the probability variation function (S343). That is, when the symbol group type (big hit type) indicates a specific symbol, it is decided to provide a probability variation function, and when the symbol group type indicates a normal symbol, the probability variation Decide not to give the function. This determination result is stored in the probability variation determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  In addition, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 (big hit type), the number of times the variable time reduction function is activated is determined as the gaming state after the special game (S344), and the number of times the electric chew support function is activated is determined. (S345). This determination result (the operation time information of the variation time shortening function, the operation frequency information of the electric chew support function) is stored in the time information storage area and the easy-to-enter number storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642 is set based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S330 (S346). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642, the specified number of round games (in this example, 16 rounds, 8 rounds, 2 rounds), the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 (in this example, 30 rounds) Seconds, 0.05 seconds).

  Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state, a variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game or after the small hit game is set (S347). Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330, a demonstration performance time (a hit start demo time and a hit end demo time) of the special game or the small hit game is set (S348). Next, the special symbol success / failure determination region and the special symbol / symbol determination region of the main information storage unit 180 used in the above-described special symbol success / failure determination processing (S320) and symbol determination processing (S330) are cleared (S349). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from “00H (standby)” to “01H (change start)” (S350).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control process (S65).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642 is inactive, that is, whether or not the special electric accessory game status is “00H (waiting for winning)” (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 642 is not operating (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402).

  When the second special symbol game status is not “00H (standby)” (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the processing related to the second special symbol. The addresses of the various tables and the addresses of the RAM storage areas are set (S403), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is “00H (standby)” (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the process related to the first special symbol. The addresses of various tables to be used and the addresses of the RAM storage areas are set (S404), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410).

  In the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in S403 or S404 described above is used, and the special subject to change this time is used. The process on the symbol side will be executed, but the processing method is the same on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, so is it the process on the first special symbol side unless otherwise specified? A description will be given collectively without distinguishing whether the processing is on the second special symbol side. Details of this special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special design control general-purpose processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S410). FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410).

  In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410), branch processing (S411 to S414) is executed to shift to processing according to the special symbol game status values ("01H", "02H", "03H"). First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side subject to the current variation is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not “00H” (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is “01H (change start)” (S412). If the special symbol game status is “01H” (S412: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol variation start process (S420). Details of the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the case of NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is “02H (changed)” (S413). When the special symbol game status is “02H” (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). Details of the special symbol variation processing (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. If NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stopped symbol display)" (S414). If the special symbol game status is “03H” (S414: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol stop symbol display process (S440). Details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol variation start processing)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

  First, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the lottery determination and the variation pattern selection state (S421). Subsequently, a special symbol variation pattern random value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S422). Then, with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

  Next, a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as a special symbol variation start setting, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and a variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the variation start command, in order to start the symbol variation effect in the effect display device 70, a variation pattern designation command and a symbol designation command are sequentially generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from “01H (change start)” to “02H (change)” (S428).

(Special symbol change processing)
Next, the special symbol variation processing (S430) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (S430).

  First, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed in order to perform a special symbol variable display (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), special pattern display pattern number data is generated for each predetermined switching time. The display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to display the variable special symbols in a variable manner or in a definite manner.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has ended (S432). When the variation time of the special symbol is completed (S432: YES), a special symbol stop symbol to be fixedly displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S433). Subsequently, a change stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decoration symbol is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S434).

  Next, “500 (ms)” is stored in the special symbol game timer as a fixed display time (S435). Note that the “determined display time” is a time for definitely stopping and displaying the stopped symbol when the special symbol is suspended. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from “02H (fluctuating)” to “03H (stopping symbol display)” (S436).

(Special symbol stop symbol display processing)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described. 20 to 21 are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become “0 (timeout)”, that is, whether or not the fixed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). When the special symbol fixed display time is over (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (stopped symbol display)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the big hit data “55H” (S443). When the hit / decision determination data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the special symbol probability variation function is deactivated (S444), the special symbol variation time reduction function is deactivated (S445), and the electric support function is activated. Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, “00H (not actuated)” is set in the special symbol mode flag, and “00H” is set in the time reduction number counter and the easy-to-enter number counter to clear to zero.

  Next, as a special game start demo setting process, a start demo display time is set, and an effect control command (big hit start demo command) for instructing start of the start demo effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). Also, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “00H (waiting for winning)” to “01H (special game)” (S449). Then, “00H” is set to clear the contents of the success / failure determination flag (S450).

  On the other hand, if the determination data is not big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451). When the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451: YES), 1 is subtracted from the probability variation counter of the main information storage means 180 as the digest of the current special symbol variation (step S452). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). When the probability variation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S454). If the probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455). If the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455: YES), the time-count counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digest of the current special symbol variation (step S456). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter is zero (step S457). If the hourly number counter is zero (S457: YES), the special symbol variable time reduction function is deactivated, assuming that the number of times of termination of the special symbol time-short state has been reached (S458). If the time-count counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chew support function is in operation (S459). When the electric chew support function is in operation (S459: YES), 1 is subtracted from the easy-to-enter state counter of the main information storage unit 180 as the digest of the number of changes in the special symbol this time (step S460). . Next, it is determined whether or not the easy-to-enter state counter is zero (step S461). If the easy entry state number counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462), assuming that the end number of easy entry states has been reached. If the easy-to-enter state counter after subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage means 180 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset end number. If it has been reached, the state is switched to the next specified variation pattern selection state. On the other hand, if the end count has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

  Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current gaming state information and the variation pattern selection state information updated in the above-described S451 to S464 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. (S465). On the side of the production control board 200, the production mode is set and updated based on the information of the game state designation command.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the small hit data “33H” is stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466). When the small hit data is stored (S466: YES), as the start demo setting process of the small hit game, the start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (small hit) that instructs the start of the start demonstration effect Start demo command) is generated (S467). Subsequently, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “00H (waiting for winning)” to “02H (small winning game)” (S468). Then, “00H” is set to clear the contents of the success / failure determination flag (S469).

  On the other hand, when the small symbol data “33H” is not stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466: NO), that is, when the shift data “00H” is stored in the special symbol determination flag, S467 to S469. To skip. Note that when the special symbol determination flag is outlier data, the process of clearing the contents of the flag was not performed because “00H” was originally stored as outlier data.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
Next, the special electric accessory control process (S66) will be described. FIGS. 22-24 is a flowchart which shows the detail of an electrically-driven accessory control process (S66).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory game status is “01H (special game)” (S501). If the special electric accessory game status is “01H” (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642, 652 is operating (S502). If the special electric combination 642, 652 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether it is the operation start time of the special electric combination 642, 652 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric actors 642 and 652 is a timing at which the operation of the special electric actors 642 and 652 is started in each round game.

  When it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 642, 652 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored in the main information storage unit 180. Store in the command storage area (S504). On the side of the effect control board 200, a round effect corresponding to each round game in the special game is executed based on the information of the round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). Then, the operation of the special electric actors 642 and 652 is started (S505), and the processing of S506 to S510 is executed as the operation during the operation of the special electric officers 642 and 652.

  As a process during the operation of the special electric accessory 642, 652, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the maximum number of winning prizes 64, 65 (S506), and the special electric accessory 642, 652 is activated. It is determined whether the time (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game balls have won the maximum winning number 64, 65 in the maximum winning number (S506: YES) or if the operation time of the special electric accessory 642, 652 has passed (S507: YES), the special electric The operation of the accessory 642, 652 is stopped (S507). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessories 642, 652 has reached a predetermined number of rounds (S509). If the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 642, 652 is incremented by 1 (S510).

  On the other hand, if the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 642, 652 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511, and the end demo display time is set as the special game hit end demo setting process. And an effect control command (big hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S511).

  Subsequently, the variable time reduction number information set in S344 is stored in the time reduction number counter (S512). Further, the easy entry state number information set in S345 is stored in the easy entry state number counter (S513).

  Subsequently, referring to the content of the probability variation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation based on a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S514). When the condition device is activated by a specific symbol (S514: YES), the operation time data “7FH” is stored in the probability variation counter of the main information storage means 180, and the special symbol probability variation function is activated. (S515). On the other hand, when the condition device is not operated by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operating data “00H” is stored in the probability variation counter, and S515 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variation time shortening number information stored in the time reduction number counter is variation time shortening function operation data (data other than “00H”) (S516). If it is the variation time shortening function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function is started (S517). On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the easy entry state number information stored in the easy entry state number counter is electric Chu support function operation data (data other than “00H”) (S518). If it is the electric Chu support function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric Chu support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the normal symbol probability variation function operation start (S519), the normal symbol variation time reduction function operation start (S520), and the normal electric accessory 622 open extension function operation start (S521) are executed in order. On the other hand, if it is not the electric Chu support function operation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

  Next, the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 is switched to (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above is generated and stored in the main information storage unit 180. Store in the command storage area (S523). On the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “01H (special game)” to “00H (waiting for winning)” (S524).

  On the other hand, when the special electric accessory game status is not “01H (special game)” (S501: NO), the process proceeds to S530 and whether the special electric accessory game status is “02H (small hit game)”. It is determined whether or not (S530). When the special electric accessory game status is “02H” (S530: YES), the small hit game processing is executed in the subsequent processing.

  In the small hit game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642, 652 is operating (S531). When the special electric combination 642, 652 is not operating (S531: NO), the operation of the special electric combination 642, 652 is started (S532). On the other hand, when the special electric actors 642 and 652 are operating (S531: YES), S532 is skipped.

  Subsequently, as a process during the operation of the special electric accessory 642, 652, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the maximum winning number at the special winning openings 64, 65 (S533), and the special electric accessory 642 is determined. It is determined whether the operation time (opening time) 652 has elapsed (S534). At this time, if the maximum number of game balls is won in the big winning openings 64 and 65 (S533: YES), or if the operating time of the special electric accessory 642, 652 has passed (S534: YES), the special electric The operation of the accessory 642, 652 is stopped (S535).

  Subsequently, as the end demo setting process for the small hit game, the end demo display time is set, and an effect control command (small hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S536). Next, the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 is switched to (S537). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in S537 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 ( S538). This gaming state designation command is used on the side of the production control board 200 for determining the production mode transition trigger, specifying the migration destination production mode, and the like. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “01H (special game)” to “00H (waiting for winning)” (S538).

<Processing on the production control board>
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The process on the side of the effect control board 200 includes a reset start process (including an effect control side main process) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, such as after power-on, and an effect control side timer interrupt that is activated at regular intervals. Ramp activated when triggered by the arrival of a predetermined generation time specified in the time schedule of the process, the reception control process of the effect control command activated due to the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the time schedule of the variable effect pattern It includes a production interruption process and a transmission interruption process of an image control command activated at regular intervals.

  In each interrupt process (exception process), a priority level indicating a priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occurs is set. In this example, “reset start processing by power reset (FIG. 25): highest priority”, “reset start processing at the time of various abnormalities (FIG. 25): highest priority” → “production control command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 34): Level 7 ”→“ Reset start processing by WDT (during runaway detection) (FIG. 25): Level 3 ”→“ Image control command transmission interrupt processing (FIG. 36): Level 2 ”→“ Production control side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35): Level 1 ”and so on, the priority levels are ranked. Note that the “reset start processing at the time of various abnormalities” is, for example, when the CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, when the CPU 201 tries to access in an illegal area or by an illegal method, and during DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer It starts when an error occurs. In the present embodiment, the above-described plural types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but actually other interrupt processing also exists.

  In the effect control side main process, the process is basically performed after setting all interrupts to be prohibited or interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt being set. Then, when the production control side main process is in an interrupt-permitted state, each interrupt process is started in a manner that interrupts the main process. In each interrupt process, when there is a request for another interrupt process during execution of the interrupt process (multiple interrupts are generated), in principle, if the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed, While the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt process has a lower priority level or the same priority level as the interrupt process being executed. That is, each interrupt process is advanced in a state where other interrupts having the same priority level or a lower priority level are prohibited. Then, each interrupt process returns to the production control side main process with all interrupts permitted. Note that the priority order (priority level) of such interrupt factors is defined by register settings of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<Reset start processing>
First, reset start processing of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing reset start processing of the effect control board 200. In this reset start processing, after the power is turned on, reset caused by various abnormal times, or reset caused by WDT (during runaway detection), the security check of the sub main CPU 201 is performed. The program starts and the processing after S601 is started.

  First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, a head address is set as an initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

  Subsequently, as basic settings related to hardware, an initial value is set in a built-in register provided in the sub-main CPU 201 and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, an initial value is set for a variable with an initial value, and initialization by zero clear is performed for a variable without an initial value. Further, the sub main CPU 201 appropriately develops the control program stored in the ROM 202 in the RAM 203.

  Subsequently, interrupts other than the production control command reception interrupt process are prohibited (S605). Next, among various errors set in advance for each model, a process for setting the type of error to be valid for the model is performed (S606). Furthermore, a turn-off request is made to turn off the effect lamp LP (the frame lamp 10, the panel lamp 25) (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is started to monitor the runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

  Subsequently, an effect control side main process is executed as the main process of the game effect (S609). Details of the effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. Note that when the process shifts to the production control side main process in S609, it is not normally possible to return from the main process to the reset start process, but in the unlikely event that the process returns to this process due to a program bug or the like. The mode is shifted to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is lower than that during normal operation.

《Direction control side main processing》
Next, the production control side main process (S609) of the production control board 200 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the effect control side main process (S609).

  First, an address (start address where the program is expanded) for starting a check as to whether or not the control program is correctly expanded in the RAM 203 in the production control side main process is acquired (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

  Next, a device initialization operation is executed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (at the start of resetting). In order to control the operation of the movable accessory 24 by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the position information necessary for. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to a preset initial position (reference position).

  Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written to the WDT clear register of the sub main CPU 201 within a preset time-out period, so that the watchdog timer Cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Subsequently, input port check processing is executed (S615). In this input port check processing, reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output processing S912 in timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is monitored each time an interrupt occurs, and is monitored a plurality of times (for example, four times). When the input port states are all “1”, the signal level is “1 (H level)”, when all the input ports are “0”, the signal level is “0 (L level)”, otherwise the signal level is set. Do not change (this determines the input signal).

  Subsequently, an error effect management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effects by various devices are started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). Further, in the error presentation management process, an initial value (error presentation time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error presentation. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at an interval of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the production control side timer interrupt process. When the error management timer times out, the error presentation is ended.

  Subsequently, the effect button monitoring control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when a button notice effect is incorporated during symbol variation, the input state of the effect button 15 within the operation effective time is monitored, and a plurality of preset values are set according to the button notice effect. The content of the production according to the input state of the production button 15 is determined from the types of production content.

  Subsequently, a notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern that defines the details of the notice effect that occurs at each stage of the decorative symbol variation process in accordance with the scenario of the variation effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620) ( The notice performance number) is determined by lottery. The notice effect number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. In addition, an image control command for designating the notice effect number to the image control board 300 side is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage unit 260. At this time, when an accessory announcement effect pattern (an accessory announcement effect number) is selected as the announcement effect pattern, an accessory request is generated, and the movable accessory 24 is obtained in the subsequent device management process (S619). Drive patterns are identified. In this example, not all of the multiple types of notice effects (notice effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative symbol are drawn in one main loop process, but the main loop process efficiency is improved. Therefore, a lottery is performed across a plurality of main loop processes, divided for each time of occurrence of a notice effect (for example, a fluctuation start stage, a reach generation stage, and a fluctuation stop stage). At that time, the notice effect that occurs at the beginning of the decorative symbol change stage needs to be synchronized with the start of the decorative symbol change (send the image control command immediately). To do.

  Next, device management processing is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in a command analysis process (S620) described later, a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203 ), The pattern data corresponding to the production number (lamp production number, accessory announcement production number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with every frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for drawing processing of one frame when drawing is performed at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) in the effect display device 70. Similarly, in the driving pattern data of the movable accessory 24, driving data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in an effect control side timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completed in the production control side timer interruption process described later, the production lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. Then, the control of the target device is finished.

  Subsequently, command analysis processing (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read out, and the effect control command that has been read out is read out. The effect control process corresponding to the type is executed. Details of the command analysis processing (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, it is determined whether command analysis (effect control command analysis) has been executed during the current loop processing (S621). If it is immediately after command analysis (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), the effect lottery random number update process is executed (S622). In this effect lottery random number update process, effect lottery random numbers such as a pre-reading notice lottery random number, a decorative design random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect random number are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, command analysis processing (S620) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing details of the command analysis processing (S620). In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and an effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command. Execute control processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of changing the effect mode is executed based on the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command. Details of the effect state transition process (S632) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S633). Here, the hold related commands include a symbol memory number command and a prior determination command. When the hold related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In the hold information management process (S634), a symbol storage number command or a pre-determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, a pre-reading determination is executed based on the information of the pre-determination result, and the hold display of the effect display device 70 is performed. Processing for updating the display number and display mode (display color, etc.) of the reserved images displayed in the sections 701 and 702 is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related commands include a variation start command and a variation stop command. When the symbol variation related command is stored (step S635: YES), the routine proceeds to variation effect content determination processing (S636). In this variation effect content determination process (S636), if the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, processing for starting the symbol variation effect is executed, and the received symbol variation related command is a variation stop command. In some cases, a process for ending the symbol variation effect being executed is executed. Details of the variation effect content determination process (S636) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a big hit effect related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot effect-related commands include a jackpot start demonstration effect command, a round effect designation command, and a jackpot end demonstration effect command. When the big hit effect related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the big hit effect content determination process (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demonstration effect is performed. Details of the jackpot effect content determination process (S638) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a small hit effect related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small hit effect-related commands include a small hit start demonstration effect command and a small hit end demonstration effect command. When the small hit effect related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination process (S640). In the small hit effect content determination processing (S640), processing for executing the small hit start demonstration effect and the small hit end demonstration effect is performed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S641). When this error effect designation command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to an error effect content determination process (S642). In this error effect content determination process (S642), an error effect designation command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, and an error for notifying the error state by the image display of the effect display device 70, the light emission mode of the effect lamp LP, or the like. Determine the production pattern.

  What is the case when the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO) Then, the command analysis process is terminated.

(Production state transition process)
Next, the production state transition process (S632) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of the effect state transition process (S632).

  First, the contents of the game state designation command from the main control board 100 are analyzed, and information regarding the variation pattern selection state included in the contents of this command is acquired (S701). Subsequently, based on the information regarding the variation pattern selection state acquired in S701, it is determined whether or not the trigger for transition to the production mode has arrived (S702). When the timing for transition to the effect mode has arrived (S702: YES), the transition setting to the predetermined effect mode is performed in S703 and thereafter. In addition, the transition trigger of the production mode is in principle linked with the transition trigger of the variation pattern selection state, for example, when the special game ends or when the end number of the variation pattern selection state expires. Note that the final number of times of variation pattern selection state is the number of times related to the number of variations of the special symbol.

  First, it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side is the low probability normal variation state α (S703). When the transition destination is the low probability normal variation state α (S703: YES), the normal rendering mode Mα is set as the transition destination of the rendering mode (S704). When the normal effect mode Mα is entered, the normal background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S705). In the normal effect mode Mα, for example, a normal background image of “wilderness” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. On the other hand, when the transition destination is not the low probability normal variation state α (S703: NO), it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is the high probability short variation state β (S706). When the transition destination is the high-probability short-time variation state β (S706: YES), the probability variation effect mode Mβ is set as the transition destination of the effect mode (S707). When the mode changes to the probability variation effect mode A, the probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S708). Then, in the probability variation effect mode Mβ, for example, a probability variation background image of “Citadel” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  When the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is not the high probability short variation state β (S706: NO), it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is the high probability special variation state γ (S709). ). If the transition destination is the high probability special variation state γ (S709: YES), the special effect mode Mγ is set as the transition destination of the effect mode (S710). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag in the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on (S711). The special continuous effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the special continuous effect is executed. If the special continuous effect flag is on (S711: YES), a special background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S712). In the special effect mode Mγ, for example, a special background image of “starry sky” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. On the other hand, when the special continuous effect flag is OFF (S711: NO), the probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S713). In the special effect mode Mγ, for example, a probability change background image of “Citadel” (substantially the same background image as in the probability change effect mode Mβ) is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. Subsequently, an image control command for instructing display of the effect content (background image) determined in the processing is generated and stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S721).

(Variation production content determination process)
Next, the variation effect content determination process (S636) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing details of the variation effect content determination process (S636).

  First, it is determined whether or not a change start command is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S731). If a variation start command is stored (S731: YES), the contents of this variation start command (variation pattern designation command, variation additional symbol information designation command, character effect number designation command) are analyzed, and the contents of this command are analyzed. As a result of the winning / losing lottery included, information indicating a symbol group, a variation pattern (variation time), a gaming state, etc. is acquired (S732). This acquired information is stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

  Subsequently, a variation effect pattern selection process is executed (S733). In this variation effect pattern selection process, a variation effect pattern table is acquired based on the variation pattern information acquired in S732 and the effect mode set in the effect state transition process in S632, and from the effect lottery random number generation unit 210. A random effect pattern random number is acquired, and one of the variable effect patterns is selected by lottery from a plurality of types of variable effect patterns. The variation effect pattern constitutes a scenario of the effect display process in which the variation pattern of the decorative design, the type / occurrence time of the reach effect, the type / occurrence time of the notice effect, etc. are defined. The variable effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the variable effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. Further, a lamp effect number corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern number is requested, and the requested lamp effect number is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260.

  Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol selection process is executed (S734). In this decorative symbol stop symbol selection process, based on the symbol group information and the variation pattern information acquired in S732, combinations of stop symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of decorative symbols to be finally stopped are selected by lottery. decide. The decorative symbol combination number determined here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260.

  Subsequently, as the update of the prefetch information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower hold storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is changed. Zero clear is performed (S735).

  Next, special effect determination processing is executed (S736). In this special effect determination process, it is determined whether or not a special effect with high rarity (so-called ascension effect) that is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied with respect to the so-called villa state is executed. The predetermined condition is, for example, that the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number, the cumulative number of specific big hits in the consecutive resort state reaches a predetermined number, the accumulated number of winning balls in the consecutive resort state reaches a predetermined number, A case where a specific effect (a specific effect during a symbol change or special game) is generated during the villa state can be cited. Details of the special effect determination process (S736) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41 in the first modification.

  Next, the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process is executed (S737). In the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process, whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production A is determined, and when it is determined that the on-hold consecutive villa production A is to be executed, a consecutive villa production pattern is selected. Details of the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, when executing the on-hold extended villa production A in S737, a process of replacing the contents of the symbol variation production selected in S733 and S734 according to the content of the on-hold extended villa production A is executed. (S738). For example, when the consecutive house effect pattern PA2 is selected, the normal jackpot symbol selected in S734 is replaced with a special jackpot symbol “S · S · S” as a symbol change effect replacement process. The decorative symbol combination number (big hit symbol number) replaced here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. In the present embodiment, the target of the prefetch determination in the on-hold consecutive villa production A is the subsequent operation reservation ball that exists at the time when the previous operation reservation ball is digested (when the variation start condition is satisfied). It is. For this reason, even if the operation hold ball generated during the change is specified hold, the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737) and the replacement process (S738) are not executed, but specified during the change. In the case where a hold is generated, it is configured to execute the in-hold extended villa effect A determination process (S737) and the replacement process (S738) even during the change, and to change the change effect data set at the start of the change. Also good.

  Then, based on the effect information acquired in S733 to S738, an image control command (change effect start command) required to start the decoration symbol change is generated, and this image control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. Set (S739).

  On the other hand, when the change start command is not stored (S731: NO), it is determined whether or not the change stop command is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S740). When the variable stop command is stored (S740: YES), the content of the variable stop command is analyzed, and the symbol stop information included in the content of this command is acquired (S741). Then, an image control command (variation effect stop command) required to stop the decoration symbol variation is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S742).

(Reserved Renrenso production A judgment process)
Next, the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process (S737) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is on (S761). If the special continuous effect flag is not on (S761: NO), the information stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 in the above S732 (result of the lottery determination and jackpot type) is analyzed, It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed this time is 16R big hit (S762). If the lottery result is a 16R big hit (S762: YES), it is determined whether or not the pre-determination information of the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. (S763). In this example, the pre-reading determination of the on-hold consecutive villa effect A is performed on the operation holding ball of the second special symbol that occurs before the symbol variation is started. When there is an operation holding ball of the second special symbol (S763: YES), it is determined whether or not there is a specific holding in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (S764). If there is a specific hold (S764: YES), it is determined whether this specific hold indicates a 16R big hit (S765). If the specific hold corresponds to a 16R big hit (S765: YES), a hold-in-resort renga production A lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute the in-hold-ream villa production A (S766). ). In this on-hold consecutive resort production A lottery process, when the consecutive resort production lottery random value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production A lottery table Determine whether or not to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 80% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning in the on-hold consecutive villa production A lottery process is won (S767). In the case of winning (S767: YES), a consecutive resort production pattern selection process for determining the content of the on-hold consecutive resort production A is executed (S768). In this consecutive resort production pattern selection process, while obtaining the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. From the production patterns, one of the consecutive villa production patterns is determined by lottery. Next, the number of the extended villa effect pattern selected this time is temporarily stored in the extended villa effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S769). Then, the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S770). Note that the on-hold consecutive resort production flag is a flag that is turned on when the on-hold consecutive resort production flag is executed.

(Big hit production content determination process)
Next, the big hit effect content determination process (S638) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot effect content determination process (S636).

  First, it is determined whether or not a start demo command is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 (S801). If the start demo command is stored (S801: YES), the contents of the start demo command are analyzed, and information indicating the jackpot type and the like included in the contents of this command is acquired (S802). This acquired information is stored in the big hit effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Subsequently, the continuous resort count counter for counting the number of consecutive resorts is updated (S803). Specifically, when the big hit this time is a big hit in the normal state (referred to as “first hit”), “1” is set in the extended game count counter, and in the case of the extended game, the extended game counter is set to “ 1 ”is added.

  Next, a jackpot effect pattern selection process for determining the contents of the jackpot effect pattern (start demo effect pattern, round effect pattern, end demo effect pattern) is executed (S804). In this jackpot effect pattern selection process, a jackpot effect pattern table (not shown) is acquired, and a jackpot effect pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generating means 210, and any one of a plurality of types of jackpot effect patterns is selected. The big hit production pattern is determined by lottery. The jackpot effect pattern number (start demo pattern number, round effect pattern number, end demo pattern number) determined here is temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

  Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process is executed (S805). In the on-hold consecutive villa effect B determination process, whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa effect B is determined, and if it is determined to execute the on-hold consecutive villa effect B, a consecutive villa effect pattern is selected. Details of the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process (S805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, a big hit effect replacement process is executed (S806). In this jackpot effect replacement process, when the on-hold consecutive resort effect B (special continuous effect) is executed, the normal start demo effect pattern and the normal end demo effect pattern are changed to the special start demo effect pattern and the special end demo effect pattern. Replace with. Details of the jackpot effect replacement process (S806) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading determination target in the on-hold consecutive resort production B exists at the start time of the special game (at the end of the change) when the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit. It is a subsequent working hold ball. Therefore, even if the operation holding ball generated during the special game is a specific hold, the on-hold consecutive villa production B determination process (S805) and the replacement process (S806) are not executed, but during the special game When a specific hold is generated, the on-hold consecutive resort stage B determination process (S805) and the replacement process (S806) are executed even during the special game, so that the big hit effect data set at the start of the special game is replaced. You may comprise.

  Then, the start demonstration effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in S804 and S806 is transferred to the start demonstration effect storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the start demonstration effect A start is set (S807).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a round effect designation command is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 (S811). When the round effect designation command is stored (S807: YES), the content of the round effect designation command is analyzed, and the number of rounds included in the content of this command and the number of winning prizes to the big winning openings 64 and 65 are calculated. The information shown is acquired (S812). This acquired information is stored in the big hit effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Subsequently, based on the information acquired in S812, the round number counter of the sub main information storage unit 260 is updated (S813), and the big prize counter of the sub main information storage unit 260 is updated (S814). In this example, since “14” prize balls are paid out every time a game ball wins a prize winning opening 64, 65, “14” is multiplied by the number of winning prizes in the prize winning openings 64, 65. Thus, the number of winning prize balls is calculated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo count flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S815). The pseudo count flag is a flag that is turned on when executing a pseudo count effect in which the number of rounds and the number of winning prize balls in the previous special game are added to the number of rounds and the number of winning prize balls in the subsequent special game. It is. If the pseudo count flag is on (S815: YES), that is, if the subsequent round effect (pseudo count effect) is scheduled to be executed, the round number pseudo addition process is executed (S816). In this round number pseudo addition process, the number of round games executed in the previous special game (round number: 16R) is added to the number of round games executed (round number: 1R to 16R) stored in the round number counter. to add. Thereby, in the special continuous performance, the round game of the first round in the later special game is notified as the round game of the 17th round.

  Subsequently, a winning prize number pseudo-addition process is executed (S817). In this winning prize number pseudo-addition process, the number of winning prizes in the previous special game is added to the number of winnings stored in the big winning number counter. Thereby, in the special continuous performance, the number of winning balls acquired in the later special game is notified as the total number of winning balls acquired in the previous special game and the later special game.

  Then, the round effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in S804 and S806, together with the values of the round number counter and the big prize counter, are round effects of the sub-main information storage means 260. Transfer to the storage area and set the start of the round effect (S818).

  Next, it is determined whether or not an end demo command is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S821). When the end demo command is stored (S821: YES), the content of the end demo command is analyzed, and information included in the content of this command is acquired (S822). This acquired information is stored in the big hit effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Next, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag in the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on (S823). When the special continuous effect flag is on (S823: YES), the value of the round number counter (number of rounds) and the value of the big prize number counter (large number of winning prizes) are stored in the previous big hit of the sub main information storage means 260. Temporarily store in the area (S824). This means that if the current big hit corresponds to the previous big hit in the special continuous performance, the final round number and the big winning number in the previous big win are the pseudo-addition processing in the later big win effect (S816, S817) Because it is scheduled to be used in the game, it is stored as record information of the previous special game. Therefore, in the pseudo addition processing in S816 and S817, the numerical values (the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes) stored in the previous jackpot storage area are added. Next, the round number counter and the big prize number counter in the sub main information storage means 260 are cleared (S825, S826).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the pseudo count flag of the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on (S827). If the pseudo count flag is on (S827: YES), the pseudo count flag is turned off (S828). Next, it is determined whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is on (S835). If the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag is on (S835: YES), the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned off (S836).

  Next, the end demonstration effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 in S804 and S806 is transferred to the end demonstration effect storage area of the sub main information storage means 260, and the end demonstration effect The start is set (S837). Then, based on the effect information acquired in S805, S807, S818, and S837, an image control command required for the jackpot effect is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S838). .

(Reservation Renrenso production B judgment process)
Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process (S805) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S805).

  First, it is determined whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is on, that is, whether or not the on-hold extended resort effect A has already been executed in the symbol variation effect (S851). If the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag is not on (S851: NO), the information stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in the above-described S732 (the result of success / failure lottery and the type of jackpot) is analyzed. Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed this time is 16R big hit (S852). If the lottery result is a 16R big hit (S852: YES), it is determined whether or not the pre-determination information of the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. (S853). In this example, the pre-reading determination of the on-hold consecutive resort production B is performed on the operation holding ball of the second special symbol that occurs until the special game is started, that is, until the jackpot start demo command is received. When there is an operation holding ball of the second special symbol (S853: YES), it is determined whether or not there is a specific holding in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (S854). If there is a specific hold (S854: YES), the on-hold consecutive resort effect B lottery process 1 for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort effect B by lottery is executed (S856). In the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 1, the consecutive resort production lottery random number value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production B lottery table 1. If so, determine whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 80% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%. It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the on-hold consecutive villa production B may be made different depending on the specific holding type (16R big hit, 8R big hit). For example, in the case of specific hold for 16R big hit, the in-hold extended resort production B is executed at a rate of 100%, and in the case of specific hold for 8R big hit, the in-hold extended resort production B is executed at a rate of 50%. It may be configured. This is to increase the player's expectation by increasing the appearance probability of the on-hold consecutive resort production B when the player has a great advantage.

  On the other hand, when there is no specific hold (S854: NO), the on-hold consecutive villa production B lottery process 2 for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production B is executed by lottery (S857). . In the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 2, the random resort production lottery random number value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production B lottery table 2. If so, determine whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 10% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning in the on-hold consecutive villa production B lottery process (S858). When winning (S858: YES), the extended resort production | presentation pattern selection process for determining the content of the pending | reserved extended resort production B is performed (S861). In this consecutive resort production pattern selection process, while obtaining the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. 8B, the consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210, and a plurality of types of consecutive resorts are obtained. From the production patterns, one of the consecutive-village production patterns is determined by lottery. Next, the number of the villa effect pattern selected this time is temporarily stored in the villa effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S868). Then, the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S870).

(Big hit production replacement process)
Next, the jackpot effect replacement process (S806) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot effect replacement process (S806). In this jackpot effect replacement process, a special end demonstration effect is set in S881 to S885 in the case of the previous special game in order to execute the special continuous effect by connecting the previous special game and the subsequent special game. In the case of a later special game, a special start demonstration effect is set in S886 to S890.

  First, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag in the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on, that is, whether or not the special continuous effect is already being executed (S881). If the special continuous effect flag is not on (S881: NO), it is determined whether the on-hold extended resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is on (S882). If the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag is not on (S882: NO), information indicating that “the last big hit (01H)” is set in the special continuous effect status of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S883). Thereby, it is determined that the current big hit (special game) is the previous big hit (special game) in the special continuous performance. Subsequently, the normal end demonstration effect pattern number set in S804 is replaced with the special end / end demonstration effect pattern number (S884). Then, the special continuous effect flag is turned on to generate a special continuous effect (S885).

  On the other hand, when the special continuous effect flag is on (S881: YES), that is, when the special continuous effect is already being executed, the special big effect status in the sub-main information storage means 260 is set to “subsequent big hit (02H ) ”Is set (S886). Thereby, it is determined that the current big hit (special game) is the later big hit (special game) in the special continuous performance. Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a 16R jackpot (high profit jackpot) (S887). If it is 16R big hit (S887: YES), the normal start demonstration effect pattern number set in S804 is replaced with the special end start demonstration effect pattern number (S888). Subsequently, the pseudo count flag of the sub-main information storage unit 260 is turned on to connect the special continuous effect to the pseudo count effect (S889). Then, the special continuous effect flag is turned off (S890).

《Reception interrupt processing of production control command》
Next, the reception control process of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an effect control command reception interrupt process. In this effect control command reception interrupt process, as described above, an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It is like that. The effect control command includes 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, MODE data is also referred to as “first command”, and EVENT data is also referred to as “second command”.

  First, when an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100 is generated, it is determined whether or not the input value of the effect control command is confirmed (S901). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice. This is because the reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not finalized until the same value is read twice.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether the command is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S904). Note that the production lottery random number is acquired when the production control command is received. The production control command is transmitted at a physically irregular timing, such as when a game ball starts winning or when a special symbol changes. Therefore, it is to prevent periodicity from being obtained at the acquisition time by using it as an opportunity. In this way, by making the production lottery random number acquisition time irregular, it is difficult to cause inconveniences such as the same production being unnaturally repeated in various production lotteries.

  On the other hand, when the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether or not the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether there is no contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the light pointer (writing pointer) is acquired (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage unit 260 according to the address indicated by the light pointer (S907). The saved command data is read out in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909).

《Timer interrupt processing for production control side》
Next, the production control side timer interruption process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interruption process. This timer interruption process is started by a clock pulse at regular intervals, and is executed by interrupting the above-described production control side main process.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the sub main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processing from S911 onward is executed sequentially. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts with priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S911).

  Subsequently, port input / output processing is executed (S912). In this port input / output processing, port data input processing and output processing in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input processing, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 are read and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

  Subsequently, device control data output processing is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

  Next, an effect timer update process is executed (S914). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for effect operation control are subtracted and updated every interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the variation time of the decorative symbol, a timer for managing the timing of occurrence of the notice effect, and the like. By this effect timer, the time schedule in the variable effect pattern is managed, and time management such as the drive timing of the movable accessory 24 and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP is managed on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S918) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

  Subsequently, a button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the effective operation time of the effect button 15 is updated by subtracting the interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation valid time is a time for which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

  Subsequently, task control counter update processing is executed (S717). In this task control counter update process, the value of the task counter (“0” to “15”) is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is “0” to “14”, it is incremented by 1. If the value of the task counter is “15”, it is returned to “0”. That is, this task counter can take a circulation period of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned corresponding to the task counter value updated this time, and the ramp control task (lamp data update processing in S718) and runaway monitoring are performed according to the task counter value. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in S719) and an error management task (error management timer update process in S720) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values (“0” to “15”) is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values with an interval of 8 ms between each other) are used for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to the task, and another value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the circulation cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to make it coincide with the minimum unit (16 ms) of the effect lamp LP switching control. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the effect lamp LP switching control corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and realizes synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

  Subsequently, lamp data update processing is executed (S918). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read and set from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S619). The lamp data set in this processing is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of the effect lamp LP switching control. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. The ramp data output process is configured as a serial communication interrupt process, and is realized by sequentially writing the ramp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the ramp data of the transmission buffer in units of 1 byte, and outputs the converted data to the lamp connection board 91 in units of one bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all the ramp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in the lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. The ramp data update process is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (value indicating the ramp control task) in the task control counter update process (S917) (that is, executed at a cycle of 16 ms). Processing).

  Subsequently, an image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S919). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, a toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not continuously change for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 is monitored. The sub-sub CPU 301 is determined to be out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. Thereby, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every frame time. This image CPU runaway monitoring process is a process executed when the value of the task counter becomes a predetermined value (a value indicating an image monitoring task) in the task control counter update process (S917).

  Next, error management timer processing is executed (S920). In this error management timer process, the error effect timer value for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S617) is subtracted and updated. This error management timer process is a process executed when the task counter value becomes a predetermined value (a value indicating an error management task) in the task control counter update process (S917). Then, all interrupts are permitted and the saved register contents are restored. Then, the effect control side timer interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the occurrence of the interrupt.

《Image control command transmission interrupt processing》
Next, transmission interruption processing of an image control command will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the transmission interrupt process of the image control command. This image control command transmission interruption process occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs).

  In this image control command transmission interrupt process, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, a read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, the image control command is not stored. When the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area indicated by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit 205 designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (the command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interruption process of the image command is ended, and the process returns to the original process before the interruption.

[Action]
Next, in order to facilitate understanding of the present embodiment, the characteristic operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 37, description will be made regarding the flow of effects when the on-hold consecutive resort effect and the special continuous effect are executed. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram showing effect screens of the reserved villa resort effect and the special continuous effect.

  First, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), in the round effect (final round) in the previous special game, “16 rounds” as the final round number and the number of winning prize balls “1988” in the previous special game are obtained. It is displayed. And in this last round, the image of “Mystery Book” is displayed as the on-hold extended resort production B, and the specific reserved is included in the subsequent operation holding ball, that is, the possibility of the on-hold extended resort Is suggested.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), in the end demonstration effect in the previous special game, the special continuous effect is started with the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B in the final round described above. In the illustrated example, a teammate character and an enemy character appear as special end demonstration effects. In addition, in this special end demonstration production, unlike the normal case, instead of displaying the character information of “Big jackpot end”, the character information of “Continue” is displayed, so that the special game continues. Can show. Internally, when the special game is ended, the symbol variation game is resumed in a state in which the special symbol probability change state and time reduction state and the electric chew support state are set.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 37 (C), in the first symbol variation after the end of the previous special game, the lottery result is lost, and a super shortening variation (2 seconds) is set as the special symbol variation effect. In a very short time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the off mode “1-2-5”. In the example shown in the figure, in this special variation effect, a battle effect in which the same teammate character and the enemy character as in FIG. This is to display the same character as that displayed in the previous special game so as not to give the player the impression that the special game (the previous special game) has ended. During the special symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable manner or stopped is displayed in a reduced state toward the end of the screen. As a result, the player can be shown as if the previous special game is continuing without ending. When the special symbol variation effect is not being performed, that is, during the normal symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol is displayed at substantially the center of the screen without being reduced. In addition, during the limited period (during the special variation effect), since a background image of a special background (“starry sky”) different from the normal is displayed, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for future development. In addition, it is good also as a state which cannot recognize a symbol fluctuation | variation by making the whole screen a specific display color, or cannot recognize it.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (D), in the second symbol variation after the end of the previous special game, the lottery result is a big hit (16R big hit), and a super shortened variation (2 seconds) is set as a special variation effect. Therefore, the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode “7-7-7” within a very short time. In the example shown in the figure, in this special variation effect, an effect in which the teammate character wins the enemy character is executed. In this way, in the special variation production in the special continuous production, the time until the transition to the subsequent special game is compressed by rapidly digesting the subsequent operation holding balls in a very short time, and the pattern is given to the player. It is configured so that it is possible to seamlessly connect to a later special game without recognizing as much as possible that the variation effect has been executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 37 (E), the special continuous production continues in the start demonstration production in the later special game. In the example shown in the drawing, as the special start demonstration effect, an effect in which the friend character tells the enemy character “the strongest of mystery” is executed. In this start demonstration effect, unlike the usual case, the text information of “start of big hit” is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (F), a pseudo-count effect is started in a round effect (starting round) in a later special game. In this pseudo-count effect, “17 rounds”, which is the cumulative number of rounds from the previous special game, and the cumulative prize from the previous special game are displayed in order to make it appear as if it is continuing as an extension of the previous special game. The number of balls “1988” is notified. Further, the same ally character and enemy character as in FIG. 37B are continuously displayed.

  As a result, the previous special game and the later special game based on the reserved game can be shown as a series of effects with the symbol variation effect interposed therebetween. Further, since the number of prize balls acquired by two special games is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that a large number of prize balls have been obtained. As a result, a new special gaming state exceeding the number of rounds and the number of prize balls restricted by the rules can be created in a pseudo manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the relationship between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production will be described. FIG. 38 is a time chart showing the relationship between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production.

  When the preceding operation hold ball is digested and the winning determination is won (t11), the process shifts to the hold-in-ream zone effect A determination process, and the pre-reading determination is executed for the subsequent operation hold ball. If there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball (in the example shown, the third is a specific hold), whether or not to execute the hold-in-village production A is determined by lottery. On-hold consecutive villa production A occurs (t12).

  Subsequently, when the symbol variation is stopped and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed, the special game (the previous special game) is started. At the start of this special game, the process shifts to the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process. B does not occur (t13). The reason for this is that if the on-hold extended villa production B is generated again during the special game, the number of on-hold extended villa times (the number of specific holdings in the subsequent operation holding ball) is one. Regardless, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that there are multiple times, and because in this example it is a reserved area rendezvous production B that is not a confirmed notification effect, the player is worried about whether a retained reed resort will really occur. This is because there is a risk of memorizing it.

  Next, the special continuous production is started at the end demonstration production in the previous special game (t14). This special continuous effect is continued from the end demonstration effect in the current special game (previous special game) to the round effect in the next special game (later special game) (t14 to t18). When the previous special game ends, the symbol variation effect is resumed (t15). In this example, a limited period for staying in the special effect mode Mγ is set with four symbol variations as a limit, and the special symbol variation effect is executed within this limited period.

  Then, after the end of the previous special game, when the third action holding ball (the specific hold notified in the hold-in consecutive resort at t12) is digested and the winning decision is won (t16), The process shifts to the Renso production A determination process. At this time, a new specific hold exists in the subsequent operation hold ball (the second hold is the specific hold in the illustrated example), but since the special continuous effect is already being executed, During the symbol variation effect, the on-hold consecutive resort effect A does not occur (t16). The reason for this is that, even when trying to show two special game states as one special game state with the occurrence of a special continuous production, a reserved in-village production A as a design variation production occurs during the execution of this special continuous production. This is because there is a risk of losing the meaning of concealing the fact that the symbol variation effect is being performed. In addition, when the special continuous production is started in response to the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort production A, the variation time when the subsequent operation holding ball is digested during this special continuous production (within a limited period) is extremely short. Since it is set to (2 seconds), the production effect is low even if the on-hold consecutive resort production A is generated within this short time, and both productions are produced by the competition between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production. This is because the effect may be diluted.

  Next, when the symbol variation stops and the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, the later special game is started. In addition, at the start of a later special game, the process shifts to the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the subsequent operation holding ball. At this time, even if the special continuous effect is being executed, if there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball (in the example shown, the second is a specific hold), whether or not the on-hold extended zone effect B can be executed is determined by lottery. If this is won and the winning game is won, the on-hold consecutive resort production B may occur during the special game (t17). The reason is that even if it is during the special hit effect, even if it occurs during the big hit effect, the player feels that the normal on-hold range resort effect B has occurred, and the player cannot feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the special continuous production is connected to a series of productions from at least the end demonstration production during the previous jackpot production to the start demonstration production during the subsequent big hit production, This is because there is no inconvenience that the on-hold consecutive villa production and the special continuous production compete with each other as long as the on-hold consecutive villa production is generated at the timing after the round presentation in the special game.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first on-hold extended resort production A that occurs during symbol variation and the second on-hold extended resort production B that occurs during special games are provided, In the consecutive play production A, the possibility that there is one specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball is notified, whereas in the second hold internal play production B, there is only one specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball. By constructing it so that it can also be notified that there are more than one, the expectation for the occurrence of the on-hold-reed villa performance will be maintained through a series of game processes from when the symbol starts to change until the special game ends. In addition, it is possible to teach the player various information related to the reserved resort in the game according to the generation timing of the reserved game in the game process. Because variations are given to the aspect It may extend the width of the hold in extended game effect, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, by executing a special symbol variation effect during a limited period after the end of the special game, the next jackpot (the specific reservation notified in the reserved game in the reservation) at an early stage after the end of the special game. It is possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of big hits), and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game. In addition, by configuring the special symbol variation effect with short-time shortening variation, the time interval between the previous special game and the subsequent special game can be suppressed, and the extension to the next big hit can be prevented. By prohibiting the production of the reserved renzo within the limited period, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from diluting due to the competition between the special dramas within the limited period and the reserved villa production within the limited period. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if there is a specific hold that becomes a big hit, the on-hold extended resort production is not necessarily executed, so even if not notified, the possibility of the on-hold extended resort is expected A feeling can be given. It should be noted that when there is a specific hold, the arrangement may be made such that the on-hold extended resort effect is always executed.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the preceding operation reservation ball becomes a big hit, and the reservation-in-ream zone effect B does not occur during the special game. If the high expectation effect (Super Reach B) is generated during the symbol change due to the digestion of the action holding ball (existing at the time of occurrence of B), there is a possibility that it will deviate from the possibility of a big hit. Is set higher.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the game of the second special symbol, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/40, and the probability of being out of play is about 39/40.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, when the result of the determination is a big hit, regardless of the type of big hit, whether it is a 16R specific big hit or an 8R specific big hit, 100% The variation pattern PX7, PY7 of super reach B (high expectation degree production) is selected with probability. That is, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, only the variation pattern PX7 of the super reach B is selected when the 16R specific big hit, and only the variation pattern PY7 of the super reach B is selected when the big hit is 8R. On the other hand, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, if the result of the determination is wrong, the variation pattern PH7 of super reach B (high expectation degree effect) is selected with a probability of 5%.

  At this time, as described in S856 of FIG. 32, in this example, when there is a specific hold (16R big hit, 8R big hit) in the subsequent operation hold ball, the winning probability of whether or not the hold-in-range extended zone effect B can be executed. Is set to 80%, so that even if there is a specific hold (16R big hit, 8R big hit), the on-hold extended zone effect B is not executed with the remaining 20% probability.

  Under the conditions as described above, the probability X of being a big hit by the appearance of Super Reach B and the probability Y of being lost by the appearance of Super Reach B under the circumstances in which the on-hold consecutive villa production B is not executed are as follows: It becomes as follows.

X = (Probability of winning a jackpot) × (Probability that the on-hold Renso production B does not occur) × (Probability of becoming Super Reach B)
Y = (probability of falling) × (probability of becoming super reach B)

  Subsequently, using the above numerical values, the probability X of being a big hit by the appearance of super reach B and the probability Y of being lost by the appearance of super reach B are specifically calculated as follows.

X = 1/40 * (100-80) / 100 * 100/100 = 20/400
Y = 39/40 × 5/100 = 195/400
It becomes.

  Therefore, if a high expectation effect is generated in the subsequent operation holding ball without generating the hold-in-rendition play effect B during the special game (when developed to Super Reach B), it can be a big hit. There is a higher possibility of detachment than sex.

  In the above-described first embodiment, basically, the pre-reading determination related to the on-hold extended villa effect is executed for the operation holding ball of the second special symbol acquired during the operation of the electric chew support function. However, this is merely an example. For example, the operation holding ball of the first special symbol (or the operation holding ball of the second special symbol) acquired when the electric chew support function is not operated is used as a target in the holding sequence. A pre-reading determination related to the villa production may be executed.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, the determination timing of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B is set to the timing at the time of the big hit start (when the start demo command is received), but this is only an example, for example, The timing may be set at any time at the start of the big hit, at the round game, or at the end of the big hit.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first special winning a prize game 64 is associated with the first special symbol game, and the second special winning award 65 is associated with the second special game. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, the first special winning opening 64 and the second large winning opening 65 are made to correspond to at least one of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, and these large winning ports 64 and 65 are alternately arranged. It may be opened. Moreover, the structure which provides only one big prize opening, without providing the two big prize openings 64 and 65 may be sufficient.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, so-called preferential digestion is adopted, in which the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation reservation ball of the first special symbol, but is not limited thereto. Instead, the operation holding balls may be digested according to the order in which the game balls enter the first start port 61 or the second start port 62. In addition, when employ | adopting this structure, it is preferable to make both the operation reservation ball | bowl of a 1st special symbol and the operation | movement reservation ball | bowl of a 2nd special symbol into the object of notification in an on-hold extended resort.

[First Embodiment-First Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Relationship between rendezvous renso production and ascension production)
In this modification, a rare special effect (so-called ascending effect) occurs when a so-called consecutive resort continues for a specified number of times. “Renso” means that when a predetermined big hit is made during a specific game, the specific game state continues again as a game state after the end of the special game. As described above, the “special game state” is a state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than the normal state, the special symbol probability variation function, special symbol variation time shortening function, electric chew support function Is a state in which at least one of the functions is activated. In this example, it is a condition that at least the electric chew support function (the easy entry state) is activated as the specific gaming state. Here, in this embodiment, during the ST period after the end of the special game, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function operate (the operation starts simultaneously and the operation ends simultaneously). Since it is configured, it can be said that it is always in a specific gaming state during the ST period.

  As an execution condition of the special effect, it is determined that the villa is continuous for a specified number of times (20 times in this example). In addition to the specified number of times, for example, the cumulative number of specific jackpots in the villa state is predetermined. When the number of times reached, the total number of rounds won or the total number of prize balls won in the consecutive house state reaches a predetermined number, and a specific effect (designated effect during symbol changes or special games) is generated during the consecutive house state Etc. may be added to the execution conditions. The total number of rounds earned in the villa state and the total number of winning balls may be added to the execution conditions. In this example, the number of consecutive resorts that repeatedly acquire a special game while continuing the specific game state (easy to enter the game) reaches the specified number (20 times), and at least the final Nth time, the high profit jackpot (16R It is a condition that it wins with big hit). The special effect is displayed across the decorative symbol variation effect and the jackpot effect on the time axis. However, the special effect ends with the round effect (final round) during the jackpot effect, and does not include the subsequent end demonstration effect. As the contents of this special effect, for example, by displaying the rare characters with high rarity that appear only in the special effect one by one in turn, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction with consecutive hits. A premium feeling can be raised.

  Next, the relationship between the on-hold consecutive villa effect and the special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are time charts showing the relationship between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special production. In the following, the number of consecutive resorts is also expressed as “N”, and the specified number of times is also expressed as “Nset”.

  (2-1) In the event that a reserved renso production is generated due to the symbol change or special game related to the previous big hit, the big hit (later big hit) by the reserved big villa is the number of consecutive villas as the condition for generating the special effect. Will not be counted and will not be a requirement for special effects. That is, as shown in FIG. 39, when the preceding operation holding ball is digested and the winning determination is won (t21), if it is at the time of digestion, the process shifts to the holding-in-village production A determination process, If it is the time of a start, it will transfer to a pending | holding consecutive resort production B determination process. In the on-hold extended-zone play effects A and B determination processing, if there is a specific hold (the third is specified hold in the illustrated example) in the subsequent operation hold ball, whether or not the on-hold extended game effects A and B can be executed is determined. If it is determined by lottery and wins this, if the symbol is changing, the on-hold extended resort production A is generated (t22), and if it is during a special game, the on-hold extended resort production B is generated (t23). Here, if the big hit this time is the number of consecutive villas N = Nset-the first big hit, the Nth big hit in the consecutive villa times A (t22) or the reserved Brenso production B (t23) When the presence of the specific hold is notified, the special effect is not generated across the symbol variation (t25) accompanied by the jackpot number N = Nset and the special game round effect (t26). The reason for this is that in this embodiment, two special gaming states (in this example, the special gaming state of the Nset-1th time and the Nsetth time) are triggered by the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort effects A and B. Since a special continuous production to show as one special game state is generated (t24 to t26), the Nset big hit is not included in the number of consecutive resorts as the execution condition of the special production. The reason for avoiding the execution is that the satisfaction of the player due to the pseudo extension of the special game is not lost, and the competition between the special effect and the special continuous effect is avoided, and the overall effect can be balanced. Internally, the number of consecutive resorts is updated as one consecutive resort even if it is a big hit by the reserved resorts.

  (2-2) When special effects occur across symbol variations and special games, regardless of whether or not there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball when the symbol variation starts. In the fluctuating effect, the on-hold consecutive villa effect A does not occur. That is, as shown in FIG. 40, as a result of the previous action holding ball being digested and winning / decision determination winning a high profit jackpot (t31), the number of consecutive homes N = the specified number of times Nset, and the symbol variation and special game In the case where a special effect occurs between t31 and t33, whether or not there is a specific hold (the specified hold is the third in the illustrated example) in the subsequent operation hold ball in the symbol variation concerned Regardless, the on-hold consecutive resort production A is not generated (t32). The reason for this is to avoid the fact that the production effects of the two are diluted with each other due to the competition between the special production during the symbol variation and the on-hold Renren production A.

  (2-3) When a special effect occurs across the symbol variation and the special game, regardless of whether or not there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation holding ball when the symbol variation starts. In the variation production, the on-hold consecutive villa production B may occur. That is, as shown in FIG. 40, as a result of the previous action holding ball being digested and winning / decision determination winning a high profit jackpot (t31), the number of consecutive homes N = the specified number of times Nset, and the symbol variation and special game When a special effect occurs (t32 to t33) across the game, whether or not there is a specific hold (the specified hold is the third in the example shown) in the subsequent operation hold ball in the special game Regardless, the on-hold consecutive villa effect B can be generated (t34). This is because, as described above, the special effect is executed from the symbol variation effect to the special game round effect, and therefore the on-hold Renso effect B is generated in the end demonstration effect after the round effect (t34). This is because a situation in which the special effect and the on-hold consecutive resort effect B compete during the special game is avoided. In addition, in the case where the on-hold consecutive resort effect B is not generated during the special game, even if there is a specific hold within a limited period after the end of the special game, the symbol change effect related to the specific hold is designated as the special symbol change effect. Rather than generating, normally shortened jackpot variation effect (completed only with the symbol variation effect related to the specific hold, not the special symbol variation effect related to the symbol variation effect related to the off-holding scheduled to be digested first) It may be generated as an instant hit effect).

  Subsequently, the procedure of the operation process in the first modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

(Special effect determination process: first modification)
First, the special effect determination process (S736) according to the subroutine of S736 of FIG. 29 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing details of the special effect determination process (S736).

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive resorts N is one less than the prescribed number Nset with reference to the consecutive resort number counter of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S751). If the number of consecutive resorts N = the prescribed number of times Nset-1 (S751: YES), that is, if the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed this time is a big hit, the number of consecutive resorts N is scheduled to reach the prescribed number of times Nset. If this is the case, the information stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in the above-described S732 (the result of the lottery determination and the big hit type) is analyzed, and the lottery result of the special symbol that is the current variation target Is 16R big hit (S752). If the lottery result is 16R big hit (S752: YES), that is, if the number of consecutive resorts N reaches the specified number Nset and the bonus hit at this consecutive resort number N is scheduled to become a high profit jackpot, the sub main information It is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag in the storage means 260 is on (S753).

  If the special continuous effect flag is not on (S753: NO), that is, if the special continuous effect is not being executed, the sub-main information storage unit 260 stores the effect pattern number of the special effect in order to execute the special effect. Is temporarily stored in the special effect pattern storage area (S754). Then, the special effect flag in the sub main information storage means 260 is turned on (S755). Here, the special effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the special effect is executed. Although not shown, the special effect flag is turned off when the round effect ends.

  On the other hand, if the special continuous effect flag is ON (S753), that is, if the special continuous effect is already being executed, S754 and S755 are skipped to avoid the conflict between the special effect and the special continuous effect. Then, this process ends.

(On-hold consecutive villa production A determination processing: first modification)
Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737) according to the subroutine of S737 in FIG. 29 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect A determination process (S737) in the first modified example.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is that the process of S760 has been added, and if the special effect is already being executed, the execution of the in-hold extended resort effect A is avoided. . In FIG. 42, the processes in S761 to S770 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the process in S760, which is a difference, will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the special effect flag in the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on (S760). If the special effect flag is not on (S760: NO), that is, if the special effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to the next S761 to continue the determination of whether or not the on-hold extended resort effect A can be executed. On the other hand, if the special effect flag is on (S760: YES), that is, if the special effect is already being executed, the processing after S761 is skipped in order to avoid the execution of the in-hold extended resort effect A. Then, this process ends.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination processing: first modification)
Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process (S805) according to the subroutine of S805 in FIG. 31 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S805) in the first modified example.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S859, S862, and S863, and depending on whether the special effect is being executed or not, The effect pattern selection process is different. In FIG. 43, the processes of S851 to S858 and S868 to S870 are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore the processes of S859, S862, and S863, which are different points, will be mainly described.

  First, when execution of the on-hold consecutive resort production B is determined, it is determined whether or not the special production flag of the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on (S859). If the special effect flag is not on (S859: NO), that is, if the special effect is not being executed, the extended game effect pattern selection process 1 for determining the contents of the reserved extended resort effect B is executed ( S862). In the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 1, the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. 8B is obtained, and the consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210, so that a plurality of types are obtained. One of the consecutive-village production patterns is determined by lottery.

  On the other hand, if the special effect flag is on (S859: YES), that is, if the special effect is being executed, the consecutive resort effect pattern selection process 2 for determining the content of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B is performed. It executes (S863). In this consecutive resort production pattern selection process 2, while acquiring a consecutive resort production pattern table (not shown) different from the above-described FIG. 8B, a consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210. Then, one of the multiple villa production patterns is determined by lottery from among the multiple types of villa production patterns. In the unillustrated consecutive-village effect pattern table, only the consecutive-village effect pattern generated in the end demonstration effect is specified, and the extended-game effect pattern generated in the start demonstration effect or the round effect is not specified. In other words, in the villa production pattern selection process 2, only the villa production pattern for the end demonstration production is selected. This is because, as described above, the special effect is executed from the variable effect to the round effect. This is because it is possible to avoid a conflict between the production and the on-hold Renso production B.

  As described above, according to the first modified example of the first embodiment, when the on-hold consecutive villa production occurs and then a big hit is made on the on-hold consecutive villa, internally, the number of consecutive villas N reaches the specified number of times Nset. Even if it is, the production that prohibits the generation of the special production and continues in conjunction with the production of the on-hold consecutive villa production (in this example, the special continuous production or the special background production within the limited period) ) And the special performance can be avoided, it is possible to prevent the effect of the on-hold renso production from becoming dilute, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  In the above-described first modification, the expectation for the special effect is achieved in the number of unreachable times (for example, 5, 10, 15 times) before the number N of consecutive resorts reaches the specified number Nset (= 20 times). For example, a special via effect composed of a part of the special effect may be provided. At this time, in the above-described first modified example, when the special performance is executed when the number of extended games reaches the specified number (20 times), basically the execution of the on-hold extended game production is limited (terminated). However, in the case of a special route effect, it may be configured so that the on-hold consecutive villa effect can be executed simultaneously even when the special route effect is being executed. .

[First Embodiment-Second Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Relationship between rendezvous renso production and production mode)
In the first embodiment described above, the presentation mode on the presentation control board 200 side is uniquely determined in accordance with the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side. The production mode can be selected when the production button 15 is operated.

  That is, in this modification, when a big hit (initial hit) occurs in a normal state, during the big hit production (during the end demonstration production), the type of the symbol variation production and the big hit production after the special game ends is specified. The player himself / herself can select the production mode from a plurality of types. In this example, as the probability variation effect mode Mβ during the ST period, two effect modes (first effect mode M1 and second effect mode M2) having different effect types are prepared, and a plurality of types are provided for each effect mode. A variation production pattern is stored. With regard to this variation effect pattern, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even when the variation start command of the same information is received), if the effect mode is different, the variation effect pattern having different effect contents is selected. It will be.

  The first effect mode M1 and the second effect mode M2 are configured as battle effect modes in which the player-side ally character battles against the enemy character, and the player-side ally character and the opponent's enemy for each effect mode. Characters are set to be different from each other.

  While staying in the first effect mode M1, a change effect pattern of effect contents in which the teammate character C1 corresponding to the effect mode M1 battles against an enemy character on the stage is selected as the symbol change effect. Further, while staying in the first effect mode M1, the first effect mode M1 is selected by selecting a jackpot effect pattern of the effect contents (attack type) that attacks the enemy character with the ally character C1 as the main character as the jackpot effect. The reciprocal relationship between the symbol variation production and the jackpot production is secured.

  While staying in the second effect mode M2, as the symbol variation effect, a variation effect pattern of effect contents in which the teammate character C2 corresponding to the effect mode M2 battles against the enemy character and the enemy's hide is selected. In addition, while staying in the second effect mode M2, as the big hit effect, the big hit effect pattern of the effect content (defense system) that protects the attack from the enemy character with the ally character C2 as the main character is selected. The mutual relationship between the symbol variation effect and the jackpot effect in the effect mode M2 is ensured.

  When the first hit occurs in the normal state, the effect mode is selected by displaying a predetermined mode selection screen during the end demonstration effect in the jackpot effect. During the display of the mode selection screen, an operation valid period for validating the operation of the effect button 15 is set. On the mode selection screen, the display area of the effect display device 70 is divided into left and right parts, the name of the teammate character C1 is displayed with the related image in the left area, and the name of the teammate character C2 is displayed with the related image in the right area. The Then, effect modes M1 and M2 corresponding to the teammate characters C1 and C2 selected by the effect button 15 during the operation effective period are set. If no operation is performed during the operation valid period, any production mode is set by internal lottery.

  Subsequently, the relationship between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the production mode in the second modification will be described.

  (3-1) The execution probability (occurrence frequency) of the on-hold consecutive villa effect A is different between when staying in the first effect mode M1 and when staying in the second effect mode M2. Is set. In this example, when staying in the first effect mode M1, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 90% (high probability), non-execution is determined at a rate of 10%, while staying in the second effect mode M2 If it is, execution is determined at a rate of 10% (low probability) and non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%. In addition, as long as the execution probability of the on-hold consecutive villa production A differs for each production mode, when staying in any of the production modes, the on-hold consecutive villa production A is not executed. The execution probability of the villa production A may be set to 0%.

  (3-2) The execution probability (occurrence frequency) of the on-hold consecutive villa effect B is set to be the same when staying in the first effect mode M1 and when staying in the second effect mode M2. Yes. In this example, even when staying in any of the production modes M1 and M2, execution is determined at a rate of 80% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%, for example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution probability of the on-hold consecutive villa effect B may be made different for each effect mode as in the on-hold consecutive villa effect A.

  (3-3) When execution of the on-hold consecutive villa production A is determined, the content of the on-hold consecutive villa production A (continuous villa production pattern) is the second when the first production mode M1 is staying. The same setting is made when the user is staying in the production mode M2. Here, FIG. 44 (A) is a schematic diagram showing a villa production pattern table of the reserved villa production A in the present modification. In this example, in the in-hold extended villa production A, any one of the same extended villa production patterns PA1 and PA2 is selected regardless of the production mode. Since the production patterns PA1 and PA2 have been described in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted here.

  (3-4) When execution of the on-hold consecutive villa production B is determined, the production contents (the consecutive villa production pattern) of the on-hold consecutive villa production B are the second and second cases where the first production mode M1 is staying. It is set to be different from the case where the user is staying in the production mode M2. Here, FIG. 44 (B) is a schematic diagram showing a extended villa production pattern table of the on-hold extended villa production B in the present modification. In this example, in the on-hold consecutive villa production B, one of the consecutive villa production patterns PB11, PB12, and PB13 is selected in the first production mode, and in the second production mode, the villa production patterns PB21, PB22. , PB23 is selected. In the first effect mode M1, when the consecutive-village effect patterns PB11 to PB13 are selected, special effect images “BX11” to “BX13” that do not appear in any scene other than the on-hold extended-village effect. Is displayed. As the effect images BX11 to BX13, for example, an attack-type effect content in which an image imitating an “invincible sword” or character information such as “attack is the greatest defense” appears. On the other hand, in the second effect mode M2, when the consecutive-village effect patterns PB21 to PB23 are selected, a special effect image “BX21” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold consecutive-village effect. “BX23” is displayed. As the effect images BX21 to BX23, for example, an image imitating “invincible armor” or a defense-related effect content in which character information such as “complete defense” appears.

  Next, the procedure of the operation process in the second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

(Big hit effect content determination processing: second modification)
First, the big hit effect content determination process (S638) according to the subroutine of S638 of FIG. 27 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit effect content determination processing (S638) in the second modification.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S829 to S831, in that the operation of the effect button 15 is set to be effective during the end demonstration effect at the first hit. In FIG. 45, the processes of S801 to S826 and S835 to S838 are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S829 to S831 which are different points will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is the first hit (S829). In the case of the first hit (S829: YES), an operation effective period for measuring the operation effective period of the effect button 15 so that the effect mode can be selected according to the operation of the effect button 15 by the player. A predetermined value is set in the timer (S830). The operation valid period is a period during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid. Subsequently, the effect button valid flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S831). The effect button valid flag is a flag that is turned on when the operation of the effect button 15 is valid.

(Production button monitoring control process: second modification)
Next, the effect button monitoring control process (S617) according to the subroutine of S617 in FIG. 26 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing details of the effect button monitoring control process (S617).

  First, it is determined whether or not the effect button valid flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is on (S951). If the effect button valid flag is on (S951: YES), it is determined whether or not the operation button 15 is in an operation valid period, that is, whether or not the operation valid period timer is not "0" (S952). ). As described above, the operation valid period timer is set to a predetermined value at the start of the end demonstration effect at the first hit, and is subtracted by 1 ms each time a timer interrupt process described later occurs. Further, during the operation effective period, an effect screen (mode selection screen) based on the end demonstration effect pattern set in S804 is displayed, and based on the operation input of the effect button 15, the first effect mode M1 and the second effect mode. Any one of M2 can be selected. Specifically, although not shown in the drawing, on the mode selection screen, two selected images corresponding to each effect mode are displayed on the left and right or top and bottom, and the display mode of the selected image is displayed at regular intervals during the operation effective period. By sequentially switching, one of these two selected images can be selected according to the operation timing of the effect button 15, and an effect mode corresponding to this selected image is set.

  Here, when the operation button 15 is in the operation effective period (S952: YES), it is determined whether or not there is an operation input of the effect button 15 (S953). When there is an operation input of the effect button 15 (S953: YES), the operation input information of the effect button 15 is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S954). In this example, the operation input information includes information indicating that the first effect mode has been selected and information indicating that the second effect mode has been selected. Subsequently, an image control command for instructing the operation input information of the effect button 15 to the image control board 300 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S955). Further, when there is an operation input of the effect button 15 as described above, an operation valid flag is set in order to confirm the operation input and set the end of the operation valid period even before the operation valid period has elapsed. It is turned off (S956). On the other hand, when the operation valid period is not in effect (S952: NO), that is, when the operation valid period timer is “0”, the effect button valid flag is turned off (S956).

(Production state transition processing: second modification)
Next, an effect state transition process (S632) according to the subroutine of S632 in FIG. 27 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing details of the rendering state transition process (S632) in the second modified example.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the process of S714 to S720, based on the operation input information of the effect button 15 set in the effect button monitoring control process (S617) described above (the effect by the player). The point is that the production mode is determined alternatively by the pressing operation of the button 15). In FIG. 47, the processing of S701 to S705 and S721 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore, the description will be focused on the processing of S714 to S720 which is a difference.

  First, when the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is the high probability reduced variation state β (S706: YES), it is determined whether or not the current big hit is the first hit (S714). If it is the first hit (S714: YES), it is determined whether or not the operation input information set in S954 is information indicating that the first effect mode M1 has been selected (S715). When the first effect mode M1 is selected (S715: YES), the first effect mode M1 is set as the transition destination of the effect mode (S716). When the first effect mode M1 is entered, the first probability background data is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S717). Then, in the first effect mode M1, for example, a first probability background image of “the arena” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  On the other hand, when the operation input information set in S954 is information indicating that the second effect mode M2 has been selected and operated (S715: NO), the second effect mode M2 is set as the transition destination of the effect mode ( S718). When the second effect mode M2 is entered, the second probability background data is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S719). Then, in the second effect mode M2, for example, a second probability change background image of “enemy hideout” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  If the current big hit is not the first hit (S714: NO), the effect mode and the background image selected at the first hit are maintained (S720). In addition, you may comprise so that not only the operation input at the time of the first hit in said S714-S719 but a certain condition may be met and a production | presentation mode may be switched. As specific conditions, for example, when a specific jackpot (including a case where the jackpot type is a specific type or a case where the jackpot effect is a specific effect), or when a predetermined condition is satisfied with respect to the extended resort state (The occurrence of the special effect described above) or a case where there is a specific operation input during a big hit (for example, a special operation input with five times or a long press as a special operation input at a specific timing at the time of a big hit).

(On-hold consecutive villa production A determination processing: second modification)
Subsequently, the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737) according to the subroutine of S737 in FIG. 29 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect A determination process (S737) in the second modified example.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S771 to S773, and the execution probability of the on-hold consecutive resort production A lottery processing is set to the production mode set in the production state transition processing (S632). The point is that they are different. In FIG. 48, the processes in S761 to S765 and S767 to S770 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes in S771 to S773 that are different points will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the presentation mode currently staying is the first presentation mode M1 (S771). In the case of the first effect mode M1 (S771: YES), the on-hold extended resort production A lottery for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort production A in the first effect mode M1. Process 1 is executed (S772). In the on-hold consecutive resort production A lottery process 1, the consecutive resort production lottery random value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to an unshown consecutive resort production A lottery table. Determine whether or not to execute. In this example, execution is determined at a rate of 90%, for example, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 10%.

  On the other hand, in the case where the effect mode during the stay is the second effect mode M2 (S771: NO), in order to determine by lottery whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort effect A in the second effect mode M2. The on-hold consecutive resort production A lottery process 2 is executed (S773). In the on-hold consecutive resort production A lottery process 2, the random resort production lottery random value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production A lottery table. Determine whether or not to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 10% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%.

  As described above, in the present modification, the probability that the on-hold extended villa production A is executed when staying in the first presentation mode M1 and the second presentation mode M2, that is, the on-hold extended villa production. The frequency of occurrence of A is set to be different.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination process: second modification)
Subsequently, the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process (S805) according to the subroutine of S805 of FIG. 45 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S805) in the second modified example.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S860, S864, and S865, and the extended villa production pattern table of the on-hold extended villa production B is set in the production state transition process (S632). There is a point that is different according to the production mode. In FIG. 49, the processes of S851 to S857 and S869 to S870 are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S860, S864, and S865, which are different points, will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the presentation mode currently staying is the first presentation mode M1 (S860). When it is the 1st production mode (S860: YES), the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 1 for determining the content of the on-hold consecutive resort production B is performed (S864). In the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 1, the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. 44 (B) described above is obtained, and the consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210. One of the consecutive villa production patterns is determined by lottery from among the consecutive villa production patterns PB11 to PB13. As described above, in the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 1, only the consecutive resort production patterns PB11 to P13 having the attack-related contents are selected.

  On the other hand, if the effect mode during the stay is the second effect mode M2 (S860: NO), the extended resort effect pattern selection process 2 for determining the content of the on-hold extended resort effect B is executed (S865). . In this consecutive resort production pattern selection process 2, while obtaining the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. 44 (B) described above, the consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210, and a plurality of types are obtained. One of the consecutive villa production patterns is determined by lottery from among the consecutive villa production patterns PB21 to PB23. As described above, in the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 2, only the consecutive resort production patterns PB21 to 23 having the contents of the defense system are selected.

  As described above, in this modified example, when execution of the on-hold extended villa effect B is decided, the case of staying in the first effect mode M1 and the case of staying in the second effect mode M2 are performed. B's display mode (renso production pattern) is set to be different.

  As mentioned above, according to the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment, according to the classification of the production mode which the player himself selected, by changing the appearance rate and the content of the production of the on-hold consecutive villa production, It is possible to provide the player with the on-hold consecutive villa production that suits his / her preference, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in this modification, although the special effect mode which stays only within the limited period after the end of a special game is not provided, it is not limited to this, You may provide a special effect mode. In this case, a first special effect mode corresponding to the first effect mode and a second special effect mode corresponding to the second effect mode are provided, and a desired special effect mode is obtained by the player's operation after the first hit. May be configured to be selectable. In this configuration, for example, a special continuous effect may be generated when shifting to the first special effect mode, and a special continuous effect may not be generated when shifting to the second special effect mode. Further, as a further modification, the fact that at least one of the one or a plurality of subsequent action-pending balls is in a specific hold makes it possible to execute the in-hold extended resort effect B in the special game effect display process. This is a special condition in which the special game triggers the transition from the first effect mode M1 to the second effect mode M2 even if the condition is fulfilling the condition for executing the rendezvous resort effect on hold In the case of a game (referred to as “special special game”), compared to the case where the special game is not a special special game (referred to as “non-special special game”), the occurrence frequency (execution probability) ) May be low. In that case, the jackpot type includes at least the first jackpot and the second jackpot, and when the first jackpot is won, the game shifts to the first effect mode after the end of the special game (non-special special game), In the case of winning the second jackpot, after the special game (special special game) is finished, the mode is shifted to the second effect mode. At this time, during the execution of the special special game, for example, a special jackpot effect that does not appear in any other scene is executed. Therefore, when winning the second jackpot, a special jackpot effect is generated during the special game (during special special game). The frequency of the villa production B is set relatively low.

[First Embodiment-Third Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the third modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Director-in-residence production that requires multiple operations)
In the first embodiment described above, in the on-hold consecutive resort production, it is a configuration that suggests or notifies the possibility that there is a specific hold that becomes a big hit in the subsequent operation hold ball, but is not limited to this, and is specified. You may comprise so that it may suggest or alert | report not only the presence or absence of a holding | maintenance but the fluctuation | variation effect aspect of a subsequent action | operation holding ball.

  In this modification, while suggesting or informing the fluctuating effect mode of the subsequent actuated ball in the on-hold extended game effect B, suggesting or informing the fluctuating effect mode of the subsequent actuated ball in the on-hold consecutive game effect A. Do not do. Note that the reason for not suggesting or notifying the variation production mode in the on-holding renso production A is that the on-holding renso production A occurs within the fluctuation, and therefore, a special game with a special game due to the big hit in the fluctuation is inserted. This is because the significance of suggesting or notifying the variation effect mode after the game is low.

  Now, the on-hold consecutive villa effect B in the present modification will be described. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of effects of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B in the present modification. In the modified example, the content of the on-hold consecutive villa production B is obtained by opening the treasure box displayed on the screen when the player operates the production button 15 a plurality of times. Correspondingly, the presence / absence of the specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball and the variation effect mode are suggested or notified. In this way, in order to receive the presence or absence of specific hold and the suggestion or notification of the variation effect mode in the on-hold consecutive resort effect B, it is necessary to perform a plurality of button operations by the player.

  In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 50, a total of three treasure chests are arranged in a horizontal row on the screen, and one treasure chest is opened by one operation of the effect button 15, and this opened treasure chest. The number of acquired points (0 points or 1 point) appears. Then, according to the total number of points obtained when all the treasure chests are opened, the presence / absence of specific holding in the subsequent operation holding ball and the changing effect mode are suggested or notified.

  As will be described in detail later, in this modified example, when the total number of acquired points is 0, it is suggested that there is a possibility that an operation holding ball with a reach effect exists in the subsequent operation holding ball. When the total number of acquired points is 1, it is definitely notified that there is an operation holding ball with a reach effect in the subsequent operation holding ball. When the total number of points acquired is two, the fact that there is a specific hold that becomes a 16R big hit or an 8R big hit in the subsequent operation hold ball, that is, the fact that there is a hold in the hold, is definitely notified. When the total number of acquired points is 3, the fact that there is a specific hold that becomes a 16R big hit in the subsequent operation hold ball, that is, a notification of a hold in the high profit big hit, is definitely notified.

  Here, the extended game effect pattern in this modification is demonstrated, referring FIG. FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a extended-village effect pattern table for the on-hold extended-village effect B in the third modified example. A plurality of types of consecutive-village effect patterns are defined in the consecutive-village effect pattern table. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is shown, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining the villa effect pattern according to the villa effect pattern random value Is set, and based on which judgment value the random number value of the renage effect pattern belongs to, the renage effect pattern is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the consecutive resort production pattern table, according to each consecutive resort production pattern, the number of points for each treasure chest that can be acquired by one button operation (the score of the first treasure chest, the second The treasure box score and the third treasure chest score) have been specified (see the column “Production contents (acquired points)” in the figure), and each consecutive villa production pattern has a total treasure chest score (0, (1 point, 2 points, 3 points). In other words, when the total score is “0”, only the extended game effect pattern PB31 is selected, and when the total acquired score is “1”, any of the extended game effect patterns PB32 to PB34 is selected. When the acquired score is “2 points”, any of the extended game effect patterns PB35 to PB37 is selected. When the total acquired score is “3 points”, only the extended game effect pattern PB38 is selected. For example, when the consecutive-village effect pattern PB35 is selected, “0 points” can be obtained by the first operation, “1 point” can be obtained by the second operation, and “1 point” can be obtained by the third operation. As a result, the total score “2 points” is determined.

  In this consecutive resort production pattern table, the selection rate of the consecutive resort production pattern is set to be different according to the result of the prefetch determination (preliminary determination). In principle, in the Renso production pattern, the selection rate is assigned according to the final total score, and when the result of the prefetch determination is a big hit, the total score is “0”, “ While the selection rate increases in the order of “1 point”, “2 points”, and “3 points”, if the result of the pre-judgment is out of place, the total score is “0 points”, “1 point” , “2 points”, “3 points”, the selection rate decreases in this order.

  Furthermore, even if the result of the pre-reading determination is out of order and the big hit, the selection rate of the villa performance pattern differs depending on the type of outage (out of reach, out of reach) and the type of big hit (8R big hit, 16R big hit). In other words, if the result of the pre-reading determination is out of reach, no more than “1” will be selected as the total number of points earned, so when the total number of points earned exceeds “1”, the subsequent operation It is deterministic that an operation holding ball with a reach effect exists in the holding ball. Even if the result of the prefetch determination is a big hit, “1 point” may be selected as the total score, but in this example, only the reach fluctuation is selected as the big hit fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. Therefore, as described above, when the total score becomes “1 point” or more, it is definite that there is an operation holding ball with a reach effect in the subsequent operation holding ball. Does not occur.

  Similarly, when the result of the prefetch determination is a big hit, “2 points” or more may be selected as the total number of points to be acquired. On the other hand, when the result of the prefetch determination is out of reach (out of normal reach, super out of reach) Since “2 points” or more is not selected as the total number of points to be acquired, when the total number of points to be acquired is “2 points” or more, there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, that is, It will be definitive to get on hold. Furthermore, when the result of the pre-reading determination is 16R big hit, “3 points” may be selected as the total score. On the other hand, when the result of the pre-reading determination is 8R big hit, the total score is “3 points”. Is not selected, and when the total score reaches “3 points”, there is a specific hold that is 16 big hits in the subsequent working hold ball, that is, the high profit big hit is held within the It is definitive to go to a resort.

  The contents of such a reserved in-ream villa effect B will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, the case where the consecutive resort production pattern PB37 is selected is illustrated. As described above, in this consecutive-village production pattern, “0 points” can be obtained by the first operation, “1 point” can be obtained by the second operation, and “1 point” can be obtained by the third operation. Is the contents of the effect of definitely informing the occurrence of two points, that is, the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort.

  First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), with the start of the operation effective period in which the operation of the effect button 15 is enabled, images of three treasure chests (closed treasure chests) are displayed on the screen, and “ "Let's open the treasure chest by pressing the button" is displayed. On the screen, “remaining time” at which the operation button 15 can be operated and “total number of points acquired” indicating the number of points acquired at the current stage are displayed. Further, a cursor pointing to the treasure chest to be operated is displayed on the screen, and the cursor is gradually shifted from left to right by one treasure according to the remaining operable time. . On the screen, the left treasure chest is also called “first treasure chest”, the central treasure chest is called “second treasure chest”, and the right treasure chest is also called “third treasure chest”.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50B, when the effect button 15 is operated when the cursor points to the first treasure box, the first treasure box is opened. At this time, if the treasure box is out of place, the characters “0” and “sorry” appear from the treasure chest.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50C, when the effect button is operated 15 times when the cursor points to the second treasure chest, the second treasure chest is opened. At this time, if the treasure box is a win, a character “chance” appears together with a character “1 point” from the treasure box. At this time, since “1 point” or more is assured as the total number of points acquired, it becomes definite that there is an operation holding ball with a reach effect in the subsequent operation holding ball.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50D, when the effect button 15 is operated when the cursor points to the third treasure chest, the third treasure chest is opened. At this time, if the treasure box is a win, a character “chance” appears together with a character “1 point” from the treasure box. In addition, the characters “2 points” are displayed as “total score” obtained by adding the first score and the second score. Thereby, it is clearly notified that the specific hold is included in the subsequent operation hold ball, that is, that it becomes a hold range resort.

  When the production button 15 is not operated in spite of the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort production B in this way, the treasure box remains closed, and the pre-reading determination with respect to the subsequent operation holding ball is performed. You can't get results. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that each operation of the effect button 15 is meaningful. In addition, in this modification, although it was set as the structure which requires operation of multiple times, it is not limited to this, It is good also as a structure which suggests or alert | reports the change effect aspect of a subsequent action | operation hold ball only by one operation. . In addition, if the button operation is not performed even though the player has operated the button, the player can obtain “3 points”, but if the button operation is not performed, it is complementarily different from this. You may comprise so that 2 may be performed at the time of completion | finish demonstration production. In other words, if the button operation is performed at a specified timing and “3 points” can be obtained, it may be configured not to perform the in-hold extended villa effect B-2.

  As mentioned above, according to the 3rd modification of 1st Embodiment, when not only the possibility that specific reservation exists in a subsequent operation reservation ball | bowl, but the subsequent operation reservation ball | bowl was digested in the retentive in a reservation in stop. By suggesting or informing even the fluctuating production mode, it is possible to teach the player a variety of additional information according to the production result. It is possible to improve the fun of the game. In addition, the synergistic effect of the on-hold consecutive resort production and the button production can further increase the added value when the on-hold consecutive resort production occurs, and can further enhance the player-participatory presentation effect. .

[First Embodiment-Fourth Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a fourth modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the fourth modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Confirmed notification timing by rendezvous production on hold)
In the first embodiment described above, the on-hold consecutive villa production becomes definitive when the on-hold consecutive villa production A occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the consecutive villas are determined after a predetermined condition is satisfied after the consecutive villas production A is generated without determining the consecutive villas.

  For example, in the probability variation mode in which the gaming state is a probability variation state of a special symbol, a battle effect is developed as a symbol variation effect that includes a battle between a teammate character and an enemy character. The battle effect in this modification is an effect that suggests that the player's ally character wins the enemy character immediately before the end of the symbol variation effect (immediately before the decoration symbol stops), thereby confirming the 16R jackpot with the variation. It is.

  In this modification, the on-hold consecutive villa effect A may occur as a battle effect (special battle effect) during symbol variation. In this special battle effect, a special enemy character that does not appear in the normal battle effect appears. In the case of this special battle effect, if the teammate character wins the enemy character, the 16-hit win in the change and the fact that there is a specific hold in the subsequent action holding ball, that is, the hold-in-range resort It is decided to do. On the other hand, if the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character in this special battle effect, the deviation due to the change becomes definite, and further, the occurrence of the reserved renzo is denied (so-called gasset effect). ). Thus, in this modified example, until the result of the battle in the battle effect is notified, it is not determined whether or not a reserved resort will occur. Can be increased.

  In addition, it is not limited only to the on-hold renso production A, and also on the on-hold renso production B, the on-hold renso production B is not determined at the time of the on-hold renso production B, and the on-hold renso production B is generated. Then, it is good also as a structure by which a predetermined condition is satisfied and a pending | holding range resort is decided. In this modified example, the content of the on-hold extended villa effect B is exemplified by a roulette effect that notifies the possibility of the on-hold extended villa by the roulette stop result, for example. In this roulette production, there are 3 stop positions “壱”, “弐” and “San”, and if the roulette stops at “壱”, the reserved resort is denied and stops at “弐” In such a case, it is suggested that there is a pending renage, and if it is stopped at "San", the confirmation of the banned villa will be notified. In this way, in this modified example, until the lottery result is notified in the roulette effect, it is not determined whether or not the reserved resort will occur. Can be increased. Note that the roulette may be stopped on condition of player's button operation.

  As described above, according to the fourth modified example of the first embodiment, even if the on-hold extended resort production occurs, the player is instructed whether or not the on-hold extended resort is confirmed until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the interest in the content of the effect can be maintained until the final timing when the on-hold consecutive resort effect ends, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[First Embodiment-Fifth Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a fifth modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the fifth modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Button notice effect including rendezvous in the reservation)
In the first embodiment described above, the on-hold consecutive villa effect A is configured to display an effect image corresponding to the consecutive villa effect pattern, but a button notice effect that displays a notice effect image associated with a button operation by the player. It is good also as a structure including the on-hold consecutive resort production A as one aspect.

  Here, in the first embodiment described above, the notice effect pattern corresponding to the change effect pattern is selected, and the notice effect is generated during the symbol change effect. As one of the notice effects, a button operation by the player is performed. There is a button notice effect. The button notice effect is a notice effect that suggests or notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by displaying a predetermined effect image under the condition of a button operation by the player. In the present modification, the on-hold consecutive villa effect A is generated in the form of being included in the button notice effect. At this time, in a normal button notice effect, a plurality of items A, B, and C appear on the screen, and any one item can be selected. On the other hand, in the button notice effect as the on-hold consecutive resort production A, in addition to the normal items A, B, and C, a special item D appears on the screen, and this item D can be selected. . In this way, the possibility of a reserved resort can be notified by the appearance of the special item D during the button notice effect.

  As described above, according to the fifth modification of the first embodiment, the added value when the on-hold consecutive villa production is established can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the on-hold consecutive villa production and the button notice effect. The effect of player participation can be enhanced, and as a result, the fun of the game can be improved.

[First Embodiment-Sixth Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a sixth modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the sixth modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Combination image of the rendezvous rendezvous production and the design variation production)
In the first embodiment described above, only the effects that do not appear in all other scenes are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect image of the on-hold consecutive villa effect B is displayed during the symbol variation effect. It is good also as a structure which serves as one of the produced effects images. For example, in the battle effect during the symbol variation effect, if an effect image in which the teammate character unleashes the special technique may appear, this effect image may be used as the effect image of the reserved in-village effect B. Note that the reason why the effect image of the on-hold consecutive villa effect A and the effect image during the symbol variation effect is not combined is that when the image is displayed during the symbol variation effect, the effect image becomes a normal battle effect. Since it is difficult to identify whether it is displayed as a one-step process or as an on-hold range resort production A, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to accurately notify the player of the possibility of the on-hold range resort. Because it is expensive.

  As described above, according to the sixth modified example of the first embodiment, the effect image of the symbol variation effect and the effect image of the on-hold consecutive resort effect are shared in part, and thus the limited hardware of the gaming machine It is possible to prevent wasteful consumption of resources.

  In addition, you may provide the roaring effect for encouraging generation | occurrence | production of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B during a big hit effect. In this case, during the jackpot presentation, the on-hold consecutive villa production can be generated only once, while the roaring production can be generated a plurality of times. For example, if the above-mentioned combined-use image is scheduled to be displayed in a predetermined round during the big hit effect in the on-hold consecutive resort production B, for example, the on-hold consecutive resort production B (the relevant In order to avoid the occurrence of the combined image), it is also possible to display a rolled image that associates or predicts the generation of the combined image, such as the shadow of the teammate character or the afterimage of the deathblow.

[First Embodiment-Seventh Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a seventh modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the seventh modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Number of on-hold Renso notifications)
In the first embodiment described above, it is configured that the possibility that there are a plurality of specific holds in the subsequent operation hold ball in the on-hold extended resort effect B can be notified. In order to teach the possibility that there are a plurality of specific holds in the operation hold ball, the maximum value of the number of specific holds that can be notified in the on-hold extended resort production (the “number of on-hold extended resort notifications”) is determined in advance. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of specific holdings existing in the subsequent operation holding ball within a range not exceeding the maximum value can be notified.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the maximum value of the on-hold consecutive villa notification in the on-hold consecutive villa production A is “1”, and the maximum value of the on-hold consecutive villa notification in the on-hold consecutive villa production B is “2”. That is, in the in-hold consecutive resort production A determination process, the pre-read determination for only the earliest specific hold among the subsequent operation hold balls is executed to notify the existence of one specific hold, while hold In the Inner Renso production B determination process, the pre-read determination for not only the earliest specific hold but also the subsequent specific hold among the subsequent operation hold balls is executed to notify the existence of two or more specific holds. Configured to get.

  In the present modification, the number of specific reservations (referred to as “the number of extended reservations”) existing in the subsequent operation holding ball is counted in executing such determination processing of the extended reservations A and B. There is a counter for the number of in-hold retreats to do. The on-hold consecutive resort number counter is sequentially updated within a range that does not exceed a predetermined maximum number of on-hold consecutive resort notifications. The maximum value of the number of notifications in the on-hold consecutive villa is set to be larger in the on-hold consecutive villa production B than in the on-hold consecutive villa production A. Specifically, the maximum value of the number of notifications in the on-hold consecutive villas in the on-hold consecutive resort production A is “1”, and the maximum value of the in-holds in the continuous resort notification B is “3”. . In addition, the maximum value of the number of in-hold extended game notifications can be set in a range that is equal to or less than the maximum value of the number of active reserved balls of the second special symbol.

  As a notification mode of the number of in-hold resorts, the number of in-hold resorts is “1” when “one mystery” appears as in the first embodiment. If “2” appears in the “Mystery Book”, the possibility is “2” in the reserved resort, and if “3” appears in the “Reservation Book” The aspect which alert | reports possibility that it is the number of consecutive resorts "3" is illustrated.

  In addition, the maximum value of the number of in-hold extended villas in this modification is merely an example, and the maximum value of the number of in-hold extended villas in the on-hold extended villa production A may be “2” or more. "4" may be sufficient as the maximum value of the number of notifications in the on-hold consecutive villa in the on-hold consecutive villa production B.

  As described above, according to the seventh modified example of the first embodiment, the maximum value of the number of in-hold extended villa notifications for the on-hold extended villa production A and the on-hold extended villa production B is set to be different from each other. By renewing the number of reserved villas within a range that does not exceed, the display mode of the on-hold villas A and B can be abundant and varied depending on the number of consecutive villa notifications, As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming state after the special game is determined based on the special symbol stop symbol (symbol group). In the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the special symbol stop symbol (symbol group). ) And the game mode during the special game, the game state after the special game is determined.
In other words, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment allows a game ball to enter a special prize game having a specific area (in this example, the second large prize opening 65) and pass through the specific area. The game machine is configured as a so-called ball accuracy type game machine that decides to shift to the probability change state after the end of the special game.

  FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the second grand prize winning opening 65 in the second embodiment. As described above, the second big prize opening 65 is provided with a second big prize opening switch 651 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening 65, and the second big prize opening. A second special electric accessory 652 for opening and closing 65 is provided. In addition, a distribution device 654 for determining a gaming state after the end of the special game is provided in the second grand prize winning port 65, located downstream of the second big prize winning port switch 651. The distribution device 654 is provided with a specific area 658 and a non-specific area 659 to which game balls that have entered the second grand prize winning opening 65 are distributed. In addition, the distribution device 654 is provided with a blade member 655 that selectively guides the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 65 to the specific area 658 or the non-specific area 659, and opens and closes the blade member 655. A specific area solenoid 656 is provided. In a state where the wing member 655 is in the closed position, the specific area 658 is closed by the wing member 655, and the game balls are distributed to the non-specific area 659. On the other hand, when the blade member 655 is in the open position, the specific area 658 is opened, and the game balls are distributed to the specific area 658. In the specific area 658, a specific area switch 657 for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the specific area 658 is provided. The specific area switch 657 functions as a probability change switch for shifting the gaming state after the end of the special game to a state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated.

  In this example, the opening / closing operation of the second special electric accessory 652 and the opening / closing operation of the blade member 655 are controlled synchronously, and the opening period of the second big prize opening 65 and the opening period of the specific area 658 are temporally controlled. Are configured to overlap. Therefore, when the second grand prize opening 65 is opened, the specific area 658 is also opened, and when the second big prize opening 65 is closed, the specific area 658 is also closed. Note that the drive control of the blade member 655 (specific area solenoid 656) is executed by the main control board 100 (electric accessory control means 160).

  Based on the detection information from the specific area switch 657, the main control board 100 (the ball determining means 110) determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area 658 of the second big prize opening 65. When the main control board 100 (the entrance determination means 110) detects that an entry into the specific area 658 is detected, an effect control command including the specific area entrance information (“specific area entrance command”) To generate).

  Next, a special symbol stop symbol (big hit type) in the second embodiment will be described.

  The upper part of FIG. 53 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the second embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the symbol random value per special symbol is associated with the stop symbol, the symbol group, and the action patterns of the special winning openings 64 and 65, respectively. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups A and B according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, symbols “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4” include symbols “A”, “6”, “7”, “ Symbol group B (8R short open big hit symbol) is associated with “8”.

  The lower part of FIG. 53 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the second embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, the special symbols per special symbol are associated with the stop symbols, the symbol groups, and the operation patterns of the special winning openings 64 and 65, respectively. In this table, the stop symbols “11” to “18” of the second special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups C and D according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the symbols “11”, “12”, “13”, and “14”, the symbol group C (16R long open big hit symbol) has symbols “15”, “16”, “17”, “ 18 ”is associated with the symbol group D (8R long open big hit symbol).

  The “long open big hit” is a big hit with a round game in which the second big winning opening 65 is long open, and it is relatively easy to enter the game ball into the specific area 658. The “short open big hit” is a big win with a round game in which the second big winning opening 65 is short opened, and it is relatively difficult to enter the game ball into the specific area 658. In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is a big hit, it corresponds to a long open big hit (16R long open big hit) at a rate of 50%, and a short open big hit (8R short open big hit at the rate of the remaining 50%. ) On the other hand, in the case of a big hit with the second special symbol, it corresponds to a long open big hit (16R long open big hit, 8R long open big hit) at a rate of 100%.

  Here, FIG. 54 is a time chart for explaining the operation pattern of the special winning openings 64 and 65 in the special game in the second embodiment. In the figure, the state changes of the first big prize opening 64 and the second big prize opening 65 during the special game are shown in time series from left to right. In addition, between each round, the interval time (standby time) in which the closed state of the special winning openings 64 and 65 is maintained is provided. In the operation pattern of the special winning openings 64 and 65 in the present embodiment, it is determined that the second special winning opening 65 (specific area 658) is opened and closed only in a specific round of special games (also referred to as “specific round”). ing. In the present embodiment, the specific round is defined as the seventh round and the eighth round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific round may be changed to a different number of rounds, or a plurality of specific rounds of three or more may be set.

  FIG. 54A shows a 16R long open pattern which is an operation pattern by 16R long open big hit. In the 16R long opening pattern, the first big prize opening 64 is continuously opened for 29 seconds in rounds other than the specific round, while the second big prize opening 65 is used in the seventh and eighth rounds which are specific rounds. Is continuously opened for 29 seconds.

  FIG. 54B shows an 8R long opening pattern which is an operation pattern by 8R long opening big hit. In the 8R long opening pattern, the first big prize opening 64 is continuously opened for 29 seconds in rounds other than the specific round, while the second big prize opening 65 is used in the seventh and eighth rounds, which are specific rounds. Is continuously opened for 29 seconds.

  Thus, when 16R long open big hit or 8R long open big hit is selected, the opening period of the second big prize opening 65 is set to a long time of 29 seconds in the specific round. Since the opening period and the opening period of the specific area 658 overlap with each other in time, a game ball that has entered from the second major winning opening 65 easily wins the specific area 658. As a result, a state in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area 658 is maintained.

  FIG. 54 (C) shows an 8R short opening pattern which is an operation pattern by 8R short opening big hit. In the 8R short opening pattern, the first grand prize opening 64 is continuously opened for 29 seconds in rounds other than the specific round, while the second big prize opening 65 is provided in the seventh and eighth rounds, which are specific rounds. Is opened for 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, when the 8R short open big hit is selected, the second big prize opening 65 is opened only for an extremely short time of 0.2 seconds in a specific round, so that the game ball is in the second big prize opening 65. The possibility of entering the specific area 658 is extremely low. As a result, a state in which it is difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 658, or a state in which it is substantially impossible to pass, is maintained.

  When a game ball enters the specific area 658 in a specific round, after the special game ends, the state shifts to a special symbol probability change state (high probability state). In addition, when the transition to the special symbol probability change state is made, the special symbol time reduction state and the electric chew support state are maintained as long as the special symbol probable state continues and the special symbol probable state continues. continue. In addition, after the end of the special game, if the next big hit does not occur within the number of times of change of the special symbol within the ST number (100 times), the probability change state of the special symbol is ended and the state is shifted to the normal state.

  On the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 658 in the specific round, the special symbol is in a short time state (low probability state) after the special game ends. When the special symbol shifts to the short-time state, the electronic-chu support state continues as long as the special symbol time-shift state continues. In addition, after the end of the special game, when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (70 times), the short time state of the special symbol is terminated and the normal state is entered.

  Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the on-hold consecutive villa effect B as the big hit effect is executable at a timing after the specific round in the special game. This is not the timing after a specific round has passed (at least after a game ball has entered a specific area), the game state after the end of the special game will shift to a high probability state or to a low probability state This is because it is difficult to notify the occurrence of the reserved resort in this uncertain state. In other words, depending on the game state after the end of the special game, the lottery result of whether or not the subsequent operation holding ball existing during the special game will be a big hit depends on, so whether or not to execute the in-hold extended zone effect B By making the lottery after the specific round, it is possible to make a notification of the reservation of the reserved resort. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the game ball has entered the specific area in the specific round, that is, it is assumed that the transition to the probable change state of the special symbol is completed after the special game is finished. The execution of B is determined. Accordingly, in the on-hold consecutive game production B in this example, there is a specific hold that becomes a big hit in the subsequent operation hold ball, and the game state after the special game is a special symbol probability change state (high probability state). This is significant as an effect of definite notification. That is, in the seventh round, the eighth round, or a round after that, and if there is no entry into the specific area 658, the on-hold consecutive resort production B does not occur. In other words, the seventh round or the eighth round When the on-hold consecutive resort effect B occurs in the round, it can be said that it is the same timing as the timing of entering the game ball into the specific area 658 or the timing after that.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, at the timing after the specific round (the timing after entering the specific area), referring to the preliminary determination result (preliminary determination number) from the main control board 100, When a preemptive determination of whether or not the game is in progress after the special game has ended (becomes a state of certain change by entering a specific area) is executed for the subsequent operation hold ball, and there is a specific hold that is a big hit It is configured so that only the in-hold Renso production B can be executed by lottery. Now, specific processing will be described below.

(Big hit effect content determination processing: second embodiment)
Subsequently, the jackpot effect content determination process (S638) according to the subroutine of S638 in FIG. 27 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit effect content determination process (S638).

  Here, in the above-described first embodiment, the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (see S805 in FIG. 31) is executed in response to the reception of the start demo command, but this second embodiment. Then, the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process is executed in response to the reception of the specific area entry command. This is because, as described above, it is matched with whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect B can be executed as the timing after the game ball enters the specific area 658. In FIG. 55, the processes of S801 to S818 and S821 to S838 are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S841 to S843 which are different points will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not a specific area entry command is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 (S841). If the specific area entry command is stored (S841: YES), the specific area entry flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S842). The on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process is executed (S843). Details of the on-hold consecutive villa production B determination process (S842) will be described later with reference to FIG. Subsequently, a big hit effect replacement process is executed (S844). In this jackpot effect replacement process, when the on-hold consecutive resort effect B (special continuous effect) is executed, the normal end demo effect pattern is replaced with the special end demo effect pattern. In the preceding big hit effect replacement process (S806), when the special continuous effect is executed, the normal start demonstration effect pattern is replaced with the special start demonstration effect pattern. On the other hand, when the specific area entry command is not stored (S841: NO), S842 and S843 are skipped and the process proceeds to S821.

  Although not shown in the figure, when a specific area entry command is received during a special game, the game ball has entered the specific area 658, that is, after the special game is over, the state shifts to a special symbol probability changing state. The effect pattern of the notification effect (referred to as “specific area entry notification effect”) for notifying this is determined, and the number of the effect pattern of the specific area entry notification effect is determined in the specific area of the sub main information storage means 260. Temporarily store in the entry effect pattern storage area.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination processing: second embodiment)
Next, the on-hold consecutive villa effect B determination process (S843) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S843) in the second embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S850 and S869, and the processing after S850 is executed when the specific area entry command is received. In FIG. 56, the processes in S851 to S868 and S870 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes in S860 and S869 which are different points will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the specific area entry flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is on (S850). When the specific area entry flag is ON (S850: YES), the on-hold consecutive resort effect B lottery process (S856), the consecutive resort effect pattern selection process (S861), and the like are executed in the processing after S851. . In this example, since the pending renso effect B determination process is performed on the premise that the game ball enters the specific area in the specific round, in this consecutive villa effect pattern selection process, the round effects after the specific round ( Only a consecutive-village effect pattern that occurs in the end demo effect) (including a specific round) can be selected. Then, in the latter half of this process, the specific area entry flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned off (S869).

  In addition, in the specific round (seventh to eighth rounds) in the special game being executed this time, when there are a plurality of balls entering the specific area 658, the main processing based on the earliest ball entry (S850) ~ S870), the on-hold consecutive resort production flag is turned on. Therefore, even if this processing based on the subsequent entry is executed, a negative determination (NO) is made in S731, and the on-hold consecutive resort production is performed again. The lottery process of B is avoided.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, by entering the specific area 658, it is possible to acquire the right to transition to the probable state of the special symbol, and the expectation for the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort production is enhanced. It was possible to further enhance the effect of the reaming stage directing, and the execution of the on-reserved reaming stage rendition in the situation where the game state after the end of the special game is undefined is reflected as a result of the prefetch determination. By preventing the display mode and the actual result of the on-hold renso production from being flawed, the reliability of the on-hold renso production as the pre-reading notice can be improved. It becomes possible to improve interest.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the opening pattern in which the opening period of the second grand prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 is completely overlapped is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second grand prize winning is performed. The mouth 65 and the opening period of the specific area 658 may be partially overlapped without completely overlapping. Further, in consideration of the delay time until the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 65 reaches the specific area 658, the opening period of the specific area 658 is delayed with respect to the opening period of the second big prize opening 65. May be.

[Second Embodiment-First Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  In the second embodiment described above, the on-hold-ream villa effect B determination process is executed at the timing when the game ball enters the specific area 658 in the specific round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which performs pending | holding consecutive resort production B determination processing before a game ball enters into the specific area | region 658. FIG.

  First, in describing the above configuration, a prior determination number that is a result of the determination in advance on the main control board 100 side will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram schematically showing the success / failure pre-determination table, where (A) is a table referred to in the pre-rejection determination of the first special symbol lottery, and (B) is referred to in the pre-failure determination of the second special symbol lottery. It is a table to be. FIG. 57 shows the contents corresponding to the special symbol success / failure lottery table (FIG. 5) referred to in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 57A, in the first special symbol lottery determination, whether or not the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163”, the preliminary determination number “1” and the random number value “164 to 1639”. ”Corresponds to the prior determination number“ 2 ”, when the random value corresponds to the range“ 1640 to 65207 ”, the prior determination number“ 3 ”, and the random value corresponds to the range“ 65208 to 65535 ” In this case, the prior determination number “4” is set as the prior determination result. This prior determination number is included in the content of the success / failure determination command together with information indicating the result of the first special symbol determination and information indicating the order of the operation holding balls, and transmitted to the effect control board 200 side. (See S213 in FIG. 13).

  As shown in FIG. 57 (B), in the second special symbol lottery determination, whether or not the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163”, the preliminary determination number “1” and the random number value “164 to 1639”. ”Is set as the prior determination result, and when the random number value falls within the range of“ 1640 to 65535 ”, the prior determination number“ 3 ”is set as the prior determination result. This prior determination number is included in the content of the success / failure prior determination command together with information indicating the result of prior determination of the second special symbol and information indicating the order of the operation holding balls, and transmitted to the effect control board 200 side. (See S213 in FIG. 13).

  As can be seen from a comparison of the special symbol win / fail lottery table in FIG. 5 and the success / failure pre-judgment table in FIG. 57, the pre-decision number “1” does not depend on the game state (normal state / probability change state), Is a determination result derived to be “ On the other hand, the prior determination number “2” is a determination result derived to be “big hit” in the probability variation state (high probability state), but “out” in the normal state (low probability state). is there. In this example as well, as in the first embodiment described above, the target of the pre-reading determination related to the on-hold range resort production is only the operation reservation ball (pre-determination result) of the second special symbol, but the first special You may include the design operation hold ball (preliminary determination information).

  In the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process and the on-hold continuous villa production B determination process, a pre-reading determination as to whether or not the subsequent operation holding ball (the operation holding ball of the second special symbol) includes a special holding that is a big hit. Is determined based on the prior determination number. At this time, the determination as to whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect B can be executed is performed before the specific round, that is, before the game ball enters the specific area (for example, before the start of the special game, at the start demonstration effect, the specific round Consider the case of playing in a previous round game).

  First, when executing the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process before a specific round, if there is an operation holding ball with a prior determination number of “1” in the subsequent operation holding ball, regarding this operation holding ball, Even if the game state is changed to a probable state (high probability state) or a normal state (low probability state) after the end of the special game, the determination result is a big hit, so that the game ball enters the specific area 658 Regardless of whether or not there is, there is a pending renso at this point. Therefore, in this case, the on-hold extended resort production B can be generated as a notification of the on-hold extended resort.

  On the other hand, in the case where there is an operation holding ball with a pre-determined number “2”, whether or not the determination result is a big hit for this operation holding ball depends on the gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, considering that the gaming state changes depending on whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area 658, the on-hold range resort is not fixed at this time. Therefore, in this case, the on-hold consecutive resort production B cannot be generated as a notification of the on-hold consecutive resort, and only the possibility of the on-hold consecutive resort is suggested.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not there is a game ball entering the specific area 658 (regardless of which game state is entered), the correctness determination result at the time when the operation holding ball is actually digested is accurately determined. If it can be specified (in the case of the prior determination number “1”), it is possible to notify the confirmation of the in-hold extended villa, and conversely, the correctness determination result at the time when the operation holding ball is actually digested is accurately specified. If this is not possible (in the case of the prior determination number “2”), it is only necessary to suggest the possibility of a reserved resort. For this reason, in this example, it is preferable to prepare the confirmation notification effect and the suggestion effect of the on-hold consecutive resort in different effect modes.

  As described above, according to the first modified example of the second embodiment, when the prefetch determination is performed in a situation where the gaming state after the end of the special game cannot be accurately specified, the big win is uniquely derived regardless of the gaming state. If it is to be performed, while the in-hold extended villa production B is generated in a manner in which the in-hold extended villa is confirmed and notified, the determination result of the on-hold extended villa varies depending on the gaming state. Even if it is the timing before the game ball enters the specific area by generating the on-hold consecutive resort production B in a manner that suggests the possibility, It is possible to prevent a notice effect that disappoints the player's expectation, such as the occurrence of a habit, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the same way, as a pre-reading notice other than the rendezvous in the rendezvous effect, for example, also in the pre-reading notice such as a change in hold, a pre-reading determination as to whether or not there is a specific holding that becomes a big hit in the working holding ball is this prior determination. This is done based on the number. At this time, when the pre-reading determination is executed for the subsequent operation holding ball under the situation where the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit, the pre-determination number is given as a pre-determination result of the operation holding ball to be read ahead. If it is “1”, an effect mode (for example, “rainbow-colored on-hold image representing the big hit decision) that informs the big hit decision may appear as the hold change pre-reading notice effect based on the operation hold ball. In other words, with regard to this operation holding ball, even if the gaming state after the end of the special game is either a probability change state (high probability state) or a normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, It is scheduled to be a big hit when it is digested, so regardless of whether or not game balls have entered the specific area 658, the in-hold-ream villa is determined at this point, and the result of the prefetch determination is reflected There is no possibility of a discrepancy between the display mode of the held image and the actual result (for example, if the prior determination number is “2”, the game ball does not enter the specific area 658 and the special game ends) In the normal state, even if a reserved image representing the big hit decision appears, a situation that does not result in a big hit occurs.

  In this modification, only the success / failure determination table is illustrated as the prior determination table. However, for the symbol prior determination table and the variation pattern prior determination table, a prior determination number is assigned to the random number range of each determination value. It can be expressed with.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the third embodiment has basically the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the probability variation rush rate is 100%, and the number of time-changing probability modification machines, so-called “ST machines”, have been described as examples. In the third embodiment, a big hit with a specific symbol is used. In this case, the special symbol probability variation function continues from the end of the special game until the next big hit occurs, so-called a normal probability variation type gaming machine.

  Here, FIG. 58 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol success / failure lottery table in the third embodiment, in which (A) is referred to in a normal state (low probability state), and (B) is a probability variation state (high probability). Status). As can be seen from FIG. 58, in the special symbol game winning / losing lottery, in the normal state (low probability state), only when the random number value falls within the range of 0 to 163, the big hit is made. On the other hand, in the probability variation state (high probability state), the range of jackpot is expanded, and not only when the random number value falls within the range of 0 to 163 but also when it falls within the range of 164 to 1639. In other words, when the probability changing function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot lottery probability changes from the low probability state (1 / 399.6) to the high probability state (1 / 39.96). As described above, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state, but the winning probability of winning the jackpot is equal between the winning lottery of the first special symbol and the winning lottery of the second special symbol. Here, even if the random number value per special symbol does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it is a small hit. In this example, the winning lottery of the first special symbol is a small hit with a higher probability than the winning lottery of the second special symbol.

  Then, the upper part of FIG. 59 is a figure which shows typically the symbol table per 1st special symbol in 3rd Embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the random symbol value per special symbol is the stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the special symbol are activated, the first grand prize) The operation patterns of the mouth 64) are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups A to C according to the type of jackpot.

  Specifically, symbols “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” have symbol group A (16R specified short-time symbol), symbols “5”, “6” have symbol group B. The symbol group C (2R normal time short symbol) is associated with (2R specific short symbol symbol), and symbols “7” and “8”, respectively.

  Subsequently, the lower part of FIG. 59 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the third embodiment. In the symbol table per second special symbol, the random symbol value per symbol special symbol, stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the special symbol is activated, the second grand prize The operation patterns of the mouths 65) are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols “11” to “18” of the second special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups D to F according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, symbols “11”, “12”, “13”, “14” include symbol group D (16R specific short-time symbol), symbols “15”, “16” include symbol group E. The symbol group F (2R normal time symbol) is associated with (2R specific short symbol) and symbols “17” and “18”, respectively.

  Symbol groups A, B, D, and E are specific symbols indicating so-called “probability change jackpots” that shift the gaming state after the end of the special game to a special symbol probability change state (high probability state), and are special until the next jackpot. A symbol change function, a time reduction function, and an electric chew support function are provided. When the symbol groups A and D (16R probability variation big hit) are selected, the specified number of rounds of the special game is 16, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. When the symbol groups B and E (2R probability variation big hit) are selected, the specified number of rounds for the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds. . Symbol groups C, F are normal symbols indicating so-called “normal hits” in which the gaming state after the end of the special game is shifted to the normal state (low probability state), and limited to 100 times after the end of the special game. Special time-saving function and electric support function are added. When symbol groups C and F (2R normal jackpot) are selected, the number of rounds specified for special games is two rounds, as is the case with symbol groups B and E (2R probability variable jackpot). The maximum opening time of the mouths 64 and 65 is about 0.05 seconds.

  Next, FIG. 60A is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for winning. The upper (A1) is a normal variation pattern table, and the lower (A2) is a probability variation pattern table. In this example, the selected variation pattern is set to be different according to the variation pattern selection state or according to the jackpot type even in the same variation pattern selection state.

  In the normal variation pattern table of (A1), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, when either the fluctuation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected and 2R big hit, Any one of the fluctuation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A), the fluctuation pattern PZ3 (super reach A), and the fluctuation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. On the other hand, if it is a small hit, the fluctuation pattern PK4 (super reach D) is selected.

  In the probability variation pattern table of (A2), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PX7 (super reach B) is selected, and when the big hit type is 2R big hit, the fluctuation pattern PZ7 (super reach B) One of the patterns PZ8 (super reach D) is selected. On the other hand, when it is a small hit, only the variation pattern PK8 (super reach D) is selected.

  FIG. 60B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variation pattern table for loss. The upper (B1) is a normal variation pattern table, and the lower (B2) is a probability variation pattern table. In this example, the selected variation pattern is set differently depending on the variation pattern selection state.

  In the normal variation pattern table of (B1), any one of the variation pattern PH1 (non-reach A), the variation pattern PH2 (normal reach A), the variation pattern PH3 (super reach A), and the variation pattern PH4 (super reach D) is selected. The In the probability variation pattern table of (B2), any one of the variation pattern PH5 (non-reach B), the variation pattern PH6 (normal reach B), and the variation pattern PH8 (super reach D) is selected.

  Here, in this probability variation pattern table for loss, only a variation pattern that is a variation mode of non-reach B, normal reach B, and super reach D can be selected (in other words, variation of super reach B). The variation pattern is not selected, and is different from the above-described probability variation pattern table for winning. For this reason, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the variation pattern selected depending on whether or not the variation pattern becomes super reach B is clearly distinguished from the case of the big hit and out of the super hit B ( In this example, when a variation mode that develops into battle reach) appears, the big win is decisive.

  In the present embodiment, so-called battle specs are employed, and a battle reach effect is generated when the symbol variation effect is developed to Super Reach B while staying in the probability variation effect mode Mβ as the effect mode. As described above, this battle reach production (super reach B) is selected only when the result of the determination is a big hit, so when the battle reach production occurs during the symbol variation production. The jackpot is definitive. This battle reach production is a reach production in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other to determine the victory or defeat. When the teammate character finally wins the enemy character, the 16R jackpot is reached, and the teammate character is ultimately defeated by the enemy character. Then 2R big hit is decided.

  Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production in the third embodiment will be described. In the above-described first embodiment, the on-holding ball to be prefetched in the on-hold consecutive resort productions A and B was specific reserved (16R big hit, 8R big hit) or off hold, but the reserved ball in the third embodiment The operation holding ball to be prefetched for the effects A and B is specific holding (16R big hit) or small hit holding (not including off hold). As a reason for including a small hit, in general, when the result of the determination is wrong, there are many kinds of variation patterns. There are fewer types of variation patterns to be selected in the case of small hits than in designing whether to perform a Gase production (reserved in-rendition production), and due to the nature of the lottery result of small hits This is because it is suitable for use as a gaze effect, so that it requires only a small number of discriminators for executing the prefetch determination and can be simplified.

  FIG. 61 (A) is a consecutive resort production pattern table that is referred to when selecting a consecutive resort production pattern of the retained resort series A in the third embodiment, and FIG. 61 (B) is an on-reservation sequence in the third embodiment. It is a consecutive resort production pattern table referred when selecting the consecutive resort production pattern of the residence production B. Since these extended game effect pattern tables are basically the same as the extended game effect patterns in the first embodiment (see FIG. 8), detailed description is omitted, but as described above, The difference is that a small hit hold is included as an operation hold ball to be pre-read in Zhuang productions A and B. Now, specific processing will be described below.

(Reserved Renrenso production B determination processing: third embodiment)
Next, the on-hold consecutive villa effect B determination process (S843) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S843) in the third embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S871 to S874, in that the small hit hold is included in the operation hold ball to be pre-read for the in-hold extended resort effect B. In FIG. 62, the processes in S851 to S854 and S858 to S870 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes in S871 to S874 which are different points will be mainly described.

  First, when there is a specific hold in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (S854: YES), it is determined whether or not this specific hold indicates a 16R big hit (high profit big hit) (S871). . If the specific hold corresponds to a 16R big hit (S871: YES), the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 1 for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort production B is performed by lottery ( S872). In the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 1, the consecutive resort production lottery random number value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production B lottery table 1. If so, determine whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 70% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 30%.

  On the other hand, when there is no specific reservation in the action holding ball of the second special symbol (S854: NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit hold is included in the action holding ball of the second special symbol (S873). . When the small hit hold is included (S873: YES), the on-hold consecutive villa production B lottery process 2 for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production B is executed by lottery (S874). . In the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 2, the random resort production lottery random number value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production B lottery table 2. If so, determine whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 0.1% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 99.9%.

  When winning in the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process (S872, S874), in the following, while selecting the consecutive resort production pattern for determining the content of the on-hold consecutive resort production A (S861), this After temporarily storing it in the extended game effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S868), the on-hold extended game effect flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S870), and this process ends.

  By the way, as a point to be noted in this embodiment, during the execution of the special game, the on-hold extended resort effect B does not occur. If a high expectation effect (Super Reach B) occurs due to digestion of the action-holding ball that exists at the time, the high profit big hit is more than the probability of a low profit big hit (2R probability variable big hit, 2R normal big hit) The probability of (16R probability variation big hit) is set higher.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (B), the jackpot type allocation in the second special symbol game includes a 70% probability of 16R probability variation big hit, a 20% probability of 2R probability variation big hit, and a 10% probability of 2R normal big hit. It has become. In this example, the 16R probability variation big hit is also referred to as “16R big hit”, the 2R probability variation big hit and the 2R normal big hit are collectively referred to as “2R big hit”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60, in the special symbol probability variation state, if the result of the determination is a big hit, if it is a 16R big hit, the change of the super reach B (high expectation effect) with a probability of 100%. When the pattern PX7 is selected and the 2R big hit (2R specific big hit, 2R normal big hit) is selected, the fluctuation pattern PZ7 of the super reach B (high expectation degree effect) is selected with a probability of 60%.

  At this time, as explained in S872 in FIG. 62, in this example, when there is a specific hold (16R big hit) in the subsequent operation hold ball, the winning probability of whether or not the hold-in-place villa effect B is executable is 70%. Therefore, even if there is a specific hold (16R big hit), the on-hold consecutive villa production B is not executed with a probability of 30%.

  Under the conditions as described above, the probability X of 16R big hit by the appearance of Battle Reach (Super Reach B) and the appearance of Battle Reach (Super Reach B) in the situation where the Reservation in the Reservation in Reservation B is not executed. Thus, the probability Y of 2R big hit is as follows.

X = (Probability of winning 16R jackpot) × (Probability of not producing on-hold Renso production B) × (Probability of becoming Super Reach B)
Y = (Probability of winning 2R jackpot) × (Probability of becoming Super Reach B)

  Subsequently, using the above numerical values, the probability X of 16R jackpot due to the appearance of super reach B and the probability Y of 2R jackpot due to the appearance of super reach B are specifically calculated as follows.

X = 70/100 × (100−70) / 100 × 100/100 = 21/100
Y = (20 + 10) / 100 × 60/100 = 18/100

  Therefore, when the high expectation level effect is generated in the subsequent operation holding ball without the on-hold consecutive villa effect B being generated (when it develops to Super Reach B), it is more than the possibility of a low profit jackpot. The possibility of becoming a big hit other than the low profit big hit (that is, high profit big hit = 16R big hit) is higher.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, even when the on-hold consecutive resort production B does not occur during the special game, the player has a high profit for the high expectation degree after the special game. It is possible to enhance the player's expectation by generating a high expectation effect without impairing the expectation for the big hit, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  In the above-described first embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the ST machine (probability change machine) with a probability change entry rate of 100% that shifts uniformly to a high probability state (special change state of the special symbol) after the special game ends. Adopted, but not limited to this, including a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state (special symbol time-short state or normal state) after the end of the special game as a part of the jackpot type, a predetermined ratio (for example, probability change) An ST machine that shifts to a probable change state of a special symbol at an rush rate of 80%) may be employed.

  In such a model, when a special big game is hit in the probability change state (high probability state) of the special game, when the special game is over, the normal state or the special symbol time shift state (low probability state), After reaching the ST period in a special game probability change state (high probability state), the game state may change, for example, when shifting to a normal state or a special symbol time-short state (low probability state).

  In this example, when the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 200 side based on the information of the predetermination result from the main control board 100, the operation holding ball (referred to as “target hold”) that is the target of the prefetch determination is digested. If the gaming state is scheduled to change before being played (high probability state → low probability state, etc.), the information of the prior determination result related to the operation pending ball is ignored. That is, it was determined as “big hit” in the pre-reading determination of the target hold, but as a result of digestion of the operation hold ball (prior hold) stored prior to the target hold becomes a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), If the game state reaches the normal state after the special game ends, or if the ST period ends after the prefetch determination and before the trigger hold is consumed, this trigger hold is actually consumed. Occasionally, a situation where it is determined to be out of place may occur. Therefore, in order to prevent such a situation, when the gaming state is scheduled to change, the information of the pre-determination result is not set as the target of the prefetch determination. Note that “ignore” includes the meaning of “received information is received but not used” and the meaning of “received information is not received”.

  As an example of applying this configuration to the pre-reading determination related to the on-hold consecutive ren production, when the preceding operation holding ball becomes a big hit as a result of digestion, the current gaming state (the preceding game in the subsequent operation holding ball) Even if there is something that is determined to be a specific hold in the game state at the time when the operation holding ball is digested), if the game state is scheduled to change before the specific hold is digested, this specification It is configured so as to ignore the information on the prior determination result related to the hold. Here, “the game state is scheduled to change” means that the game state may change before and after the execution of the special game (the special game when the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit). For example, as a result of the digestion of the preceding operation holding ball in the special symbol probable state, the game state is usually a big hit, and after the special game is finished and before the subsequent operation holding ball is digested, This is the case when switching to the normal state is planned. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the special symbol is changed from the probable change state to the special symbol time-short state, the case where the special symbol is changed from the short-time state to the normal state, and the like may also be included. Now, specific processing will be described below.

(On-hold consecutive villa production A determination processing: fourth embodiment)
Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect A determination process (S737) in the fourth embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S771, and when the gaming state is scheduled to change, the advance determination information is present regardless of whether or not the advance determination information related to the specific hold exists. The decision information is ignored. In FIG. 63, the processes in S761 to S770 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the process in S771 which is a difference will be mainly described.

  First, when the pre-determined information of the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S763: YES), before the operation reservation ball is digested It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is scheduled to change (S771). Whether or not the game state is scheduled to change may be managed individually on the side of the effect control board 200 based on the information of the effect control command from the main control board 100, or a prior determination command. It may be determined based on the information of the prior determination command by adding information (detailed description below) relating to the gaming state to. If the gaming state is not scheduled to change (S771: NO), then, if there is a specific hold (16R big hit) (S764, 765), whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort effect A will be selected by lottery. (S 766), and selects a casserole effect pattern for determining the contents of the on-hold villa effect A (S 768), and temporarily stores it in the villa effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. After storing (S769), the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S770), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the gaming state is scheduled to change (S771: YES), the process ends by ignoring the pre-determined information related to the operation hold ball regardless of whether or not the specific hold exists. . In this example, the game state is scheduled to change. (1) When a specific game state (probability change state) is a normal big hit, (2) Probability change big hit and specific hold (probability change) It is assumed that there is a specific hold that is a big hit, but there is a specific hold that is usually a big hit before the specific hold. However, in the pre-reading notice effect such as a mere change in hold, not only in the on-hold consecutive resort effect, a change in the gaming state may be scheduled, for example, when the ST period ends with the passage of a predetermined number of fluctuations.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination processing: fourth embodiment)
Next, the on-hold consecutive villa effect B determination process (S843) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S843) in the fourth embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S875, and when the game state is scheduled to change, regardless of whether or not the prior determination information related to the specific hold exists, The point is that the pre-determination information is ignored. In FIG. 64, the processes in S851 to S870 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the process in S875, which is a difference, will be mainly described.

  First, when the pre-determined information of the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S853: YES), before the operation reservation ball is digested It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is scheduled to change (S875). If the gaming state is not scheduled to change (S875: NO), it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort production B (S856 and S857). Is selected (S861), and is temporarily stored in the extended zone effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S868), and then the sub-main information storage unit 260 is selected. Is turned on (S870), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the game state is scheduled to change (S875: YES), the process ends by ignoring the prior determination information related to the operation hold ball regardless of whether or not the specific hold exists. .

  As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to prevent a notification effect that disappoints the player's expectation, such as a discrepancy between the result notified in advance by the on-hold consecutive resort effect and the actual lottery result. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, if the structure of the above-mentioned 4th Embodiment is a game machine which can mutually transfer several types of game states, such as a normal state (low probability state) and the probability variation state (high probability state) of a special symbol, for example, The present invention is not limited to the ST machine, and may be applied to a gaming machine according to the second embodiment (ball accuracy type) or the third embodiment (normal probability variation type).

[Fourth Embodiment-First Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration below. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the gaming state is scheduled to change, the information on the prior determination result from the main control board 100 is ignored regardless of whether there is a specific hold. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by adding information related to the gaming state to the prior determination command, even if the gaming state is scheduled to change, the effect control is performed based on the prior determination information to which the gaming state information is added. It is good also as a structure which performs pre-reading determination by the board | substrate 200 side, and performs pending | holding consecutive resort production A and B determination processing. Here, the “preliminary determination information to which information on the gaming state is added” is correct under the gaming state at the time when the action holding ball that is the target of the prefetch determination is actually digested on the production control board 200 side. The aspect is not particularly limited as long as it is information capable of specifying the prior determination result. For example, (1) Pre-determining result in the current gaming state, (2) Pre-determining result in the next gaming state, (3) Remaining continuation number (variation number) of the current gaming state, (4) The remaining number of times until the next game state is changed (number of fluctuations), (5) that the game state is scheduled to change within a predetermined number of fluctuations, (6) the hold information in the prior judgment command is actually digested Information obtained by deriving up to the gaming state at a certain scheduled time and information such as information on the scheduled gaming state, or a combination of two or more of them as appropriate is employed. Further, as described in the above-described determination table of whether or not to win, the lottery result is determined according to the gaming state (normal state / probability change state, more specifically normal state / probability change state / short time state). May be information relating to a prior determination number such that the meaning of the random number value changes or does not change.

  As described above, according to the first modification example of the fourth embodiment, even if the gaming state is scheduled to change, the prior determination result is not ignored, and the change is based on the information related to the gaming state included in the prior determination result. By performing pre-reading determination under a later gaming state, it is possible to prevent a notification effect that disappoints the player's expectation, such as a discrepancy between the result notified in advance by the on-hold Rensou effect and the actual lottery result. In addition, it is possible to increase the execution opportunity of the on-hold consecutive villa production, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

[Fourth Embodiment-Second Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described. In the second modification, the following configuration can be added in any of the above-described fourth embodiment and the first modification.

  In this modified example, in the on-hold consecutive game effect A determination process, when the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit, when the plurality of specific holdings are included in the subsequent operation holding ball, the first first The specific hold is treated as an active hold ball (hereinafter referred to as “target hold”) that is subject to pre-reading determination in the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process. It is not treated as the subject hold of the villa production A determination process, but the subsequent specific determination prior determination information of the subsequent stop is ignored. Note that “ignore” includes the meaning of “received information is received but not used” and the meaning of “received information is not received”.

  Now, the operation of this modification will be described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that there are two specific reservations X1, X3 in the subsequent operation reservation balls X1, X2, X3 when the previous operation reservation ball X0 is digested. At this time, when the previous operation holding ball X0 is digested, if it is a big hit, whether or not the on-hold extended villa production A can be executed only in relation to the first specific holding X1 of the two specific holdings X1 and X3. judge. As described above, in the pre-reading determination related to the on-hold consecutive resort production A, the pre-reading determination is performed in order from the earliest one among the subsequent operation holding balls, and a plurality of specified in the subsequent operation holding balls The reason is that if there is a hold, the determination of whether or not the in-hold extended game effect can be performed is only in relation to the first specific hold. Therefore, of the two specific hold X1 and X3 existing in the subsequent operation hold ball, the subsequent specific hold X3 is not the target of the hold-in-village production A, and the prior determination information of the specific hold X3 is not used. ignore. As described above, in the present modification, the on-hold consecutive resort production A is executed based on the presence of the first specific hold when the preceding operation hold ball is digested and becomes a big hit, but there is a second specific hold. Based on this, the on-hold consecutive villa production A is not executed.

  As described above, according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment, when there are a plurality of specific holds in the subsequent operation hold balls, the in-hold extended resort effect is executed only in relation to the first specific hold. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent the target of the villas in the hold that was originally intended from fluctuating due to the presence of other specific holds (for example, specific holds that are normally expected to be big hits). In addition, satisfaction when the on-hold Renren production occurs can be enhanced, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

[Fourth Embodiment-Third Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described. In the third modification, the following configuration can be added in any of the above-described fourth embodiment and the first modification.

  In this modified example, in the on-hold consecutive resort effect A determination process, when the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit, the plurality of specific holdings are included in the subsequent operation holding ball. On-hold Renso production A in the relationship between the jackpot and the first specific hold, and on-hold consecutive resort production A in the relationship between the big hit relating to the first specific hold and the second specific hold can occur. When comparing both the prior specific information of the advance reservation and the advance determination information of the subsequent specific reservation based on the player's advantage, only the specific reservation on-hold resort with a relatively high advantage Is suggested or notified.

  Now, the operation of this modification will be described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that there are two specific reservations X1, X3 in the subsequent operation reservation balls X1, X2, X3 when the previous operation reservation ball X0 is digested. At this time, if the first specific hold X1 is “8R big hit” and the second specific hold X3 is “16R big hit”, the second specific hold X3 has a higher advantage than the first specific hold X1. Become. Therefore, when the preceding operation hold ball X0 is a big hit as a result of digestion, since the first specific hold X1 is a specific hold with relatively low advantage, the big hit and the first hit related to the previous operation hold ball X0 The on-hold consecutive villa production A in relation to the specific hold X1 does not occur. On the other hand, if the starting action holding ball X1 is digested and results in a big hit, the subsequent specific holding X3 is a specific holding having a relatively high advantage. The on-hold consecutive villa production A in relation to the hold X3 may occur.

  As described above, according to the third modified example of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the continuous generation of the high-rare reservation in the reaming stage production and perform only the notification of the high-reservation big hit in the true advantage. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the generation of the on-hold Renren production, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment has basically the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  As with the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment depends on whether or not the gaming ball wins a specific area (V area) in the big prize opening during execution of the special game. It is configured as a so-called ball accuracy type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state after the end of the game. Note that the probability variation state may be continued until a predetermined number of times (ST number) of symbol variations is performed, or may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  FIG. 66 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine PM according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66, in the fifth embodiment, only a single big winning opening 65 (a ball-like attacker having a specific area 658) is mounted in the game area PA. That is, in the second embodiment described above, the second big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened only in the specific round, and the first big prize opening not having the specific area 658 in rounds other than the specific round. 64 is configured to be opened, but in the fifth embodiment, the big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. Note that the configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the second embodiment described above, and a duplicate description thereof will be omitted here.

  Next, the operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, a jackpot type (a special symbol stop symbol) in the fifth embodiment will be described.

  The upper part of FIG. 67 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the fifth embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the symbol pattern value per special symbol is associated with the stop symbol, the symbol group, and the action pattern of the special winning opening 65. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “6” of the first special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups A, B, and C according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, symbols “1” and “2” have symbol group A (16R long and short open big hit symbol), symbols “3” and “4” have symbol group B (8R long and short open big hit symbol). Symbols “5” and “6” are associated with symbol group C (8R short open big hit symbol), respectively.

  The lower part of FIG. 67 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the second embodiment. In the symbol table per second special symbol, the symbol pattern value per special symbol is associated with the stop symbol, the symbol group, and the action pattern of the special winning opening 65, respectively. In this table, the stop symbols “11” to “16” of the second special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups D and E according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, symbols “11”, “12”, and “13” include symbol group D (16R long open big hit symbol), symbols “14”, “15”, and “16” include symbol group E. (8R long open big hit symbols) are associated with each other.

  In this example, a round game (““ Referred to as “specific round game”).

  As shown in FIG. 67 (A), there are three types of big hits according to the first special symbol: 16R long / short open big hit, 8R long / short open big hit and 8R short open big hit. "Long and short open big hit" means that the specific area 658 is opened for a long time in a specific round and the specific area 658 is relatively easy to enter the specific area 658, and the specific area 658 is opened for a short time. It is a big hit with the short open specific round game B that is difficult to enter the specific area 658. The “short open big hit” is a big hit with only the short open specific round game B in which the specific area 658 is opened for a short time and entering the specific area 658 is relatively difficult in the specific round.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), there are two types of jackpots according to the second special symbol: 16R long open big hit and 8R long open big hit. The “long open big hit” is a big hit with only the long open specific round game A in which the specific area 658 is opened for a long time in a specific round and it is relatively easy to enter the specific area 658.

  Subsequently, FIG. 68 is a time chart for explaining an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the fifth embodiment. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 68 conceptually shows the execution states of the long open specific round game A and the short open specific round game B. The long open specific round game A, the short open specific round game B, and the big prize The length and ratio of each time width of the interval period (standby period) in which the closed state of the mouth 65 is maintained does not correspond to the actual time width length and ratio. In the second embodiment described above, the special electric accessory 652 and the blade member 655 are synchronously controlled in a specific round so that the opening period of the special prize opening 65 and the opening period of the specific area 658 are equal. However, in the fifth embodiment, the opening period of the special winning opening 65 and the opening period of the specific area 658 are configured to deviate at least partially. Here, the opening time “29 seconds” of the special winning opening 65 is the maximum opening time value in this example. In this example, in any operation pattern, in a round other than the specific round, the special winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds and the specific area 658 is always closed. On the other hand, in the specific round, the long open specific round game A or the short open specific round game B is executed. In this example, a plurality of specific rounds (the first specific round and the second specific round) are provided. The first specific round is “first round” and the second specific round is “eighth round”. Is set. In this example as well, as described above, the timing of whether or not the execution is permitted is specified round in order to restrict the determination of whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect B can be executed in a situation where the gaming state after the end of the special game is uncertain. After that, if the specific round is set to the first round, and the game ball passes through the specific area 658 in the first round and the certainty shift is committed, it will be held within the long period after the second round The effect that it becomes easy to ensure the opportunity to generate the Urenrenso production B is obtained. In the following, the operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 will be described focusing on the opening / closing modes of the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 in a specific round. In this example, the opening / closing timing of the special prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 is completely independent (the specific area 658 may be closed before the special prize opening 65 is closed), but preferably The special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are synchronized (linked), and the specific area 658 is closed when the special winning opening 65 is closed (the specific area after the big winning opening 65 is closed). 658 is closed). In this case, if the special prize opening 65 is long open, the specific area 658 is also long open, and if the special prize opening 65 is short open, the specific area 658 is also short open (by opening the big prize opening 65). The specific area 658 is also opened, and the specific area 658 is also closed by closing the special winning opening 65). The opening time of the specific area 658 may be the same time for the long open specific round game A and the short open specific round game B.

  First, FIG. 68 (A) shows a 16R long open pattern. In the 16R long open pattern, the long open specific round game A is executed in the first specific round and the second specific round. Specifically, in the first round, the special winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and after 9 seconds have passed since the opening of the special winning opening 65, the specific area 658 is continuously opened for 20 seconds. . Further, in the eighth round, the special winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and after 1 second has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 65, the specific area 658 is continuously opened for 28 seconds.

  FIG. 68 (B) shows an 8R long open pattern. In the 8R long open pattern, the long open specific round game A is executed in the first specific round and the second specific round, similarly to the 16R long open pattern described above.

  FIG. 68 (C) shows a 16R long / short open pattern. In the 16R long / short open pattern, the short open specific round game B is executed in the first specific round, and the long open specific round game A is executed in the second specific round. Specifically, in the first round, the special winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and after 9 seconds have passed since the opening of the special winning opening 65, the specific area 658 is continuously displayed for 0.2 seconds. Open. Further, in the eighth round, the special prize opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and the specific area 658 is continuously opened for 28 seconds one second after the opening of the special prize opening 65.

  FIG. 68 (D) shows an 8R long / short open pattern. In the 8R long / short open pattern, the short open specific round game B is executed in the first specific round and the long open specific round game A is executed in the second specific round, as in the 16R long / short open pattern described above.

FIG. 68 (E) shows an 8R short open pattern. In the 8R short opening pattern, the short opening specific round game B is executed in the first specific round and the second specific round.
Specifically, in the first round, the special winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and after 9 seconds have passed since the opening of the special winning opening 65, the specific area 658 is continuously displayed for 0.2 seconds. Open. In the eighth round, the special winning opening 65 is continuously opened for 29 seconds, and after 1 second has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 65, the specific area 658 is continuously opened for 0.2 seconds. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E), when the first round is the short open specific round game B, the big prize opening 65 is long open and the specific area 658 is short open. However, originally, the short opening specific round game B is preferably a form in which both the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are short open. In other words, in the first round (short open specific round game B) of 16R long short open big hit, 8R long short open big hit and 8R short open big hit, an open / close pattern is adopted in which the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are short open. Also good. As a modification example 1, in the short opening specific round game B of the first round, the opening start timing of the big prize opening 65 is delayed by 8 seconds with respect to the long opening specific round game A of the first round. The specified area 658 is continuously opened for 0.2 seconds after 1 second from the start of opening of the big winning opening 65 (that is, specified when the big winning opening 65 is closed). Region 658 is also immediately closed). In this case, in the short opening round game B of the eighth round, the opening timing of the big winning opening 65 is made coincident with the long opening specific round game A of the eighth round, and the big winning opening 65 is set to 1 (2) Continuously open for 2 seconds, and open the specific area 658 continuously for 0.2 seconds 1 second after the opening of the special winning opening 65. Also, as a second modification example, in the first round short opening specific round game B, the opening start timing of the big prize opening 65 is made to coincide with the long opening specific round game A in the first round. The special prize opening 65 is continuously opened for 0.2 seconds, and the specific area 658 is continuously opened for 0.2 seconds 9 seconds after the opening of the special prize opening 65 is started. In this case, in the short opening round game B of the eighth round, the opening timing of the big winning opening 65 is made to coincide with the long opening specific round game A of the eighth round, and the big winning opening 65 is set to 0. (2) Continuously open for 2 seconds, and open the specific area 658 continuously for 0.2 seconds 1 second after the opening of the special winning opening 65. The opening pattern of the specific area 658 may be the same time in the long opening specific round games A and B.

  Then, the promotion effect in special game in 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. In this example, as a promotion effect executed during the special game, a first promotion effect (probability promotion effect) and a second promotion effect (round promotion effect) are provided. The promotion effect in this example refers to the profit mode related to the jackpot suggested or notified before the jackpot start or at the start of the jackpot (for convenience, “first suggestion”), during the jackpot, Such a profit mode is an effect that suggests or reports whether or not the profit level is higher than the profit mode suggested or reported by the first suggestion. That is, it is an effect that suggests whether the jackpot profit mode suggested or notified before the jackpot start is true or false (higher profit mode). In other words, it is an effect that suggests or notifies whether a big hit with a relatively high degree of benefit or a big hit with a relatively low degree of advantage. The promotion effect is executed as one aspect of the jackpot effect during the special game.

  FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the jackpot type and the promotion effect. First, if you win a big hit with the first special symbol, that is, if you win a big hit with "16R long / short open big hit", "8R long / short open big hit", or "8R short open big hit", V will be confirmed during that special game. An effect or a probable promotion effect can be executed. Here, the V finalized effect is an effect that definitely notifies that the long open specific round game A (V round) has been acquired at the start of the special game. In addition, the probability variation promotion effect is an effect that suggests the expected degree of probability variation acquisition in the second specific round in the round game before the second specific round in the special game, that is, the long open specific round game in the second specific round. This is an effect suggesting the possibility of A being executed. Note that the big win in the first special symbol is typically the so-called first hit, and the player pays special attention to whether or not the game state after the first hit becomes a probable change state. By suggesting the possibility that the round will be the long open specific round game A, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation during the special game. Note that the “first win” is a big hit that is generated by winning in the determination of whether or not a special symbol is won when the gaming state is a non-electric chew support state (a normal symbol winning probability is a low probability state). In addition, in this example, the reason for excluding the first specific round as the target of the probable promotion effect is that if a big hit occurs in the first special symbol, regardless of the type of the big hit, the first specific round in the special game This is because it is set to the short open specific round game B (round game in which the probability variation cannot be obtained substantially), and therefore it is not meaningful to provide the probability variation promotion effect before the first specific round. However, in this example, since the first specific round is set to the first round, there is no timing for providing the probable promotion effect before that. In addition, when a big hit is made with the first special symbol, the promotion effect (probability promotion effect) is not executed, and only when the big win is made with the second special symbol, the promotion effect (round promotion effect) may be executed. .

  On the other hand, if a big hit is made with the second special symbol, that is, if a big hit is made with “16R long open big hit” or “8R long open big hit”, a round finalizing effect or a round promotion effect is generated during the special game. Can do. Here, the round finalizing effect is an effect of definitely informing the number of rounds (16 rounds or 8 rounds) at the start of the special game. Specifically, in this example, a 16R finalized effect and an 8R finalized effect are prepared. Further, the round promotion effect is an effect suggesting the possibility that the round game after the specified number will be continued in the round game before the specified number in the special game (generally also referred to as “round-up effect”). . The big hit with the second special symbol is typically during a so-called consecutive resort, and it is almost guaranteed that the probabilistic state is continuously given at the consecutive resort. By paying attention to the number of game rounds (number of balls played), it is possible to maintain the player's expectation during the special game by suggesting the possibility of continuing the second half round.

  Here, the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the decorative symbol in this example is roughly divided into “1 · 1 · 1”, “3 · 3 · 3”, “5 · 5 · 5”, “7 · 7 · 7”.・ ”,“ 9 ・ 9 ・ 9 ”and the probability variation definite symbols indicating probability variation big hits,“ 2 ・ 2 ・ 2 ”,“ 4 ・ 4 ・ 4 ”,“ 6 ・ 6 ・ 6 ”,“ 8 ・ 8 ・ 8 ” ”And a non-deterministic symbol indicating a promising big hit. If the first special symbol is a big hit, which of the V finalized effect and the probable change promotion effect is executed in the special game depends on the stop symbol of the decorative symbol selected by the decorative symbol determining means 224 (the jackpot symbol) ) Is determined according to the type. Here, as shown in FIG. 69, when the big hit type is 16R long / short open big hit, that is, when the big hit symbol is an odd symbol of “3 · 3 · 3” or “7 · 7 · 7”, A confirmed effect is selected. Also, if the big hit type is 8R long / short open big hit, and if the big hit symbol is an odd symbol such as “1 · 1 · 1”, “5 · 5 · 5”, “9 · 9 · 9”, the V confirmed effect will be given. If the jackpot symbol is an even symbol such as “2, 2, 2,” “4, 4, 4”, “6, 6, 6”, or “8, 8, 8”, the probable promotion effect is selected. . On the other hand, when the big hit type is 8R short open big hit, that is, the big hit symbol is “2, 2, 2,” “4, 4, 4”, “6, 6, 6”, “8, 8, 8”, etc. If it is an even number design, the probable promotion effect is selected. On the other hand, when the second special symbol is a big hit, which of the round finalizing effect and the round promotion effect is executed in the special game depends on the stop symbol of the decorative symbol selected by the decorative symbol determining means 224 (big hit) It is determined according to the type of symbol. Here, as shown in FIG. 69, when the big hit type is 16R long open big hit, if the big hit symbol is an odd symbol of “3.3.3” or “7.7.7”, the round finalizing effect ( 16R confirmed effect) is selected, and a round promotion effect is selected for odd symbols such as “1 · 1 · 1”, “5 · 5 · 5”, and “9 · 9 · 9”. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is 8R long open jackpot, the jackpot symbol is an even number such as “2, 2, 2,” “4, 4, 4”, “6, 6, 6”, or “8, 8, 8” If it is a symbol, the round finalization effect (8R finalization effect) is selected, and if the jackpot symbol is an odd symbol such as “1, 1, 1”, “5, 5, 5” or “9, 9, 9”, the round is promoted A production is selected. It should be noted that the content of the effect (promotion effect, final effect) may be configured to be executed only when the game is in the first special symbol, in the non-electric Chu support state, and in the game of the second special symbol. If there is, it may be configured to be executed only when in the electric chew support state. Further, the probable promotion effect may be configured as (1) to (3) below. (1) If the first special symbol is a big hit in the non-electric chew support state, the probabilistic promotion effect is executed during the special game (during the big hit), while the second special is in the non-electric chew support state. If the game is a big hit, it may be configured to execute the probable promotion effect before the start of the special game (before the big hit) rather than during the special game (during the big hit). The combination of decorative symbols changes from “6, 6, 6” to “7, 7, 7”, suggesting that it has been promoted with certainty (that is, this symbol change is the V-decided effect). (2) If the first special symbol is a big hit in the electric chew support state, the probable change promotion effect is executed before the start of the special game (before the big hit) and the probable change promotion effect during the special game (during the big hit) Is not executed, and if the second special symbol is a big hit when in the electric chew support state, the probable promotion effect is executed before the start of the special game (before the big hit) (In this case, it is always easy to win a V prize) Because it ’s a big hit, you ’ll definitely be promoted.) (3) However, when the above (2) is applied, the player's sense of expectation during special games (during big hits) even if the first special symbol is a big hit in the electric chew support state Probability promotion effect may be executed during a special game (during a big hit) so as to sustain the game.

(First promotion effect)
Next, the probability variation promotion effect (first promotion effect) will be described. FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the content of the probable promotion effect. The probable promotion effect is that when the first special symbol is a big hit, the eighth round (second specific round) is the long open specific round game A and the second round to the seventh round in the special game. It is a production that suggests the possibility of becoming. Probability promotion effects in this example are a ballistic effect (also referred to as “first ballistic effect”) executed from the second round to the fourth round, and a V executed from the fifth round to the seventh round. Round production.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 (A) to 70 (C), the first entry effect is displayed in the second to fourth rounds. The first entry effect is an effect in which various objects are sequentially displayed on the screen in response to the game ball entering the grand prize opening 65, and the long open specific round is displayed according to the display mode of the specific object. The expected degree of transition to game A (that is, the expected probability of change) is suggested.

  First, as shown in FIG. 70A, when the second round is started, a meter image (meter image for the second round) is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. The meter image is displayed in a horizontally long band shape, and a scale is attached to the inside thereof. At the start of each round game (2nd to 4th rounds), the scale of the meter image is “0”, and every time a game ball enters the big prize opening 65, an object for one scale ( The object representing the color) is displayed, and the meter image is incremented by one graduation (the graduation is cleared to zero when moving to the next round). The meter image is set to all nine scales, and this corresponds to nine that is the maximum number of balls of the big winning opening 65 in each round game. That is, when there is a maximum number of balls (9) in the grand prize opening 65 in the round game, the scale of the meter image is obtained by accumulating objects of 9 scales (objects of 1 scale × 9). Becomes full. As a display mode of an object for one scale of the meter image, one of two types of colors of “white” and “giraffe pattern” can be taken. In the drawing, two types of display modes of white and giraffe pattern are expressed by “plain color” and “slashed line”, respectively. At this time, each time a giraffe pattern object of one scale appears, one star (an image imitating a star) is displayed (one star can be acquired). On the other hand, even if a white object of one scale appears, a star is not displayed (a star cannot be acquired). In this example, a maximum of three stars can be displayed, and the possibility of transition to the long open specific round game A is suggested according to the number of acquired stars. In the example shown in the figure, in the second round, seven game balls are entered into the grand prize opening 65, so that the meter image is increased to seven scales. However, the giraffe pattern object does not appear and stars are displayed. It shows the state that could not be acquired.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 70B, when the third round is started, a new meter image (meter image for the third round) is displayed on the screen. In the example shown in the figure, in the third round, a giraffe pattern object appears by the fifth ball entering the big winning opening 65, and one star can be obtained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70C, when the fourth round is started, a new meter image (meter image for the fourth round) is displayed on the screen. In the example shown in the figure, in the fourth round, a giraffe pattern object appears with the seventh ball entering the big winning opening 65, and another star can be acquired. At the end of the fourth round, the total number (2) of stars acquired in the first entrance effect is determined. In this example, the number of acquired giraffe pattern objects in one round game is one, but is not limited to this, so that a plurality of giraffe pattern objects can be acquired in one round game. It may be configured.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 70D to 70F, the V round acquisition effect is displayed in the fifth to seventh rounds. This V-round acquisition effect is closely related to the display mode (effect result) of the first entrance effect, and the effect content corresponding to the effect result (object display mode) of the entrance effect is derived. The expected degree of probability change (expectation of transition to the long open specific round game A) is suggested according to the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 70D, in the fifth round, the title image is notified with the start of the V-round acquisition effect. In this example, a title image “probability change promotion chance time” is displayed on the screen. In accordance with the attribute of this title (in this example, a plurality of display colors are prepared), the expected transition to the long open specific round game A is notified in advance. Although details will be described later, in this example, the display color of the title is set so that the expected transition to the long open specific round game A increases in the order of “blue” <“green” <“purple” <“red”. ing. The attribute (display color) of the title varies depending on the number of stars acquired in the ballistic effect. In the example shown in the figure, the title display color is “purple” corresponding to the number of stars acquired “2”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), in the sixth round, an enemy character is displayed on the screen, and a message “Damage the effect button 15 to defeat the enemy” is displayed to the player. On the other hand, the operation of the production button 15 is prompted. In response to this, when the player operates the effect button 15, the enemy character can be attacked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), when the enemy character is successfully defeated in the seventh round, the characters “V round acquisition success” are displayed on the screen. On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, when the enemy character fails to be destroyed, a character “V round acquisition failure” is displayed on the screen. However, in actuality, since the type of jackpot (that is, whether or not the long open specific round game A is executed) is determined in advance, the performance development according to the type is achieved.

  And although illustration is omitted, in the eighth round (second specific round), a specific round game (long open specific round game A or short open specific round game B) corresponding to the notification result by the V round acquisition effect is executed. It will be. At this time, in the eighth round, in the case of the long open specific round game A, for example, a predetermined effect in which a message such as “Aim for V” appears, but in the case of the short open specific round game B, the predetermined predetermined There is no production. However, even if it is the short open specific round game B, if the specific area 658 is won, it shifts to the probability change state after the end of the special game. The above-mentioned predetermined performance is configured not to be executed when the first round (first specific round) is a big hit that becomes a long open specific round game and the specific area 658 is won in the first round. May be.

  The content (effect pattern) of such a probability change promotion effect is selected with reference to the probability change promotion effect pattern table. FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a probability variation promotion effect pattern table. In the probability variation promotion effect pattern table, a plurality of types of probability variation promotion effect patterns are defined. In each figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in reality, a judgment value (range of random values) for determining a probable change promotion effect pattern in accordance with a random change promotion effect pattern random value Is set, and the probability variation promotion effect pattern is determined based on which determination value the probability variation promotion effect pattern random value belongs to.

  In the probability variation promotion effect pattern table, according to the probability variation promotion effect pattern, the contents of the ballistic effect (whether or not a giraffe pattern object appears, the number of stars acquired), the contents of the V round acquisition effect (title display color) and Is defined (see the column “Production contents” in the figure). In FIG. 71, whether or not a giraffe pattern object appears in each round is determined. “O” means that a giraffe pattern object appears, and “−” means that a giraffe pattern object does not appear. Yes. The number of stars acquired is determined according to the number of circles (that is, the number of appearances of giraffe pattern objects). Then, the display color of the title in the V-round acquisition effect is determined according to the number of stars acquired in this entry effect. Specifically, the title display color is “blue” for the star acquisition number “0”, the title display color is “green” for the star acquisition number “1”, and the star acquisition number “2”. The title display color “red” is specified for the title display color “purple” and the star acquisition number “3”. In addition, in the production example of FIG. 70 described above, a case where the probability variation promotion production pattern PS107 is selected is illustrated.

In this probability variation promotion effect pattern table, the selection rate of the probability variation promotion effect pattern is set to be different depending on the type of jackpot. Basically, each production pattern is assigned a selection rate according to the final number of stars acquired and the display color of the title. That is, when the big hit type is 16R long / short open big hit or 8R long / short open big hit (in the case of big hit with long open specific round game A), the number of stars acquired is “0” <“1” <“2” < The selection rate increases in the order of “3”, and the display rate of the title increases in the order of “blue” <“green” <“purple” <“red”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is 8R short open big hit (in the case of big hit without long open specific round game A), the total score is “3” <“2” <“1” <“0” in this order. The selection rate increases, and the display color of the title increases in the order of “red” <“purple” <“green” <“blue”. Therefore, in this example, the total score is “0 points” <“1 point” <“2 points” <“3 points”, and the title display color is “blue” <“green” <“purple”. <In the order of “red”, the expected degree of transition to the long open specific round game A increases.
In addition, it is good also as a specification which a long and short open big hit is decided by appearance of "red" as a display color of a title. In this case, for example, the selection rate of “red” in FIG. 71 is set as long / short open big hit: short open big hit = 20: 0.

(Second promotion effect)
Next, the round promotion effect (second promotion effect) will be described. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the effect content of the round-up promotion effect. When the round promotion effect is a big hit with the second special symbol, it indicates whether the ninth round or later (that is, the second half of the eighth round) is executed across the second to eighth rounds in the special game. Or it is an effect to notify. In other words, this round promotion effect, for example, appears as if it was an 8R jackpot when the decorative symbol is stopped, and suggests or informs that it is actually a 16R jackpot during the round (8R jackpot is shown to have been promoted to 16R jackpot) Is a kind of production). The round promotion effect in this example is a ballistic effect (also referred to as “second ballistic effect”) executed from the second round to the fourth round, and a second half round executed from the fifth round to the eighth round. It consists of a winning production.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 (A) to (C), the second entry effect is displayed in the second to fourth rounds. The second entry effect is an effect in which various objects are sequentially displayed on the screen according to the entry of the game ball into the grand prize opening 65, and in the latter half of the eight rounds according to the display mode of the specific object. Continuation expectation (that is, round-up expectation) is suggested. In the first ballistic effect, the degree of expectation of transition to the long open specific round game A is suggested according to the number of appearances of a specific object (giraffe pattern object) among a plurality of types of objects. In the ballistic effect, the round-up becomes definitive when a special object (gold object) among a plurality of types of objects appears. In the drawing, the gold display mode is expressed by “filling”. As a modification, the second entrance effect may be composed of the same effect pattern (effect content) as the first entrance effect, and in that case, depending on the number of acquired giraffe pattern objects. You may comprise so that the expectation degree of round promotion may differ.

  First, as shown in FIG. 72A, when the second round is started, a meter image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. Also in this example, the scale of the meter image is “0” at the start of each round game, and every time a game ball enters the big winning opening 65 in the round game, an object (white color) is added to the meter image. (Object or gold object) is displayed, and the meter image is incremented by one graduation (the graduation is cleared to zero when moving to the next round). In addition, below, the description is abbreviate | omitted about the part which is common with the above-mentioned 1st entrance effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 72A to 72B, in this example, it is assumed that no gold object appears and only a white object appears from the second round to the third round.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), in this example, in the fourth round, a golden object appears due to the seventh ball entering the big winning opening 65, and the round-up for the latter eight rounds is performed. Become deterministic. At this time, three stars can be acquired at a time (three stars are lit) by the appearance of the golden object.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 72D to 72F, the latter half round acquisition effects are displayed in the fifth to eighth rounds. This second half round acquisition effect is closely related to the display mode (display result) of the entrance effect, and is an effect in which an effect image corresponding to the display mode of the entrance effect (display mode of the object) is displayed. Depending on the image, the expected level of acquisition in the latter half 8 rounds is suggested. In this example, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), when a golden object can be acquired, three stars are continuously displayed in order to raise the satisfaction of round promotion in the fifth to seventh rounds. An effect image (golden effect) related to the gold object is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), in the eighth round, characters “successful acquisition of the second half round” are displayed on the screen as a round-up success effect.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), when a golden object cannot be acquired by the second round to the fourth round, the characters “round acquisition failure” are displayed on the screen as a round-up failure effect in the eighth round. Is displayed. That is, in the seventh round, the acquisition results of the latter half 8 rounds are confirmed and displayed. However, in actuality, the type of jackpot (that is, the presence or absence of the latter half of the 8th round) is determined in advance, so that the performance is developed according to the type.

  The content (effect pattern) of such a round promotion effect is selected with reference to the round promotion effect pattern table. FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a round promotion effect pattern table. In the round promotion effect pattern table, a plurality of types of round promotion effect patterns are defined. In each figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining a round promotion effect pattern according to a round promotion effect pattern random value is shown. The round promotion effect pattern is determined based on which judgment value the round promotion effect pattern random number value belongs to.

  In the round promotion effect pattern table, the appearance timing of a special object (golden object) in the entry effect and the display result in the second half round acquisition effect are specified according to the round promotion effect pattern (" Refer to the section “Production content”). In FIG. 73, the presence or absence of the appearance of a gold object from the second round to the fourth round is defined, “◯” represents the appearance of the gold object, and “−” represents the absence of the gold object. Therefore, if “○” is attached to any of the round columns in the figure, the round promotion production pattern is the content of the production that results in a successful round-up, and “○” is attached to any of the round columns. Otherwise, the round promotion effect pattern is the effect of the round-up failure. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 72 described above, the case where the effect pattern PS204 is selected is illustrated.

  In this round promotion effect pattern table, the selection rate of the round promotion effect pattern is set to be different depending on the type of jackpot. Basically, each performance pattern is assigned a selection rate according to the display mode (appearance / non-occurrence and appearance timing) of the golden object. That is, when the jackpot type is 16R long open jackpot (when the total number of rounds is 16 rounds), only the round promotion effect patterns PS202 to 204 in which the golden object appears and the roundup is successful are selected. The On the other hand, when the jackpot type is an 8R long open jackpot (when the total number of rounds is 8), only the round promotion effect pattern PS201 in which the golden object does not appear and the roundup fails is selected. . As described above, since the gold object is selected only when the result of the determination is 16R long open big hit (the 8R long open big hit is not a selection target), the appearance of the golden object is the final decision of 16R big hit, that is, the latter half 8 rounds. Will be shown. As a modification, even if the golden object cannot be acquired in the round promotion effect, the round promotion may be successful. Also, in the round promotion effect, when a giraffe pattern object appears and a golden object is acquired, the round promotion is confirmed. Even if the golden object cannot be acquired, the round promotion is performed according to the number of acquired giraffe pattern objects. You may comprise so that an expectation may be suggested.

  As explained so far, in this example, long and short open big hits and short open big hits are provided as big hit types of the first special symbol, and if the long and short open big hits, the first specific round is designated as the short open specific round game B, While the second specific round is set to the long open specific round game A and the long and short open big hit, the first specific round and the second specific round are set to the short open specific round game B. At this time, since the expectation of the probability variation acquisition is relatively low in the first specific round for any big hit, the presence / absence of the probability variation acquisition is sorted in the second specific round. Therefore, between the end of the first specific round and before the start of the second specific round, whether or not the second specific round is the long open specific round game A, that is, suggest or notify the expected degree of probability change promotion. Is. On the other hand, only the long open big hit is provided as the big special type of the second special symbol, and the first specific round and the second specific round are set to the long open specific round game A. In the case of a long open big hit, basically, the probability change acquisition is almost guaranteed in the first specific round, so the significance of suggesting the possibility of the probability change acquisition in the second specific round is small. Therefore, whether or not the round game continues after the second specific round after the end of the first specific round to the second specific round, that is, suggests or reports the expected degree of round promotion.

  As described above, according to the fifth embodiment, there are two types of promotion effects executed according to the type of jackpot before a predetermined round during a special game, and part of two types of promotion effects different from each other are input to the same system. If you make a big hit with the 1st special symbol, and you make a big hit with the 1st special design, while the 1st promotion effect suggests the expected degree of probability change acquisition after the predetermined round In the case of a big hit with a symbol, the second promotion effect suggests the expected level of continuation of the round after the predetermined round (expected expectation level of the second half round), so that the same-type effect that combines two types of promotion effect (on While ensuring the occurrence frequency of the ball production), the promotion production can be varied to increase the production effect of the jackpot production, and as a result, the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  In the above-described fifth embodiment, the configuration in which only a single big prize opening 65 (only the big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658) is provided in the game area PA is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this configuration. For example, in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, two big prize winning holes 64 and 65 (a big prize winning hole 64 having no specific area 658 and a special prize area 658 are provided in the game area PA). You may apply to the structure provided with the opening | mouth 65). At this time, in the above-described second embodiment, the first big prize opening 64 and the second big prize opening 65 are arranged so as to be vertically close to the lower right area in the game area PA, and during the execution of the special game Is configured to open the lower second big prize opening 65 (and the specific area 658) in the specific round and open the upper first big prize opening 65) in rounds other than the specific round. The configuration is not limited. For example, while adopting the same arrangement of the big winning openings 64 and 65 as in the second embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning openings 64 and 65 may be different from that of the second embodiment. As an example, when the 16R special game is executed, in the odd-numbered (1R, 3R, 5R ...) round game, the upper first winning prize port 64 is opened and the even number (2R, 4R, 6R ...) is opened. In the round game, the lower second big prize opening 65 is opened. Then, in the odd number of round games, the big prize opening 64 is long open (29 seconds open) in any round game. On the other hand, in the round game of the even number of times, in rounds other than the specific round, the big prize opening 65 is long open (29 seconds open) and the specific area 658 is always closed, while in the first specific round (1R), The big prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened short (open for 0.5 seconds), and in the second specific round (7R), the big prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened long (open for 29 seconds). At this time, the first big prize opening 64 and the second big prize opening 65 are alternately opened and closed every round, so that one big prize opening is closed in a certain round, and at the same time, the other big prize winning opening Will be released and the next round will begin. For this reason, there is an increased chance that a game ball that could not be entered due to the closing of one of the big winning gates in a certain round or a game ball that was not in time can enter the other big winning port adjacent to it. To do. Further, since the first grand prize winning port 64 and the second grand prize winning port 65 are close to each other in the vertical direction, the player only needs to aim at the same position, and the game can be performed without changing the launch strength of the game ball. As a result, the efficiency of entering a ball into the grand prize opening is increased, and the player's sense of gain is improved. At this time, even in the case of a long / short open big hit or a short open big hit, in the rounds other than the specific round, both the big winning openings 64 and 65 are long open (29 seconds open), and the ball entry efficiency is improved as described above. As a result, there are more opportunities to get more than before, which will be beneficial for players. As a modification, the first round winning opening 64 is opened by an even number of round games (2R, 4R, 6R,... The mouth 65 may be opened by an odd number of round games (1R, 3R, 5R...).

  Further, in the above-described fifth embodiment, during the execution of the special game, a specific round is set in which whether or not to shift to the probable change state after the end of the special game depending on whether or not the specific area 658 is entered, A specific area entry instruction directing to enter the specific area 658 by launching a game ball aiming at the big prize opening 65 (specific area 658), or a certain change after the special game ends by entering the specific area 658 A specific area entry notification effect (see the second embodiment) for notifying the transition to the state is executed. An example of the specific area entry effect is to display a message such as “Aim at V!” Or “It will change when you enter V!” On the screen. An example of the specific area entry notification effect is to display a message such as “V winning!” Or “Probability change get” on the screen. At this time, if a big hit is made with the first special symbol in the non-specific gaming state (in this example, when the opening extension function is not activated), the second special in the specific gaming state (in this example, when the opening extension function is activated) The configuration is such that the execution probability of at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry instruction effect is lower than the case of a big hit with a design, or at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry effect It may be configured not to execute. That is, in this example, when a big hit is made with the first special symbol (that is, in the case of the first hit), it is uncertain whether or not the probability change has been acquired (when 16R or 8R long / short open big hit is possible, the probability change can be acquired Since the player is paying attention to the presence or absence of probability variation, the player is paying attention to the presence or absence of probability variation, so that the specific area 658 is long open (seventh round). ), The specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry notification effect can be executed, thereby increasing the expectation and satisfaction of the probability variation acquisition. On the other hand, when a big hit is made with the second special symbol (that is, in the consecutive resort state), the probability change acquisition is basically a definite situation (16R or 8R long open big hit is likely to get a positive change) Since the player's interest in acquiring the probability change is not so great, at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry notification effect is not executed or even if it is executed, the above message is displayed. It may be displayed in a small size or the display mode may be simplified.

  Further, in the above-described fifth embodiment, when a so-called consecutive resort continues for a specified number of times, a rare special effect (so-called ascension effect) occurs. Also in this example, as in the first embodiment described above, whether or not a special effect (so-called ascension effect) can be executed is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied regarding the so-called extended resort state. The predetermined condition is, for example, that the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number, the cumulative number of specific big hits in the consecutive resort state reaches a predetermined number, the accumulated number of winning balls in the consecutive resort state reaches a predetermined number, A case where a specific effect (a specific effect during a symbol change or special game) is generated during the villa state can be cited. This special effect is executed across the symbol variation effect related to the jackpot of N consecutive times N = Nset (Nset: specified number) and the special game related to the Nset jackpot. As a modified example, the special effect may not extend over the symbol variation effect related to the big hit of the consecutive resort N = Nset times (Nset: the specified number) and the special game related to the Nset big hit. Good (may be performed on either side). At this time, when the special effect is executed, the execution probability of at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry effect is lower in the specific round in the special game than when the special effect is not executed. Or at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry effect may be omitted. Even if the specific area entry instruction effect or the specific area entry effect is executed, the message may be displayed in a small size or simplified. The reason is to avoid diluting the effects of the special effects during the execution of the special game and the specific area entry instruction effect (specific area entry notification effect). In this case, the priority is given to the execution of the rare special effect, so that the player can be satisfied.

[Fifth Embodiment-First Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to this modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Third promotion effect)
In the fifth embodiment described above, when a big hit is made with the second special symbol, if the big hit symbol (decorative symbol) is an even symbol (for example, “2.2.2”, etc.), the round promotion is made during the special game. In this modification, if the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit symbol (decorative symbol) is an even number symbol (for example, “2.2.2”, etc.) For example, the third promotion effect that suggests or notifies the occurrence of either the round promotion or the on-hold consecutive resort B during execution of the special game is configured to be executed. In other words, in this modified example, the round promotion effect and the in-hold-ream villa effect B are combined with a predetermined effect (entrance effect), and round promotion and rounding are performed in the effect process based on the end result (effect result). It is determined which of the on-hold consecutive villas was suggested or notified. The third promotion effect may include a so-called gas effect. In other words, a configuration that displays the message “Sorry!” At the end of the pitching production and informs that there is no occurrence of round promotion or reservation in the hold, or the production ends without any notice. It is good.

  First, in this modified example, at the start of the special game, if the jackpot symbol is an even symbol, it is determined which of the round promotion effect and the on-hold extended resort effect B is executed as the third promotion effect. Specifically, at the start of a special game, if there is a specific hold in the subsequent action hold ball, the execution of the hold-in-resort directing B is determined at a rate of 80% (high probability), and a rate of 20% The non-execution of the on-hold consecutive villa production B is determined with (low probability). Further, if there is no specific hold, the execution of the on-hold consecutive villa production B is determined at a rate of 20% (low probability), and the non-execution of the on-hold continuous villa production B is performed at a rate of 80% (high probability). decide. On the other hand, when the non-execution of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B is determined, the execution of the round promotion effect is determined. At this time, if the execution of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B is determined, the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag is turned on. Similarly, when the execution of the round promotion effect is determined, the round promotion effect flag is turned on. In this example, on the premise that preferential digestion (preferential digestion of the action-holding ball of the second special symbol) is adopted, these effects are particularly during the probabilistic state (including at least during the short time). It is preferable to occur at the big special jackpot of the second special symbol and the specific hold of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the content of the third promotion effect. The third promotion effect in this example includes a ballistic effect (also referred to as “third ballistic effect”) executed from the second round to the sixth round, and a promotion content notification effect executed in the seventh round. It consists of.

  As shown in FIGS. 74A to 74C, the third entrance effect is displayed in the second to sixth rounds (in the example shown, the third and fifth rounds are omitted). ) In the same way as the above-mentioned entrance effects, the third entrance effect is an effect in which various objects are sequentially displayed on the screen according to the entrance of the game ball to the grand prize opening 65. Depending on the display mode, the possibility of round promotion or pending renzo is suggested. In other words, in the third entrance effect, the effect proceeds in a state in which it is concealed from the player whether there is a possibility of a round promotion or an in-retention villa. Also in this example, each time a giraffe pattern object of one scale appears in the meter image, one star (an image imitating a star) can be acquired. In this example, a maximum of five stars can be displayed. Depending on the number of stars acquired, the possibility of a round promotion or a reserved resort is suggested. That is, as the number of acquired stars increases, the degree of expectation of the round promotion or the reserved resort is improved. In the example shown in the figure, four stars are acquired during the second to sixth rounds.

  Next, the promotion content notification effect is displayed in the seventh round, as shown in FIGS. This promotion content notification effect depends on the display mode of the third entrance effect from the second round to the sixth land (the number of giraffe pattern objects or the number of stars). It informs which possibility was suggested. Here, as shown in FIG. 74D, at the start of the seventh round, a message “Let's press the button!” Is displayed. In response to this, when the player operates the effect button 15, it is informed whether the possibility of round promotion or on-hold consecutive resort has been suggested. As shown in FIG. 74E, when the determination result at the time of the big hit is execution of a round promotion effect (when the round promotion effect flag is on), a message “Round-up chance!” Is displayed on the screen. Is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility of winning 8 rounds in the second half.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), when the determination result at the time of the big hit is the execution of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B (when the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag is on), “ The message “Renso Chance!” Is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that there will be a reserved resort (next big hit). Thus, based on the result of the promotion content notification effect, it is possible to clearly tell the player whether there is a possibility of a round promotion or a possibility of a reserved resort.

  As described above, according to the first modified example of the fifth embodiment, different types of round promotion effects and on-hold consecutive villa effects are configured by the same line of entering effects, and the promotion content information is reached until a predetermined round is reached. Is performed in a concealed state to the player, and the promotion content information is notified to the player as a result of the performance when the predetermined round is reached. It is possible to give pleasure to the player to guess information, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. As a modification, the promotion content information may be confirmed when the effect button 15 is operated in the seventh round of the illustrated example. That is, presentation results such as “Round-up Chance”, “Rental Chance Chance”, and “Sorry” may be displayed at the timing of pressing the button. Further, as a condition for notifying the promotion content information, it is not necessary to operate a button. Moreover, you may perform a promotion content alerting | reporting effect in the round (in the round) which performed the pitch effect, or after the said round end. In that case, the round in which the pitch effect is executed may be determined by a predetermined lottery (may be executed in the round won in the lottery of whether or not to execute the pitch effect). Also, in the case of a flow such as “long open round-continuous production-end” in the special game, the special game may be ended in this long open round (that is, there is no subsequent round in the special game). After this long open round, a predetermined number of short open rounds are executed, and then the special game is terminated (that is, the round continues after the long open round, but there is virtually no expectation of winning a prize ball) ) Specification may be acceptable. Further, the round promotion effect (round-up effect) may be executed in a round different from the round in which the probable promotion effect is executed when the game state is the normal state and the first special symbol is a big hit, Furthermore, it may be executed not only before the specific number of times (the eighth round in this example) but also after the specific number of times or at the specific number of times.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  As with the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is a so-called “ST machine”, a so-called “ST machine”, which is a 100% probability variation rush rate when a big hit is made with a special symbol. Machine.

  First, special symbol win / no-go determination, stop symbol determination, and variation pattern determination in the sixth embodiment will be described.

  Here, FIG. 75 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol success / failure lottery table in the sixth embodiment, where (A) is referred to in a normal state (low probability state), and (B) is a probability variation state (high probability). Status). In this special symbol winning / losing lottery table, random numbers per special symbol and judgment results of big hits, small hits, and off are associated, and the winning probabilities for big hits and small hits are determined according to the associated random number range. Is determined. As can be seen from FIG. 75, in the special symbol game winning / losing lottery, in the normal state (low probability state), only when the random value falls within the range of “0 to 217”, it is a big hit. On the other hand, in the probability variation state (high probability state), the range of the big hit is expanded, and not only when the random value falls within the range of “0 to 217” but also when the random number falls within the range of “218 to 2170”. Become. That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot lottery probability varies from the low probability state (about 1/300) to the high probability state (about 1/30). As described above, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state, but the winning probability of winning the jackpot is equal between the winning lottery of the first special symbol and the winning lottery of the second special symbol. Here, even if the random number value per special symbol does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it is a small hit. In this example, only the winning lottery of the first special symbol is configured to have a small win, but for example, a small hit is also provided in the winning lottery of the second special symbol, and the winning lottery of the second special symbol is determined. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the first lottery winning / losing lottery is a small hit with a higher probability.

  Subsequently, the upper part of FIG. 76 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the sixth embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the random symbol value per special symbol is the stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the special symbol are activated, the first grand prize) The operation patterns of the mouth 64) are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “6” of the first special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups A to C according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, symbols “1” and “2” have symbol group A (16R specific short-time symbol), symbols “3” and “4” have symbol group B (8R specific short-time symbol). The symbols “5” and “6” are associated with the symbol group C (2R specific short-time symbol), respectively.

  Subsequently, the lower part of FIG. 76 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the sixth embodiment. In the symbol table per second special symbol, the random symbol value per symbol special symbol, stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the special symbol is activated, the second grand prize The operation patterns of the mouths 65) are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols “11” to “16” of the second special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups D and E according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the symbols “11”, “12”, and “13” include symbol group D (16R specific short time symbol), and symbols “14”, “15”, and “16” include symbol group E. (8R specific short-time symbols) are associated with each other.

  In the sixth embodiment, as described above, there are three types of jackpot types: 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, and 2R jackpot. The expected value for winning a prize ball in the special game (the expected value for winning a prize ball) is 16R big hit> 8R big hit> 2R big hit. As described above, in this example, the 16R jackpot is also referred to as “high profit jackpot” having the highest prize ball winning expectation value, and the 2R jackpot is also referred to as “low profit jackpot” having the lowest prize ball winning expectation value.

  Subsequently, FIG. 77 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 77 shows only the probability variation pattern table that is referred to when the gaming state is the probability variation state (when the variation pattern selection state is the high probability reduced variation state β) among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables. Yes. In this example, for the sake of convenience, each variation pattern table is shared by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but in particular, this table is referred to when the gaming state is the probability variation state. It is desirable to use a variation pattern table related to special symbols (in this case, there is no small hit setting). In that case, even if the same special symbol variation pattern random number value is acquired by making each variation pattern table different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different variation patterns can be selected. Composed. In each figure, “selectivity” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining a variation pattern according to a special symbol variation pattern random value Is set, and the variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation pattern random value belongs to.

  First, FIG. 77A shows a probability variation pattern table for big hit / small hit in the sixth embodiment. As described above, this table is a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the probability variation state (when the variation pattern selection state is the high probability reduced variation state β). In the probability variation pattern table for big hits / small hits, various fluctuation patterns are assigned according to the types of big hit / small hits. Specifically, when the big hit type is 16R big hit or 8R big hit, the variation pattern PX4 (super reach) is selected. When the big hit type is 2R big hit, the variation pattern PX3 (normal reach) is selected. In the case of small hit, the variation pattern PX3 (normal reach) is selected as in the case of 2R big hit. As described above, when the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is successful is a big hit or a small hit, the non-reach variation pattern is not selected, and the reach variation pattern is always selected. In this example, for convenience of explanation, the common variation pattern PX4 is selected in both cases of 16R big hit and 8R big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, 16R big hit In this case, if the variation pattern PX1-1 or 8R big hit is selected, the variation pattern PX1-2 is selected, and the variation time is different from each other, or even if the variation time is the same, it differs on the side of the effect control board 200. You may comprise so that a variation production pattern may be selected.

  On the other hand, FIG. 77 (B) shows a probability variation pattern table for loss in the sixth embodiment. Specifically, when the result of the lottery determination is out of place, the variation pattern PH1 (non-reach: shortened variation), variation pattern PH2 (non-reach: normal variation), variation pattern PH3 (normal reach), variation pattern PH4 (super reach) ) Is selected.

  Subsequently, FIG. 78 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variation effect pattern table in the sixth embodiment. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the variation effect pattern table for the super reach type is shown, and the variation effect pattern table for the non-reach type and the normal reach type is omitted. In the variation effect pattern table in this example, a random value is assigned to a variation pattern that is different from the big hit variation pattern so that one of a plurality of types of super reach effects can be selected. Specifically, various super reach effects are associated with the variation patterns PX4 and PH4. In each drawing, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining a changing effect pattern according to a changing effect pattern random value. Is set, and the variation effect pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation effect pattern random value belongs to.

  Here, the super reach production in this example will be described. Each super reach effect is configured as a battle-type effect in which the player-side ally character battles the enemy character X (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5) in the probability variation effect mode β. This battle-type effect is an effect that suggests or reports the jackpot confirmation (that is, the determination of the extended villa state) in the change according to the victory of the teammate character. If the ally character cannot win the enemy character during the duration of the ST period, that is, until the end of the probability change state, the big hit cannot be obtained, and the gaming state returns from the probability change state to the normal state. Specifically, when each super reach effect is started, one of the plurality of enemy characters X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 appears as an opponent. At this time, the enemy character X1 for the super reach effect 1, the enemy character X2 for the super reach effect 2, the enemy character X3 for the super reach effect 3, the enemy character X4 for the super reach effect 4, and the enemy for the super reach effect 5 Character X5 appears. The strength of the enemy character is in the order of “enemy character X1”> “enemy character X2”> “enemy character X3”> “enemy character X4”> “enemy character X5”. Therefore, when the strongest enemy character X1 among a plurality of enemy characters appears, there is a high possibility that the ally character will be defeated, and the big hit expectation is lowered. Conversely, when the weakest enemy character X5 among a plurality of enemy characters appears, there is a high possibility that the teammate character will win, and the big hit expectation degree becomes high.

  As described above, the super reach effect is a variable effect pattern that is selected when the result of the lottery is 16R big hit, 8R big hit, or off. Here, with regard to the variation effect patterns PEX41 to 45 selected in the case of 16R big hit or 8R big hit, the variation effect selected in the event of a loss is provided while the teammate character finally has the effect of winning in the battle. About pattern PEH41-45, it becomes the content of an effect that an ally character finally loses by a battle. At this time, regarding the relationship of each super reach production, in the case of 16R big hit or 8R big hit, the selection ratio of super reach production 1, super reach production 2, super reach production 3, super reach production 4 and super reach production 5 On the other hand, in the case of detachment, the selection ratio increases in the order of super reach production 5 <super reach production 4 <super reach production 3 <super reach production 2 <super reach production 1. Therefore, with regard to each super reach production, the expectation of jackpot in the order of “super reach production 1” <“super reach production 2” <“super reach production 3” <“super reach production 4” <“super reach production 5” ( (Expectation for high profit jackpot) is set high. That is, the big hit expectation degree of each super reach production is set according to the strength of the above-mentioned enemy character.

  Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production in the sixth embodiment will be described. In this example, the first on-hold renso production (the on-hold renso production A) that occurs during the symbol variation and the second on-hold renso production (the on-hold renso production B) that occurs during the special game. Among them, the second on-hold Renso production (the on-hold Renso production B) is targeted. Note that, as described above, the on-hold Renso assumes that the gaming state when the preceding operation holding ball hits a big hit is a specific gaming state (in this example, at least the electric chew support function is operating). And In addition, the subsequent operation holding ball (specific holding) that is the target of the in-hold range resort is the operation holding ball of the second special symbol that occurs based on the ball entering the second start port 62. Whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect B can be executed is determined by lottery when a predetermined execution condition is established at a timing before the start of the special game. In this example, it is assumed that the preceding operation holding ball is a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and there is a specific holding (16R big hit, 8R big hit) in the subsequent operation holding ball, and the subsequent operation Even when there is no specific hold in the hold ball (when all hold is off), the predetermined execution condition is assumed to be satisfied. For this reason, the on-hold consecutive villa production B may be executed as a “truth production” in which the on-hold consecutive villa is established, or may be executed as a “gase production” in which the on-hold consecutive villa is not established.

  FIG. 79 is a consecutive resort production pattern table that is referred to when selecting a consecutive resort production pattern of the on-hold consecutive resort production B in the sixth embodiment. A plurality of types of consecutive villa production patterns are defined in the consecutive villa production pattern table, and the contents of the production and the execution timing are determined corresponding to each of the consecutive villa production patterns. The on-hold Rensou effect B in this example is configured as a battle-type effect in which the player-side ally character battles the enemy character X (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5). In other words, as in the above-described symbol variation effect (super reach effect), the battle-based effect is adopted for the reserved-in-ream ranger effect B in the present example. (Super Reach Production) is produced as production content related to each other. Specifically, the jackpot symbol variation effect (referred to as the "previous jackpot variation effect") that occurs when the preceding action holding ball (specific hold of high profit jackpot) is digested, and a special game based on the jackpot The on-hold Rensou effect B that occurs in the game is generated as a battle-type effect with a common enemy character as an opponent. Therefore, the production content of the on-hold consecutive villa production B corresponds to the production content (enemy character X) of the previous jackpot variation production (super reach production). In addition, the battle-type effect related to the on-hold consecutive resort effect B is an effect content (actual effect) that the ally character wins when there is a specific reservation in the subsequent operation hold ball, and the subsequent operation hold When there is no specific hold in the sphere, the content of the effect (gase effect) that the ally character is defeated. For this reason, the extended game effect pattern of the on-hold extended game production B is determined based on the relationship between the previous big hit variation production effect contents (enemy character X) and the presence / absence of specific hold in the subsequent action holding ball. For example, when there is a specific hold in the subsequent action hold ball (in the action hold ball of the second special symbol), the consecutive play effect pattern PB61 (enemy) corresponding to the change effect pattern PEX41 (winning the enemy character X1) Victory against character X1) is selected, and Correspondence production pattern PB62 (wins against enemy character X2) is selected in response to change effect pattern PEX42 (wins enemy character X2), and change effect pattern PEX43 (wins enemy character X3). ) Is selected corresponding to the rendezvous effect pattern PB63 (winning the enemy character X3), and corresponding to the change effect pattern PEX44 (winning the enemy character X4), the rendezvous effect pattern PB64 (winning the enemy character X4) is selected. In response to the variation effect pattern PEX45 (winning the enemy character X5), the consecutive resort effect pattern PB65 Victory to the enemy character X5) is selected. On the other hand, when there is no specific hold in the subsequent action hold ball, the rendezvous effect pattern PB71 (defeated by the enemy character X1) is selected corresponding to the change effect pattern PEX41 (winning the enemy character X1), and the change effect is generated. Correspondence pattern effect pattern PB72 (defeated by enemy character X2) is selected corresponding to pattern PEX42 (winning enemy character X2), and concordance effect pattern PB73 (corresponding to variation effect pattern PEX43 (winning enemy character X3)) The defeated enemy character X3 is selected, and the rendezvous effect pattern PB74 (defeated by the enemy character X4) is selected corresponding to the change effect pattern PEX44 (winning the enemy character X4), and the change effect pattern PEX45 (defeated by the enemy character X5). In response to win, Renso production pattern PB75 (defeated by enemy character X5) is selected It is.

  Thereby, the enemy character that appeared in the previous big hit variation effect can be made to appear again in the on-hold range resort effect B, and both can be configured as a battle system effect that is common or related to each other. In addition, when the same enemy character is used as an opponent and wins in the battle system effect related to the previous jackpot variation effect, and wins again in the battle system effect related to the on-hold Renso effect B, That there is a specific hold, i.e., the in-hold ranger is deterministic. On the other hand, when the same enemy character is used as an opponent and wins in the battle system effect related to the previous jackpot variation effect, while defeating in the battle system effect related to the reservation system in the reservation area B, the reservation in the reservation area Denied.

  As described above, in the super reach effect, the jackpot expectation is set according to the type of the enemy character X that appeared in the battle system effect. In other words, the greater the opponent's enemy character X, the lower the jackpot expectation level, and the weaker the opponent's enemy character X, the higher the jackpot expectation level. In accordance with this, also in the on-hold range resort production B, the expected degree of the on-hold range resort is set according to the type of the enemy character X of the opponent. In other words, the higher the opponent's enemy character X is, the lower the expectation of the on-hold Renso is (relatively higher the frequency of occurrence of the gaze effect), and the weaker the opponent's enemy character X is. The expectation degree of B becomes high (the occurrence frequency of the effect of gaze becomes relatively low). Therefore, it can be said that as the expectation level of the variation effect pattern is relatively low, the occurrence frequency of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B during the special game is relatively high when the symbol variation effect is a big hit. In other words, the stronger the enemy character X of the opponent is, the lower the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the variation effect pattern is. However, in this example, the same enemy character X is displayed in the on-hold Rensou effect B during the special game. Since the enemy character X of the opponent is stronger, the frequency of occurrence of the gaze effect as the on-hold consecutive resort production B becomes relatively higher. On the other hand, the probability that the enemy characters X1, X2, X3, X4, and X5 appear in the symbol variation effect (previous jackpot variation effect) is set to be equal (the selection rate of the variation effect pattern at the time of the big hit is equal). Therefore, regardless of the strength of the opponent's enemy character X, the actual production frequency of the on-hold range resort production B is the same. Therefore, the higher the occurrence frequency of the effect of the gaze, the higher the frequency of occurrence of the on-hold consecutive villa effect B (true effect + gase effect). Therefore, the stronger the enemy character that appears in the symbol variation effect (the lower the expectation level of the variation effect pattern), the more the same enemy character X reappears during the special game when the symbol variation effect is a big hit. Occurrence frequency of the on-hold consecutive resort production B to be performed becomes relatively high. Thus, it can be said that there is a trade-off relationship between the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol variation effect and the occurrence frequency of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B.

  As described above, the production contents of the on-hold consecutive villa production B are determined with reference to the production contents of the previous jackpot variation production, but it relates to the history of the previous jackpot variation production (battle system production). Information (referred to as “effect history information”) is temporarily stored in the effect history information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. This effect history information may be information that can identify at least the enemy character that appeared in the previous big hit variation effect. Then, the enemy character X of the on-hold range resort effect B is specified by referring to the effect history information (the enemy character X of the previous jackpot variation effect). During the special game, the name of the enemy character that appeared in the previous jackpot variation effect may be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70 based on the effect history information. Thereby, the enemy character that appeared in the on-hold range resort production B is the same as the enemy character that appeared in the previous jackpot variation production, that is, there is a possibility that the on-hold range resort production has occurred Can be clearly taught to the player.

  In addition, since the ST machine with a probability change entry rate of 100% is adopted in this example, the game state after the end of the special game is always in the state of probability change, and after the end of the special game, When the specific hold (16R big hit or 8R big hit) is exhausted, the super reach effect (battle effect) is generated again as the symbol variation effect related to the specific hold. In this example, if a predetermined execution condition that a specific hold exists in the subsequent operation hold ball is satisfied and a hold-in-village production B (true effect) occurs during a special game, The renso production B and the jackpot symbol variation effect (referred to as “subsequent jackpot variation effect”) that occurs when the specific hold is digested are configured as a battle system effect with a common enemy character as an opponent. To do. In other words, the subsequent big hit variation effect in this example is a battle-type effect in which the player-side ally character battles against the enemy character X (the enemy character X that appeared in the on-hold range resort effect B). Therefore, in this example, the previous jackpot variation production, the on-hold Renso production B, and the subsequent jackpot variation production are configured as mutually related production contents (battle system production using the same enemy character as an opponent). Is done.

  Here, FIG. 80 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the changing effect pattern replacement table in the sixth embodiment. As described above, this variation effect pattern replacement table causes the subsequent jackpot variation effect to be generated in a battle-type effect with the enemy character in common with the on-hold Renso production B (the previous jackpot variation effect) as the opponent. The variation effect pattern selected using the variation effect pattern table of FIG. 78 is referred to the effect history information, and the change effect pattern corresponding to the on-hold consecutive resort effect B (super reach effect in which the same enemy character appears) Used to replace That is, basically, the variation effect pattern is selected by random lottery using the variation effect pattern of FIG. 78, but when the subsequent big hit variation effect is generated, the variation effect pattern selected above is used. Is replaced with a variation effect pattern (super reach effect) corresponding to the previous jackpot variation effect and the in-hold extended villa effect B with reference to the effect history information. Therefore, the variation effect pattern related to the subsequent big hit variation effect is replaced based on the effect history information (enemy character X). For example, the variation effect pattern PEX41 (wins the enemy character X1) is selected in response to the on-hold consecutive resort production pattern PB51 (wins the enemy character X1), and the on-hold consecutive resort production pattern PB52 (wins the enemy character X2). Correspondingly, the variation effect pattern PEX42 (winning the enemy character X2) is selected, and the variation effect pattern PEX43 (winning the enemy character X3) is selected corresponding to the on-hold consecutive resort effect pattern PB53 (winning the enemy character X3). Then, the variation effect pattern PEX44 (wins the enemy character X5) is selected in response to the on-hold consecutive resort effect pattern PB54 (wins the enemy character X4). It should be noted that the production contents illustrated in this example (super reach production, on-hold range resort production), when the gaming state is in a probable state, a big hit related to the second special symbol occurs, and further, the second special symbol of It is desirable to occur when there is a specific hold in the operation hold ball (following operation hold ball). That is, it is preferable that the production contents of the lottery table illustrated in FIGS. 78 to 80 relate to the second special symbol when the gaming state is the probability variation state. In this example, on the premise of preferential digestion that preferentially digests the operation holding ball of the second special symbol, by the occurrence of a big hit in the second special symbol and the occurrence of a specific hold (big hit hold) of the second special symbol, A configuration in which production content (battle production) occurs is desirable.

  Next, the procedure of operation processing in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

(Variation effect pattern selection processing: sixth embodiment)
First, the variation effect pattern selection process (S733) according to the subroutine of S733 of FIG. 29 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing details of the variation effect pattern selection processing (S733).

  First, a random effect pattern random number value is acquired from the effect random number generator 210 (S781). Next, based on the variation pattern information acquired in S732 and the rendering mode (and rendering stage) set in the rendering state transition process in S632, any variation rendering pattern is selected from a plurality of types of variation rendering pattern tables. A table is acquired (S782).

Subsequently, based on the random effect pattern random number value and the variable effect pattern table, one of the variable effect patterns is selected by lottery from a plurality of types of variable effect patterns (S783).
The variation effect pattern constitutes a scenario of the effect display process in which the variation pattern of the decorative design, the type / occurrence time of the reach effect, the type / occurrence time of the notice effect, etc. are defined.

Next, it is determined whether or not the current symbol variation effect is a jackpot variation effect (S784).
If it is a big hit variation effect (S784: YES), it is determined whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag is off (S785). If the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag is off (S785: YES), that is, if the current symbol variation effect is the previous jackpot symbol variation effect, the contents of the super reach effect based on the jackpot symbol variation effect (enemy Character type) is stored in the effect history information storage area (S786).

  On the other hand, if the on-hold consecutive resort effect flag is on (S785: NO), that is, if the current symbol variation effect is a later big hit symbol variation effect, the effect history information is read (S787). Next, the effect history information read in S787 is referred to, and the change effect pattern selected in S783 is replaced with the change effect pattern corresponding to the effect history information using the change effect pattern replacement table (S788). Next, the production history information is cleared (S789), and the on-hold consecutive resort production flag is turned off (S790).

  Then, the variation effect pattern number determined in S783 or S788 is temporarily stored in the variation effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S791). Further, a lamp effect number corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern number is requested, and the requested lamp effect number is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination processing: sixth embodiment)
Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production B determination process (S805) in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S805) in the sixth embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the above-described embodiment is the processing of S871 in that the effect history information is read when selecting the extended resort effect pattern of the on-hold extended resort effect B. In FIG. 82, the processes in S851 to S870 are the same as those in the other embodiments, and therefore, the process in S871 which is a difference will be mainly described.

  First, the production history information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 is accessed to read production history information (S871). And while referring to this effect history information (the effect content of the previous jackpot symbol variation effect: enemy character), the consecutive game effect pattern related to the previous jackpot symbol variation effect is selected using the consecutive game effect pattern ( S861). By such operation processing in the sixth embodiment, the previous jackpot variation effect, the on-hold range resort effect B, and the subsequent jackpot variation effect are executed as a battle system effect with the same enemy character as the opponent. Become.

  As described above, according to the sixth embodiment, the former jackpot variation production, the on-hold variation game production, and the subsequent jackpot variation production are configured as the production contents related to each other, so that the occurrence of the retention game on the player is made to the player. In addition to being able to teach clearly, the occurrence of a reserved renso (two big hits) strikingly before and after the special game is strongly impressed to the player, and the occurrence of a new big hit by the reserved renso As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  Moreover, in 6th Embodiment, since the design fluctuation production | generation and the reserving in a renage villa production are comprised from the production | presentation content relevant to each other, and the reliability of the production | presentation according to the content is mutually maintained, It does not betray the player's expectation for the occurrence of the game, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being impaired.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, only one super reach type is provided as the variation pattern type, and when the super reach type is selected, the enemy character X (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5) is displayed. Although a battle-type production (super-reaching production) as an opponent was generated, this is not limited to this, and a plurality of super-reach types (for example, super-reach A, B, C...) Even when the super reach type is selected, a battle-type effect (super reach effect) with the enemy character X (X1, X2, X3, X4, X5) as the opponent may be generated. Then, regardless of which super reach type is selected, the big hit variation effect and the on-hold consecutive resort effect B may be configured as a battle effect with a common enemy character as an opponent.

  Further, in the above-described sixth embodiment, the ST machine with the probability variation rush rate of 100% is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the probability variation rush rate is set to less than 100% (at least specified as the jackpot type) When the big hit and the normal big hit are set) and the big hit is made with a specific symbol, the probability variation state may be continued after the end of the special game until the next big hit occurs. Also in this normal machine, so-called battle specs are adopted, and in the probability variation state (probability variation effect mode β), when a big hit is made in the second special symbol, a battle system effect (battle reach effect) is executed during the symbol variation. be able to. In the battle specs in this normal machine, the big hit becomes definitive when a battle-type effect occurs during symbol variation. That is, the battle effect variation effect pattern is selected only when the determination result is a big hit. Then, in the battle system effect, when the teammate character wins against the enemy character, an outgoing ball probable big hit (for example, 16R probable big hit) is confirmed, and when the teammate character loses to the enemy character, the outgoing ball indefinite change big hit (for example, 2R probable big hit) or The no-hit normal big hit (for example, 2R normal big hit) is fixed. In other words, in the battle system specs of the normal machine, the win rate of the battle system effect depending on the opponent (enemy character) represents the degree of expectation for the outgoing ball probable big hit. And even in such a normal machine, the previous jackpot variation effect, the on-hold Rensou effect B, and the subsequent jackpot variation effect are related to each other (contents related to the battle system with the same enemy character as the opponent) It may be configured as a production).

[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  The gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, like the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, is a so-called “ST machine”, which is a so-called “ST machine” which is a 100% probability variation entry rate when a big hit is made with a special symbol. Machine.

  FIG. 83 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine PM according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83, in the seventh embodiment, only a single big prize opening 64 is mounted in the game area PA. The special winning opening 64 is configured as a slide opening / closing type attacker. A first prize sensor 79a and a second prize sensor 79b are provided inside the big prize opening 64 as a big prize opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. In addition, the operating gate 63 and the second starting port 62 are arranged close to each other in the vertical direction above the special winning opening 64, and as long as the game ball passes through the operating gate 63 in the process of flowing down, The ball will flow down toward the second starting port 62. At that time, if the ordinary electric accessory 622 is in an open state, the gaming ball will enter the second starting port 62. On the other hand, the big winning opening 60 is arranged at a position where a right-handed game ball is easy to enter. At this time, in this example, the game ball flows down toward the big prize opening 64 unless the game ball flows into the operation gate 63 and the second starting port 62 in the process of flowing down the right side of the game area PA. If the special electric accessory 642 is in an open state, the game ball enters the grand prize opening 64. Therefore, in this example, when the special electric accessory 642 is in the open state, the possibility of generating waste balls is reduced.

  Next, the big prize opening device 700 used as the big prize opening 64 in the seventh embodiment will be described. 84 to 88 show a specific configuration of the special prize opening device 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 84A, the special prize opening device 700 includes a front surface portion 701 and a back surface portion 702 provided behind the front surface portion 701. The game board 20 has a front surface portion 701. Is fixed at a predetermined position in the game area PA. The front portion 701 bears a part of the gauge configuration and design in the game area PA, and the back portion 702 is not shown in the drawing but is opened in a component opening (not shown) formed in the game board 20. A part of the game board 20 is protruded from the back of the game board 20 by being inserted.

  The front portion 701 of the big prize opening device 700 is provided with a substrate portion 703, a shielding cover member 704, a ball passage forming portion 705, a horizontal shutter member 706, a falling door member 707, and the like. A shielding cover member 704 is attached to the front surface of the substrate portion 703, and most of the front surface of the substrate portion 703 is covered with the shielding cover member 704.

  The board portion 703 is a flat plate-like member that is screwed to the surface of the gaming board 20, and is seen at predetermined sites such as the upper right corner, the lower left corner, and the left interruption portion of the outer peripheral edge when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. , Screw holes 703a to 703c for mounting on the game board 20 are provided. And the board | substrate part 703 is arrange | positioned and fixed to the site | part of the lower right corner of game area PA.

  The shielding cover member 704 has a flat plate-like main body portion 704a. The lower edge portion and the left and right side portions of the main body portion 704a are continuously formed in a U shape as shown in FIG. A partition wall 704b is protruded. Further, the shielding cover member 704 is fixed in combination with the central portion of the board portion 703, and opens upward in a band shape between the board portion 703 and can receive and flow down the game ball. A falling space is formed. Further, the shielding cover member 704 is made of a transparent plastic material that is light transmissive, so that the flow space inside can be visually recognized from the outside (front side).

  As shown in FIGS. 85 (a), 86 (a), and 86 (b), the above-described spherical passage forming portion 705 is configured by a combination of a plurality of ribs having a predetermined shape. Protrudes toward. The protruding amount of the ball passage forming portion 705 from the substrate portion 703 is set to be somewhat larger (about several millimeters) than the diameter of the game ball and to be substantially the same throughout. Here, FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b) and FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) show a state in which the shielding cover member 704 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the ball passage forming portion 705 forms an inflow ball guide portion 708, a first winning guide portion 709, and a second winning guide portion 710. The game ball that has entered the guide unit 708 is guided to different routes according to the state of the horizontal shutter member 706 described above. In other words, the inflow ball guide portion 708 configures a game ball path that changes the flow direction of the game ball flowing down from above and guides it from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front of the game machine. Further, the first winning guide part 709 and the second winning guide part 710 constitute a game ball path that guides the entered game ball downward when a game ball flowing down the inflow ball guide part 708 enters. ing.

  Among these, the inflow ball guide portion 708 includes a receiving portion 708a, a connecting portion 708b, and a discharging portion 708c in a horizontal row, and between the receiving portion 708a located at the right end and the connecting portion 708b located in the middle, A gap between the connection portion 708b and the discharge portion 708c located at the left end is slightly larger (about several millimeters) than the diameter of the game ball and forms the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a. Is interposed. Further, the receiving portion 708a is inclined from the right to the left at a predetermined angle and is curved with the right end portion obliquely upward to the right. The connecting portion 708b is formed at a position somewhat lower (several millimeters) than the left end portion of the receiving portion 708a, and is inclined linearly downward from right to left. The discharge portion 708c is formed so as to be continuous with the connection portion 708b via a gap, and is inclined linearly from right to left.

  A first entrance 709 a between the receiving portion 708 a and the connection portion 708 b and a second entrance 710 a between the connection portion 708 b and the discharge portion 708 c are the first shutter portion 706 a provided in the horizontal shutter member 706. And, by the second shutter portion 706b, it is closed as shown in FIG. 86 (a) in the normal time (when the special prize opening device 700 is not in operation). That is, as shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, the horizontal shutter member 706 includes a main body portion 706c molded into a rectangular plate shape, and a plate-like first shutter portion that is separated from the left and right at the front edge of the main body portion 706c. 706a and a second shutter portion 706b. The size of the first shutter unit 706a and the second shutter unit 706b is set so that the vertical and horizontal dimensions are somewhat larger (about several millimeters) than the game ball. Further, the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b are inclined downward from right to left with the same inclination as that of the receiving portion 708a, the connecting portion 708b, and the discharge portion 708c.

  Further, the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b have a corresponding positional relationship with the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a, respectively. In a normal state, the horizontal shutter member 706 is stopped at the forward movement position, and the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b protrude forward of the substrate portion 703 as shown in FIG. 86 (a). Thus, both the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a are closed. In this state, the game ball that has flowed into the receiving portion 708a of the big prize opening device 700 reaches the discharge portion 708c through the first shutter portion 706a, the connection portion 708b, and the second shutter portion 706b, and is further discharged. It is discharged from the portion 708c toward the first start port 51. Here, the drive mechanism of the horizontal shutter member 706 will be described later.

  In addition, a speed reduction portion 711 for reducing the speed of the game ball flowing down the inflow ball guide portion 708 is provided in the middle of the inflow ball guide portion 708. The speed reduction portion 711 is configured by rib-shaped protrusions 711 a and 711 b that are integrally provided on the substrate portion 703 and the shielding cover member 704. There are two projections 711a on the substrate portion 703 and two projections 711b on the shielding cover member 704, and the shape of each of the projections 711a and 711b is such that the tip is in the width direction of the inflow ball guide portion 708 (the gaming machine It has a triangular prism shape toward the center in the front-rear direction. Furthermore, the upper ends of the protrusions 711a and 711b are inclined surfaces that become lower toward the front.

  The two protrusions 711a of the board portion 703 are separated from each other at a predetermined distance that is slightly (several millimeters) larger than the diameter of the game ball at a portion immediately above the connection portion 708b. The positional relationship between the two protrusions is the same for the two protrusions 711b of the shielding cover member 704. In addition, regarding the positional relationship between the protrusion 711a of the board portion 703 and the protrusion 711b of the shielding cover member 704, both the protrusions 711a and 711b sandwich the upper space of the connection portion 708b, and the flow direction of the game ball (game) It is set to be shifted by a predetermined amount (about the radius of the game ball) in the left-right direction). As shown in FIG. 84B, the upstream one of the two protrusions 711 a of the substrate portion 703 is more first than the upstream one of the two protrusions 711 b of the shielding cover member 704. It is located on the side close to the entrance 709a.

  By providing such a speed reducing portion 711, the game ball flowing down the inflow ball guiding portion 708 is decelerated by interfering with at least one of the four projections 711a and 711b. Then, the game ball moves toward the downstream side of the connection portion 708b in a state where the speed is lower than that when the game ball flows into the inflow ball guide portion 708 and when it reaches the speed reduction portion 711.

  The first winning guide section 709 and the second winning guide section 710 described above are configured so that the first winning slot 709a and the second winning slot 710a and the second winning slot 710a and the second winning slot 710a are in a non-normal time (when the large winning opening apparatus 700 is activated). With the opening of the entrance 710a, the game ball can enter. That is, in a non-normal state, the horizontal shutter member 706 is lowered to the retracted position, and the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b are retracted toward the rear of the substrate portion 703. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a are exposed, the inflow ball guide 708, the first winning guide 709, and the second winning guide 710. And communicate.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the winning prize opening device 700 is activated as described above by winning the winning / losing lottery for operating the winning prize opening device 700, and the special game or small hits related to the winning. This is a case where a game is executed. In addition, the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a are opened by the first shutter unit 706a and the second shutter unit 706b during a round of special games or the like, and a plurality of rounds are repeated between rounds. In the (round interval), the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a are closed by the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b.

  The first winning guide section 709 and the second winning guide section 710 are respectively provided with a first detection ball guide section 709b, a first discharge ball guide section 709c, a second detection ball guide section 710b, and a second discharge ball guide section 710c. Have. In addition, a prize is given to a portion between the first detection ball guide portion 709b and the first discharge ball guide portion 709c and a portion between the second detection ball guide portion 710b and the second discharge ball guide portion 710c. A first winning sensor 79a and a second winning sensor 79b are arranged as the mouth switch 641. These winning sensors 79a and 79b are proximity sensors, and various micro switches or the like can be used as the proximity sensors. Furthermore, various types such as a contact type, a non-contact type, a mechanical type, an optical type, and an electromagnetic induction type can be adopted as the microswitch.

  Each winning sensor 79a, 79b has a rectangular casing 712a, 712b having a thickness smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and detection holes 713a, 713b through which the game ball passes in the thickness direction. Further, the winning sensors 79a and 79b are connected to the first detection ball guide portion 709b and the first discharge ball guide portion 709c, and the second detection ball guide portion 710b and the second discharge ball guide via the detection holes 713a and 713b. The part 710c is communicated so that the game ball can flow down. The winning sensors 79a and 79b are mounted on the first winning guide portion 709 and the second winning guide portion 710 with their longitudinal directions different from each other by approximately 90 °. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85A and the like, the first winning sensor 79a is oriented in the longitudinal direction in the left-right direction on the front side of the board portion 703, and the first winning sensor 79b is oriented in the longitudinal direction. , Which is directed in the front-rear direction passing through the substrate portion 703.

  In the present embodiment, the first detection ball guide portion 709b is bent from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front, and the game ball that has dropped onto the first detection ball guide portion 709b is The first detection ball guiding portion 709b once interferes with the inner wall and is decelerated before passing through the first winning sensor 79b. In the present embodiment, a rib 709d having a predetermined protruding amount (for example, 1 mm or less) is provided in the center of the inner wall behind the first detection ball guide portion 709b so as to follow the shape of the first detection ball guide portion 709b. It has been. The rib 709d prevents the ball from being caught in the first detection ball guide portion 709b. Note that not only the first detection ball guide portion 709b but also the second detection ball guide portion 710b may have a bent shape, or ribs may be provided on the inner wall.

  In addition, in a situation where the horizontal shutter member 706 is retracted and the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a are opened, the game ball flowing down the inflow ball guide 708 is the first entrance on the upstream side. The ball enters the ball opening 709a, is detected by the first winning sensor 79a, and is discharged from the first winning guide section 709. However, there may be a case where a part of the game balls jumps over the first entrance 709a and reaches the second entrance 710a on the downstream side from the connection portion 708b. In such a case, the game ball that has reached the second entrance 710a enters the second winning guide 710, is detected by the second winning sensor 79b, and is discharged from the second winning guide 710. As described above, since the speed reducing portion 711 is provided between the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a, a game ball that has not entered the first entrance 709a temporarily. Even so, the momentum of the game ball is sufficiently weakened by the speed reduction unit 711 in front of the second entrance 710a.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the shielding cover member 704 is transparent as described above, a game that flows down the inflow ball guide portion 708, the first winning guide portion 709, and the second winning guide portion 710 as described above. The state of the sphere can be visually recognized by the player through the shielding cover member 704.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a), 86 (b), 87, etc., the above-described lodging door member 707 has a flat door portion 707a, and the first winning guide portion 709 and the second winning guide portion 707a. It is arranged below the winning guide section 710. As shown in FIGS. 86 (b), 87 and 88, the falling door member 707 is in a positional relationship corresponding to the game ball collection port 714 opened in a rectangular shape in the substrate portion 703. And the fall door member 707 is pivotally supported so as to be pivotable in the front-rear direction around the lower edge, and as shown in FIGS. 85 (a), 85 (b) and 86 (a) in a normal state. The game ball collection port 714 is closed. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), the length (opening dimension) of the game ball collection port 714 is discharged from a portion inside the right end (upstream end) of the receiving portion 708a in the inflow ball guiding portion 708. The length reaches the right end (upstream end) of the portion 708c. And the length in the left-right direction of the falling door member 707 is also approximately the same as the opening size of the game ball collection port 714.

  When the special prize opening device 700 is activated, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the fall door member 707 tilts so that the lower edge portion is the base end and the upper edge portion protrudes toward the front of the board portion 703. To do. Then, the lodging door member 707 opens toward the upper first winning guide portion 709 and the second winning guide portion 710 and receives the game balls discharged from the first winning guide portion 709 and the second winning guide portion 710. Then, it guides to the collection passage 716a behind the substrate portion 703. Then, the game ball that has entered the collection passage 716a is guided to the collection hole 716b opened at the left end portion through the inclined surface that is lowered from the right to the left, and is guided from the collection hole 716b toward the back side of the game board 30. Is done.

  In this embodiment, sensors for detecting a game ball are not provided in the collection hole 716b, and the game ball that has entered the game ball collection port 714 is counted at least in the vicinity of the game board 20. It is supposed not to be broken. Therefore, when the game ball collection port 714 opened / closed by the fallen door member 707 is opened, the game ball collection port 714 is opened with respect to the game ball detected by the first winning guide unit 709 or the second winning guide unit 710. Performs the same ball discharge function as 29 In addition, the player can visually recognize the state in which the falling door member 707 operates and the state of the game ball collection port 714 in the open state through the transparent shielding cover member 704. Further, a space between the falling door member 707 and the ball passage forming portion 705 is covered by a shielding cover member 704 as a cover member, and the first winning guide portion 709 and the second winning guide are provided to the game ball collection port 714. Only game balls released from the portion 710 can enter.

  Further, unlike the horizontal shutter member 706, the fall door member 707 is continuously open while the special prize opening device 700 is in operation. And even when a plurality of rounds are repeated, the lodging door member 707 continues to be open from the start of the first round to the end of the last round. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the falling door member 707 is opened and the horizontal shutter member 706 is closed at a timing that is a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) before the timing at which the horizontal shutter member 706 is opened. The fall door member 707 enters a closed state at a timing after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b) and FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), a game ball passage port 715 is formed in the upper right portion of the substrate portion 703. The game ball passage port 715 is located below the receiving portion 708a and is isolated from the inflow ball guide portion 708 by the ball passage forming portion 705. Furthermore, the game ball can enter the above-described flow-down space from the right side portion of the shielding cover member 704, and the game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening device 700 below the inflow ball guide portion 708 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 88 and the like, it is guided rearward through a shielding cover side guide rod 704c formed on the shielding cover member 704 and a substrate side guide rod 703d formed on the substrate portion 703.

  Next, the above-described back surface portion 702 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the back surface portion 702 includes a shutter drive unit 721, a passage constituting unit 722, and a falling door member drive unit 723. The shutter drive unit 721 moves the above-described horizontal shutter member 706 forward and backward. The shutter drive unit 721 has a support frame portion 721a that opens upward and surrounds the front, rear, left, and right, and a solenoid portion 724 (see FIG. 88) and a link arm member 725. And so on.

  A link arm member 725 is connected to the solenoid portion 724 via a rack and pinion mechanism (not shown), and the horizontal shutter member 706 is loosely connected to the link arm member 725 via a slide hole 725a. It is connected to. The solenoid unit 724 is turned off at the normal time when the special prize opening device 700 is not operating, and the horizontal shutter is set with the link arm member 725 rotated forward as indicated by a solid line in FIG. The member 706 is advanced. Further, when the special prize opening device 700 is operating in a non-normal state, the solenoid unit 724 is turned on, and the link arm member 725 is rotated backward as indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The horizontal shutter member 706 is retracted. That is, as the solenoid portion 724 is turned on / off, the link arm member 725 swings back and forth, and the horizontal shutter member 706 moves forward or backward linearly. The advancement / retraction of the horizontal shutter member 706 is guided by the substrate portion 703, the support frame portion 721a, and a passage constituting unit 722 described later.

  In the passage configuration unit 722, the above-described spherical passage formation portion 705 is formed on the front surface of the support frame portion 722a that is open upward and surrounds the front, rear, left, and right. Further, a shutter drive unit 721 is placed on the passage configuration unit 722, and the passage configuration unit 722 supports the shutter drive unit 721 from below.

  The falling door member drive unit 723 has the above-described game ball collection port 714 opened on the front surface of the rectangular box-shaped housing portion 723a, and the lower left and right ends of the falling door member 707 are located in front of the left and right sides. A door support portion 726 is rotatably connected. Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the fall door member drive unit 723 includes a solenoid for opening and closing the fall door member 707, a spring for urging when the fall door member 707 is closed, and the like in the housing portion 723a. ing. Further, the passage constituting unit 722 is placed on the falling door member driving unit 723, and the falling door member driving unit 723 supports the passage constituting unit 722 from below.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 85, the special prize opening device 700 includes a first connector 727 that electrically connects to the main control board 100 via various relay boards, a fall door member drive unit 723, and a passage. A second connector 728 for making electrical connection with the component unit 722; Power supply to various electrical devices, output of signals from the winning sensors 79a and 79b, supply of control signals to various solenoids, and the like are performed using the first connector 727 and the second connector 728. .

  In such a large winning opening device 700, the first ball opening 709a (upstream opening) and the second winning opening 710a (downstream opening) that become the upward large winning holes by a shutter type mechanism using the horizontal shutter member 706. ) Are opened and closed simultaneously. Therefore, it is easy to reduce the size in the height direction as compared with a type that opens and closes a front-facing large winning opening by a fallen door type mechanism. Then, by utilizing the space that has become free due to the miniaturization, the shape of the big prize opening device 700 and the degree of freedom of the mechanism design can be increased, and other parts and game nails are arranged around the big prize opening device 700. With regard to the above, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  Further, in the inflow ball guide portion 708, the first entrance 709a is located upstream of the second entrance 710a, and the game ball that has flowed into the inflow ball guide 708 must enter the first entrance 709a. It is supposed to pass. Therefore, only the first entrance 709a can be used as a big prize opening of the pachinko gaming machine PM. In addition, the vertical and horizontal opening dimensions of the first entrance 709a are somewhat larger than the diameter of the game ball, which is a big prize compared to the conventional type in which the large entrance is secured in a horizontally long belt shape. The mouth is shrunk. Therefore, in order to secure the function of detecting a game ball that has entered as a result of opening, which is the minimum function of the grand prize opening device 700, it is possible to reduce the size in the left-right direction. The degree of freedom in designing the mouth device 700 can be increased.

  Further, since the second entrance 710a is provided downstream of the first entrance 709a, even if a game ball jumps over the first entrance 709a, the second entrance 710a is reserved. It can be used as a big prize opening. In addition, when the special winning opening apparatus 700 is operated, it is possible to prevent the generation of gaming balls spilling from the special winning opening apparatus 700, and it is possible to quickly finish counting the prescribed number (here, ten) of gaming balls. In addition, since the winning ball opening 709a and the second ball opening 710a are formed in the inflow ball guiding portion 708 together with the first winning port 710a, it is easy to secure the opening width of the large winning port, and the efficiency A game ball can flow down and be discharged well.

  Further, a speed reducing portion 711 is provided between the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a, and the game ball flowing down the inflow ball guide portion 708 interferes with the protrusions 711a and 711b in the speed reduction portion 711. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the speed of the game ball heading toward the second entrance 710a can be weakened by the deceleration unit 711. A game ball that has passed without entering the first entrance 709a can be more reliably entered into the second entrance 710a.

  In particular, in the right part of the game area PA, a space is occupied by the center ornament 22 and it is difficult to place nails or the like, and a part in which nails or the like are sufficiently disposed (for example, a left part of the game area PA). Compared to, the speed of game balls that flow down tends to be faster. The behavior of the game ball that has entered the special prize opening device 700 is also difficult to stabilize, which may cause chattering in the winning sensors 79a and 79b, damage to the winning sensors 79a and 79b, and the like. However, as in the present embodiment, the receiving portion 708a of the inflow ball guide portion 708 is curved to change the flow direction of the game ball from the up-down direction to the left-right direction, or the speed-down portion 711 is provided in the inflow ball guide portion 708. By doing so, the momentum of the game ball toward the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a can be sufficiently reduced. Note that a deceleration unit 711 may be provided in front of the first entrance 709a to decelerate the game ball toward the first entrance 709a.

  Further, the deceleration of the game ball by the deceleration unit 711 leads to an increase in the time during which the game ball exists on the inflow ball guide unit 708. Therefore, the possibility of generating more winnings than the prescribed number (here, 10) in the grand prize opening device 700 is increased, and from this point of view, so-called over winning or over winning is likely to occur. It is possible to become.

  In addition, the horizontal shutter member 706 is used, and the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a, which are large winning openings, are reduced in size as compared with the prior art. Accordingly, it is possible to relax design conditions such as maintaining the posture and friction of the horizontal shutter member 706 and the guide portion (not shown) of the horizontal shutter member 706, and easily ensure the smooth operation of the horizontal shutter member 606. become able to.

  In other words, in the case of a large winning opening device of the type in which the door is raised or laid down as in the conventional case, since the large winning opening opens toward the front, the thickness (the vertical dimension) of the large winning device is large. Become. In addition, because the plate-shaped door is rotated around the lower edge, the solenoid used as the drive source has a relatively large output that can generate a moment sufficient to move the door. Is required. In addition, depending on the elastic force of the spring used to return the door, the weight of the game ball may add and the door may not close or open unexpectedly, so care must be taken when selecting the spring. .

  Further, in the case of a large winning opening of the type in which the shutter is moved forward and backward, if the opening (large winning opening) opened and closed by the sliding of the shutter is large as in the conventional case, the influence of various factors such as friction, wear and dirt. In some cases, the shutter may not be closed. Furthermore, if an equal force is not applied to the shutter, the shutter tilts, and this may cause a case where the shutter does not operate smoothly.

  However, like the big prize opening device 700 in the present embodiment, the horizontal shutter member 706 is used, and all the game balls are guided to the first entrance 709a (and the second entrance 710a), thereby winning the big prize. It is possible to reduce the size of the mouth and to reduce the size of the shutters (here, the first shutter portion 706a and the second shutter portion 706b) that block the winning prize opening. Further, there is no restriction that the overall shape and size of the horizontal shutter member 706 must be determined in accordance with the shape and size of the big prize opening, and the weight of the horizontal shutter member 706 and the shape of the main body 706c are eliminated. Can be liberalized. And, by making the shape and size of the main body 706c of the horizontal shutter member 706 free, a design that suppresses the influence of various elements such as friction, wear, and dirt can be performed. In addition, it becomes possible to relax the design requirements for the equalization of the force applied to the main body 706c and the inclination, and the design of the shutter mechanism is facilitated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles related to the opening / closing of the special winning opening.

  In addition, since the second ball entrance 710a is provided, it is possible to win the game ball that has flowed into the inflow ball guide unit 708 across the rounds when the big prize opening device 700 is operated. In other words, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow ball guide portion 708 just before the end of a certain round cannot close the first entrance 709a and enter the first entrance 709a. In addition, when the next round is started after a predetermined period (round interval) between rounds and the horizontal shutter member 706 is retracted, the game ball is moved between the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a. If it remains in the area between them, it is possible to guide the game ball to the second winning guide section 710 via the second inlet 710a and generate a winning. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the speed reducing portion 711 is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 710a, the speed reduction portion 711 enters the second entrance 710a straddling such a round. Can increase the possibility of Here, the round interval may be a period of less than 1 second, for example.

  Moreover, the opening period of the fall door member 707 extends over the period from the start of the first round to the end of the last round, and while the horizontal shutter member 706 performs an advance / retreat operation according to the number of rounds, the fall door member 707 continues to open. That is, the fall door member 707 continues to open across the round when the special prize opening device 700 is operated. Further, the overturning door member 707 opens before the horizontal shutter member 706 and closes behind the horizontal shutter member 706. Therefore, the game balls released from the first winning guide unit 709 and the second winning guide unit 710 can be guided into the game ball collection port 714 without overflowing. Further, the opening operation of the overturning door member 707 can promptly notify that the special prize opening device 700 has been operated.

  Further, since the speed reducing portion 711 is provided in the inflow ball guide portion 708, the speed of the game ball traveling from the first entrance 709a to the second entrance 710a can be reduced. Therefore, a game ball that has passed through the first entrance 709a can be more reliably entered into the second entrance 710a. Furthermore, at the end of the above round, the game balls that could not be entered due to the closing of the first entrance 709a are rounded up to the next opening of the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a. After that, it is possible to enter the second entrance 710a.

  In this example, the first entrance 709a and the second entrance 710a of the grand prize opening device 700 are opened and closed by a horizontal shutter member 706 that is integrally provided with a first shutter portion 706a and a second shutter portion 706b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first shutter unit 706a and the second shutter unit 706b are driven separately, and the first entrance port 709a and the second entrance port 710a are separated by a time difference. You may make it open and close. In that case, an operation mode in which the opening of the second entrance 710a is started while the first entrance 709a is being opened or after being closed can be exemplified.

  Next, an operation pattern of the special winning opening 64 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, in the 16R special game, only the long open round game corresponding to the number of rounds (referred to as “long open round game”) is executed, and in the 2R special game, the round number is supported. However, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of round games (one special game) in the 16R special game are illustrated. However, in the seventh embodiment, only the short open round game (referred to as “short open round game”) is executed. In FIG. 2, long open round games and short open round games are mixed. Therefore, the actual number of balls that can be obtained by the player is varied according to the type of 16R jackpot.

  First, the upper part of FIG. 89 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the seventh embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into four symbol groups A to D according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the symbols “1” and “2” include the symbol group A (16R specific short time symbol 1), and the symbols “3” and “4” indicate the symbol group B (16R specific time short symbol 2). ), Symbols “5” and “6” include symbol group C (16R specified short time symbol 3), symbols “7” and “8” include symbol group D (16R specific time short symbol 4). Are associated with each other. In addition, as the operation pattern of the winning prize opening 64, the 16R opening pattern 1 is provided for the symbol group A (16R specific short time symbol 1), and the 16R opening pattern 2 is provided for the symbol group B (16R specific short time symbol 2). The 16R opening pattern 3 is associated with the group C (16R specific short time symbol 3), and the 16R opening pattern 4 is associated with the symbol group D (16R specific short time symbol 4).

  Next, the lower part of FIG. 89 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the seventh embodiment. In the symbol table per second special symbol, stop symbols “11” to “18” of the second special symbol are classified into four symbol groups E to H according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the symbols “11” and “12” include the symbol group E (16R specific short time symbol 1), and the symbols “13” and “14” indicate the symbol group F (16R specific time short symbol 2). ), Symbols “15” and “16” include symbol group G (16R specified short time symbol 3), and symbols “17” and “18” include symbol group H (16R specific time short symbol 4). Are associated with each other. In addition, as the operation pattern of the winning prize opening 64, the symbol group E (16R specific short-time symbol 1) has a 16R opening pattern 1 and the symbol group F (16R specific short-time symbol 2) has a 16R opening pattern 2. The group G (16R specific time short symbol 3) is associated with the 16R open pattern 3, and the symbol group H (16R specific short time symbol 4) is associated with the 16R open pattern 4.

  Next, FIG. 90 is a time chart for explaining an operation pattern of the special winning opening 64 in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, 16R opening pattern 1, 16R opening pattern 2, 16R opening pattern 3 and 16R opening pattern 4 are provided as the operation patterns of the special winning opening 64. 90 conceptually shows the execution state of the long open round game L and the short open round game S, and the long open round game L, the short open round game S, and the big prize opening 64. The length and ratio of each time width of the interval period (waiting period) in which the closed state is maintained does not correspond to the actual time width length and ratio. Here, “long open round game L” is a unit in a mode in which the grand prize opening 64 is closed after being opened for 30 seconds, or closed with a specified number (10 balls) even if it is less than 30 seconds. It is a game. Similarly, “short open round game S” means that the big prize opening 64 is closed after being opened for 0.2 seconds, or closed with a specified number (10 balls) even if it is less than 0.2 seconds. It is a unit game of the mode to do. Thus, in this example, the long open round game is a unit game in which a predetermined number (maximum number of balls entered) can be expected during the open period (30 seconds) of the big winning opening 64, while the short open round game Is a unit game in which it is practically difficult to enter a game ball during the opening period (0.2 seconds) of the special winning opening 64.

  First, FIG. 90A shows the 16R opening pattern 1. The 16R opening pattern 1 is an operation pattern in which the long opening round game L is executed 16 times. When this 16R opening pattern 1 is activated, basically, in any long opening round game L, a specified number (10 balls) can be entered, and the player can obtain profits for 16 rounds. I can expect.

  FIG. 90B shows the 16R opening pattern 2. The 16R opening pattern 2 is an operation pattern in which the short opening round game S is executed 8 times after the long opening round game L is executed 8 times. When the 16R opening pattern 2 is activated, a predetermined number (10 balls) can be entered in any long opening unit game L, while to the big winning opening 64 in any short opening unit game S. Is not expected, and the player can actually get 8 rounds of profit.

  FIG. 90C shows the 16R opening pattern 3. The 16R opening pattern 3 is an operation pattern in which the short opening round game S is executed 8 times after the long opening round game L is executed 4 times. When this 16R opening pattern 3 is activated, a prescribed number (10 balls) can be entered in any long open round game L, while to the big prize opening 64 in any short open unit game S. Can't be expected, and the player can actually get 4 rounds of profit.

  FIG. 90 (D) shows the 16R opening pattern 4. The 16R opening pattern 4 is an operation pattern in which the short opening unit game S is executed 16 times. When the 16R opening pattern 4 is activated, it is difficult to enter the ball in any of the short opening round games S, and it is difficult for the player to get a ball.

  Next, various winning effects in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a table for explaining the types of winning effects in the seventh embodiment. In this example, in a special gaming state, a predetermined winning effect is generated when a gaming ball enters the big winning opening 64. As shown in FIG. 91, the winning effect in this example includes a first normal winning effect, a second normal winning effect, an over winning effect, and a short open winning effect.

  The “first normal prize” is a game ball entered within a specified number to the big prize opening 64 in the long open round game L, and the game ball is detected by the first detection sensor. Say. The “second normal prize” is a game ball entered within a specified number to the big prize opening 64 in the long open round game L, and the game ball is detected by the second detection sensor. This is the case.

  The “over winning” is the number of game balls (in this example, the eleventh and subsequent game balls) exceeding the specified number in the large winning opening 64 in the long open round game L. The case where it is detected by either the detection sensor or the second detection sensor. As an example of this over winning, even if the game ball of the 10th count reaches the big winning opening switch 641 in the big winning opening 64, even if the subsequent gaming ball does not reach the big winning opening switch 641, it is a big win. If there is a situation in which a ball is entered in the mouth 64, the big prize opening 64 is closed by detecting the interval period (the tenth count is detected by the big prize opening switch 641, and even after the closing, the big prize opening switch 641 is closed. In the period during which the detection of the game ball is valid), it is considered that the player has entered the ball even if the big prize opening 64 is closed (that is, it becomes a target for a prize ball).

  “Short-opening winning” means that in the short-opening round game S, a game ball enters the large winning opening 64 in a short opening state where it is difficult or impossible to enter the large winning opening 64. A sphere that is detected by either the first detection sensor or the second detection sensor.

  The main control board 100 (entrance determination means 110) receives detection information from the big prize opening switch 642 (first detection sensor, second detection sensor) during execution of the long open round game L or the short open round game S. Based on this, various production control commands are generated and transmitted to the production control board 200. Specifically, during the execution of one long open round game L, every time a game ball is detected until the number of balls entered into the big prize opening 64 reaches a specified number (10 balls). If it is detected by the first detection sensor, an effect control command including the first normal winning information (referred to as “first normal winning command”) is generated, and if detected by the second detection sensor, the second normal winning prize is generated. An effect control command including information (referred to as “second normal winning command”) is generated. In addition, during the execution of one long open unit game L, if there are game balls that exceed the specified number (10 balls), the over winning information is included regardless of the detection by any winning sensor. An effect control command (referred to as “over winning command”) is generated. Furthermore, during the execution of one short open round game S, if there is a ball entering the big winning opening 64, an effect control command including short open winning information (“ A short open winning command "). As a modification of the above, whether the winning command is shared (including information indicating whether the first winning sensor 79a or the second winning sensor 79b has detected a winning of a game ball) and is an over winning? It may be configured so that the effect control board 200 side determines whether or not the winning is in the long open or short open state.

  Each time the effect control board 200 (the jackpot effect determining means 227) receives various winning effect commands from the main control board 100, the contents of the winning effect according to the type of the winning effect command are determined, and the winning effect is determined. Control execution. In this example, four types of winning effects are prepared as described above, and will be described below in order. Note that there may be four or more types of winning effects. For example, a further winning effect type may be provided by combining at least two of the basic effects, the additional effects, and the special effects. Specifically, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a winning effect exemplified below may be included. First, in the short open round game S, when the winning of the game ball is detected by the second winning sensor 79b, a winning effect consisting of a basic effect, an additional effect, or a winning effect consisting of a basic effect, an additional effect and a special effect is performed. It may be generated. In addition, in the long open round game L, when an over winning is detected by the second winning sensor 79b, a winning effect including a basic effect, an additional effect, and a special effect may be generated. In any situation, the basic performance may be omitted.

  First, in the first normal winning effect, every time the first normal winning command is received from the main control board 100 during the execution of the long open round game L, the base game is entered as a basic effect on the screen. An image for notifying the number and the number of winning prize balls is displayed.

  Subsequently, in the second normal winning effect, every time a second normal winning command is received from the main control board 100 during the execution of the long open round game L, in addition to the basic effect, an effect display is provided as an additional effect. Character information “Take!” Is displayed on the device 70.

  Of the two winning sensors, the first normal winning effect and the second normal winning effect are divided depending on which one of the winning sensors detects the winning to the big winning opening 64. The reason is as follows. In other words, in a normal situation, game balls that have flowed down to the big winning opening 64 mostly enter the upstream first winning opening 709a and are detected by the first winning sensor 79a. In such a case, a basic effect associated with winning a prize at the big prize opening 64 should be generated. On the other hand, a game ball that has flowed down to the vicinity of the grand prize winning opening 64 just before the end of a certain round game is closed immediately before the first entrance 709a and cannot enter the first entrance 709a. Even if it is a case (that is, when it is not detected by the 1st winning sensor 79a), when the next round game is started after an interval period, the game ball is connected to the 1st entrance 709a and the 2nd If it remains between the entrance 710b, the game ball is likely to enter the second entrance 710b and be detected by the second winning sensor 79b. Therefore, in the big winning device 700 in this example, even if a game ball cannot enter the first entrance 709a in a certain round game and once misses a win, the game ball will be used in the next round game. It is possible to enter the second entrance 710b to secure a prize. In that case, an additional effect is generated in addition to the basic effect, and a large winning opening that spans between the previous and next rounds. This is because it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and satisfaction by notifying the player that a winning to 64 has occurred.

  Next, in the over winning effect, every time an over winning command is received from the main control board 100 during the execution of the long open round game L, in addition to the above basic effects, the effect display device 70 displays “GET”. "Is displayed, and a special sound effect is generated by the speaker 11.

  Further, in the short opening winning effect, every time a short opening winning command is received from the main control board 100 during execution of the short opening round game S, in addition to the basic effect described above, the effect display device 70 is used as a special effect. Character information “GET!” Is displayed and a special sound effect is generated by the speaker 11. The special effect may be only one of the display of the character information and the generation of the sound effect.

  In other words, in this modification, the over winning effect and the short open winning effect are combined in the same special effect. In both cases, it is possible to enter the grand prize opening 64 by intentional operation or an accidental phenomenon while the possibility of entering the grand prize opening 64 is extremely low. This is because they share the same special effects, so it is possible to achieve uniformity as a production effect. This also prevents wasteful consumption of the limited hardware resources of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to do. Of course, the over-winning effect and the in-count prize-winning effect may be effects of different display modes. However, when the grand prize opening 64 is long open, a special effect is not generated by winning in the count (even if the special effect is generated, it is not a special sound effect but an effect of a normal sound effect level). . Note that the big prize opening device 700 exemplified in the above-described embodiment is easier to win than the conventional door-type big prize device (door-type attacker) even when the opening is short, so the short opening when the opening is short. An open prize production is easily performed.

  As described above, according to the seventh embodiment, when a game ball wins a big winning opening during execution of a special game, depending on the type of round game at the time of winning, the number of game balls counted, the type of detection sensor, and the like. By differentiating the direction of the winning effect and giving the winning effect variations (diversity), the effect of the special game can be enhanced, and the player is satisfied with winning the prize in special situations. A feeling can be heightened and, as a result, the interest property of a game can be improved.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, only four types of 16R opening patterns corresponding to 16R special games are illustrated as the operation patterns of the big prize opening 64, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 8R special games are not limited thereto. A plurality of types of operation patterns such as a corresponding 8R opening pattern and a 2R opening pattern corresponding to 2R special games may be prepared. As an example, 1) 16R opening pattern 1: all long opening round game L, 2) 16R opening pattern 2: long opening round game L up to 8R, the remaining 8R is short opening round game S, 3) 16R opening pattern 3: 4R is the long open round game L and the remaining 12R is the short open round game S, 4) 8R open pattern 1: all long open round game L, 5) 8R open pattern 2: 4R is the long open round game L, and the remaining 4R is short Open unit game S, 6) 8R open pattern 3: all short open round game S, 7) 2R open pattern: all short open round game S. In the seventh embodiment described above, the slide-type attacker has been described as an example. However, other types such as a conventional tilt-type attacker and a velo-type attacker that can take a state of protruding from the board surface and a state of being retracted are available. It may be an attacker.

  In the gaming machine (ST machine) according to the seventh embodiment described above, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is shifted to the probability changing state, that is, when the transition is made to the ST period limited to the predetermined number of times, Throughout the entire period, the variation pattern selection state is the high probability shortening variation state β. However, in the gaming machine (ST machine) of this modification, the variation pattern selection state during the ST period is the high probability shortening variation state β1, the high probability reduction variation state β. It may be configured from the probability shortening variation state β2, the high probability shortening variation state β3, and the like, and the variation pattern selection state may be sequentially switched in a plurality of stages based on the number of special symbol variations. In this ST period (for example, 100 times), the high probability shortening variation state β1 is set when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 1 to 30 times (first ST period), and the high probability shortening variation state β2 is the variation of the special symbol. It is set when the number of times is 31 to 90 times (second ST period), and the high probability reduced fluctuation state β3 is set when the number of times the special symbol is changed is 91 to 100 times (third ST period). A shortened variation pattern table (a special symbol variation pattern table) referred to during the ST period includes a limited frequency table 1, a limited frequency table 2, and a limited frequency table 3. Specifically, when the variation pattern selection state is the high probability shortened variation state β1, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to. When the variation pattern selection state is the high variation shortened variation state β2, the limited frequency table 2 is referenced, and the high probability shortened variation state When γ, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to. That is, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to when the count value of the ST number is in the first stage range (1 to 30 times), and the limited frequency table 2 is in the second stage range (31 to 90 times). The limited frequency table 3 is referred to when the count value is in the third stage range (91 to 100 times). In other words, when the transition to the probability change state (excluding the latent probability change state) is made after the special game is over, the reference variation pattern table is based on the special symbol variation count (ST count counter). It may be configured to be switched in the order of “limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 3”.

[Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment has basically the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  As with the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment determines whether or not the game ball wins a specific area (so-called V area) provided in the big winning opening during execution of the special game. Accordingly, it is configured as a so-called ball accuracy type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state after the special game ends. In this example, the state that the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated continues until the special symbol variation display count reaches the predetermined end count (ST count) from the end of the special game ( However, if the next jackpot occurs before reaching the upper limit of the number of STs, the probability variation function is temporarily terminated before the upper limit is reached, but after the special game related to the jackpot is finished. Employs a so-called ST machine (number cut probability variation machine), in which the probability variation function can be operated again with the ST number as the upper limit.

  FIG. 92 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine PM of the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, only a single big prize opening 65 (a so-called ball-like attacker with a so-called V area) is mounted in the game area PA. That is, also in the eighth embodiment, the big prize opening 65 is opened (long open or short open) in all rounds of the special game. The configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the above-described second embodiment (see FIG. 52), and therefore, a duplicate description is omitted here.

  In the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the general winning openings 51 to 53 are provided in the left-handed area of the gaming area PA, and the general winning opening 54 is provided in the right-handed area of the gaming area PA. The general winning openings 51 to 53 are arranged in a left-handed area that is a board surface area corresponding to left-handed, and game balls that have flowed down the left-handed area can enter. The general winning ports 51 to 53 are provided with a general winning port switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general winning opening switch 511 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) of the three general winning openings 51 to 53 from the viewpoint of cost reduction or the like, and any of the general winning openings 51 to 53 receives a game ball. A sphere can also be detected. On the other hand, the general winning opening 54 is disposed in a right-handed area that is a board surface area corresponding to right-handed, and game balls that have flowed down the right-handed area can enter. The general winning opening 54 includes a general winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball. Note that game balls entering each of the general winning holes 51 to 54 do not trigger special symbols or regular symbols, but as with other winning holes (except for the operation gate 53) It becomes. As a modification, the general winning port 54 may be disposed upstream of the large winning port 65, and is disposed upstream of the second starting port 62 (ordinary electric accessory 622). May be. Of course, the general winning port 54 may be disposed upstream of both the large winning port 65 and the second starting port 62 (ordinary electric accessory 622). As an arrangement of these winning holes, an arrangement of “large winning port 65 → general winning port 54 → second starting port 62” in order from the upstream may be used, and “second starting port 62 → general winning port 54” from the upstream. → "Big prize opening 65" may be arranged.

  In the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the first start port 61 and the second start port 62 are “3” as the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) to be paid out when one game ball enters each prize opening. "Piece", "5" are set for the general winning openings 51 to 54, and "10" are set for the large winning opening 65. The number of unit prize balls is not limited to that exemplified in the eighth embodiment, and other number of unit prize balls may be applied. For example, as the number of unit prize balls, the first start port 61 may be “4”, the second start port 62 may be “1”, and the general winning ports 51 to 54 may be “3”. In addition, as the number of unit winning balls, the left winning area general winning openings 51 to 53 are “5”, the right winning area general winning opening 54 is “3”, etc. The number of unit prize balls may be different depending on the situation.

  Like the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment employs so-called preferential digestion that preferentially executes the variation display of the second special symbol over the variation display of the first special symbol. Yes. Therefore, while the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is present, the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested regardless of the presence of the operation reservation ball of the first special symbol. .

  Next, the basic configuration related to the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described in order.

  First, the special symbol winning / failing determination (big hit lottery) in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol winning / losing lottery table. In the figure, (A) is referred to when the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state), and (B) is referred to when the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state). In this special symbol success / failure lottery table, random values per special symbol are associated with the results of the success / failure determination (big hit, off). It is prescribed. As can be seen from FIG. 94, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state), when the random number value per special symbol falls within the range of “0-689”, the result of the determination is a big hit. Therefore, the big hit probability when the gaming state is the normal state is about 1/95. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), when the symbol random number per special symbol corresponds to “0 to 6553”, the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit. Therefore, the big hit probability when the gaming state is a probable change state is about 1/10. That is, when the probability changing function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot probability changes from a low probability (about 1/95) to a high probability (about 1/10).

  Next, the jackpot type (breakdown breakdown) in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot breakdown in the special symbol lottery in the thirteenth embodiment.

  FIG. 94 (A) is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the thirteenth embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, a symbol group and a jackpot type are associated with a symbol random value per special symbol (in this example, description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per first special symbol, as five types of symbol groups (big hit types), symbol group A (specific big hit with 16R condition), symbol group B (normal big hit with 6R condition), symbol group C (with 6R condition) Normal jackpot 2), symbol group D (normal jackpot 1 with 5R condition), and symbol group E (normal jackpot 2 with 5R condition) are set. Here, among the multiple types of big hit types, “specific big hit with 16R condition” corresponds to “long open big hit” as the big hit attribute in the fifth embodiment, “normal big hit with 6R condition”, “6R condition” “Regular big hit with 2”, “Normal big hit with 5R condition” and “Normal big hit with 5R condition” correspond to “short open big hit” in the fifth embodiment. In the figure, the number of rounds of special games related to each jackpot type is added for reference.

  FIG. 94 (B) is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the eighth embodiment. In the symbol table per second special symbol, a symbol group and a jackpot type are associated with a symbol random value per special symbol (in this example, description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per second special symbol, the symbol group F (specific big hit with 16R condition), symbol group G (specific big hit with 12R condition), symbol group H (specific with 8R condition) as five types of symbol groups (big hit type) Big jackpot), symbol group I (specific jackpot with 4R condition), and symbol group J (specific jackpot with 2R condition) are set. Here, as the types of big hits, “specific big hit with 16R condition”, “specific big hit with 12R condition”, “specific big hit with 8R condition”, “specific big hit with 4R condition”, “specific big hit with 2R condition” This corresponds to the “long open big hit” in the fifth embodiment. In the figure, the number of rounds of special games related to each jackpot type is added for reference.

  The above jackpot type is roughly classified into “conditional special jackpot” and “conditional regular jackpot” as jackpot attributes. “Conditional special big hit” makes it easy for game balls to enter the specific area 658 by allowing the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 to be long open (including one or more short releases) in a specific round. Or it is set to be possible and basically means a big hit that is determined to be a specific big hit (probable big hit) on condition that a game ball enters the specific area 658. The reason for “conditional” is that even if the specific area 658 is a big hit with a long opening, if the game ball does not actually enter the specific area 658, the result is a normal big hit (non-probable big hit). Because there is a possibility of becoming. On the other hand, the “conditional normal big hit” means that the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are not opened for a long time in a specific round, but are opened shortly (including a plurality of short releases) so that a game ball to the specific area 658 is obtained. Is a big hit that is determined to be a normal big hit (non-probable big hit) on condition that the game ball does not enter the specific area 658. The reason for “conditional” is that even if the specific area 658 is a big hit with a short opening, when a game ball actually enters the specific area 658, there is a possibility that it will eventually become a specific big hit (probable big hit) Because there is. Hereinafter, a game ball entering a specific area 658 during a special game is also referred to as a “V prize”. Here, as a modified example, when a spec that does not include the specific area 658 (V area) (a spec that is not a so-called ball type machine) is adopted, as a big hit attribute in this example, “conditional big hit” is “specific big hit” ”Or“ probable variation big hit ”, and“ conditional normal big hit ”may correspond to“ normal big hit ”or“ non-probable big hit ”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability for the conditional special jackpot is set to “0.5%”, and the winning probability for the conditional normal jackpot is set to “99.5”. % ". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), in the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the conditional special jackpot is set to “100%”. In other words, when a big win occurs in the second special symbol lottery, it is definitive to always win a conditional special big win regardless of the type of the big win. Therefore, it is more likely to win a conditional special big hit (equivalent to a promising big hit) if a big win occurs in the second special symbol lottery than if a big win occurs in the first special symbol lottery. An advantageous gaming state (high probability state) is obtained after the end of.

  Next, the special winning opening operation pattern in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram showing a special winning opening operating pattern table in the eighth embodiment.

  In the big winning opening operation pattern table, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 in each round is determined for each of the above big hit types. According to the opening mode of the big prize opening 65 and the specific area 658, the opening time is set to a relatively long time (long opening mode) and the opening time is relatively set according to the length of the opening time. And short opening (short opening mode) set in a short time. In the figure, “L” means long open and “S” means short open, as the opening mode of the big prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 in each round. The opening time of the long opening is a time width in which the number of game balls entering the grand prize opening 65 (specific area 658) may reach the specified count number (10 balls), and “28.000 seconds” is Is set. On the other hand, the short opening time is a time width in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter the big winning opening 65 (specific area 658), and “0.052 seconds” is set. In the following, a round game including a long open (at least one long open) as a round game is referred to as a “long open round” and includes a short open (at least one short open). Round games that do not include are called “short open round games”. In this way, a long open round game is a round game that can substantially win a game, so the number of real rounds per jackpot corresponds to the number of executions of the long open round game set for that special game. Yes.

  In this example, regardless of which jackpot type is won, in the specific round of the special game, there is a probability change prize (probability change transition) depending on whether the game ball enters the specific area 658 or not. Sorted. In this specific round, the opening operation of the special winning opening 65 and the opening operation of the specific area 658 are synchronized (linked), and the specific area 658 is opened when the special winning opening 65 is opened (large winning opening). The specific area 658 is opened after the time 65 is opened), and the specific area 658 is closed when the special prize opening 65 is closed (the specific area 658 after the big prize opening 65 is closed). Will be closed). Therefore, basically, when the special winning opening 65 is opened long, the specific area 658 is also opened long, and when the special winning opening 65 is opened short, the specific area 658 is also opened short. In this example, this specific round is set to the second round regardless of any special winning opening operation pattern. However, in one special game, the number of executions of the specific round is not limited to one, and may be set continuously or intermittently a plurality of times.

  As shown in FIG. 95, when the “special jackpot with 16R condition” is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the big winning opening 65 is opened long in all rounds of the special game. Therefore, the specific jackpot with 16R condition is a jackpot equivalent to 16 rounds. In the specific round, the big prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened for a long time, so that it is easy or possible to enter the game ball in the specific area 658 in the round.

  In the first special symbol lottery, if you win “6R conditional regular big hit 1” or “6R conditional regular big hit 2”, the special winning opening 65 will be short-opened in the first to third rounds of the first half of the special game. In the latter half of the fourth to sixth rounds, the big prize opening 65 is opened long. Therefore, the normal big hits 1 and 2 with the 6R condition are big hits equivalent to three rounds. Note that, in the specific round, the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are short-opened, so that it is difficult or substantially impossible to enter the game ball in the specific area 658 in the round.

  In the first special symbol lottery, if you win “1R with a 5R condition” or “2 with a 5R condition”, the grand prize opening 65 will be short-opened in the first and second rounds of the first half of the special game. In the latter half of the third to fifth rounds, the big prize opening 65 is opened long. Therefore, the normal big hits 1 and 2 with a 5R condition are big hits equivalent to three rounds. Note that, in the specific round, the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are short-opened, so that it is difficult or substantially impossible to enter the game ball in the specific area 658 in the round.

  In the case of winning the “special jackpot with 12R condition” in the second special symbol lottery, the big winning opening 65 is long open in all rounds of the special game. Therefore, the 12R specific special big hit is a big hit equivalent to 12 rounds. In the specific round, the big prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened for a long time, so that it is easy or possible to enter the game ball in the specific area 658 in the round.

  In the case of winning the “special jackpot with 8R condition” in the second special symbol lottery, the big winning opening 65 is long open in all rounds of the special game. Therefore, the specific big hit with 8R condition is a big hit equivalent to eight rounds. In the specific round, the big prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened for a long time, so that it is easy or possible to enter the game ball in the specific area 658 in the round.

  In the case of winning the “special jackpot with 4R condition” in the second special symbol lottery, the big winning opening 65 is long open in all rounds of the special game. Therefore, the specific big hit with 4R condition is a big hit equivalent to substantially four rounds. In the specific round, the big prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened for a long time, so that it is easy or possible to enter the game ball in the specific area 658 in the round.

  In the case of winning the “special jackpot with 2R condition” in the second special symbol lottery, the big winning opening 65 is long open in all rounds of the special game. Therefore, the 2R conditional special jackpot is a jackpot equivalent to two rounds. In the specific round, the big prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened for a long time, so that it is easy or possible to enter the game ball in the specific area 658 in the round.

  Next, the gaming state in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram showing a gaming state setting table in the eighth embodiment. In the game state setting table, for each jackpot type, the number of times that the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated after the end of the special game (referred to as “the number of probability variation operations”), and the special symbol variation time shortening function (and Is associated with the number of times that the “Chu support function” is activated (referred to as “the number of short-time actuations”). In this example, the game state types are as follows: 1) The game state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol, the special symbol variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function are activated is “probability variation state” or “probability variation game state”. 2) A gaming state in which only the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are operated is referred to as a “short-time state” or a “short-time gaming state”, and 3) a state in which all the functions are not operated. This is referred to as “normal state” or “normal gaming state”. It can be said that both the “probability change state” and the “short time state” are advantageous game states for the player as compared to the “normal state”. In this example, the number of probability change operations and the number of short-time operations given when a big hit occurs depends on the type of big hit (the type of symbol group), the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, and the presence or absence of a V prize during a special game. Set accordingly.

  If the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, and if you win a V during that special game, regardless of the type of jackpot and the game status at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of certain variable operations will be "10 times" “100 times” is set. On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, and if the V game is not won during that special game, regardless of the big win type and the game status at the time of the big win, the number of positive variation operations will not be granted and the big win “30 times” or “100 times” is set as the number of short-time operations depending on the type and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. That is, if the V game is not won during the special game, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state, and the big hit type is a specific big hit with a 16R condition, a normal big hit with a 6R condition, or a normal big hit with a 5R condition. If the number of short-time operations is set to “100”, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state and the big hit type is the normal big hit 2 with the 6R condition or the normal big hit 2 with the 5R condition In addition, “30 times” is set as the short-time operation count. In addition, if the V-winning is not won during the special game and the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the short-time state or the certainty change state, “100 times” is set as the short-time operation count regardless of the type of the big hit.

  If you win a big win in the second special symbol lottery, if you win V during that special game, regardless of the big win type and the game state at the time of winning the big win, “10 times” as the probability variation operation number, “100 times” is set. On the other hand, if you win a big win in the second special symbol lottery and you do not win a V in the specific round of that special game, the number of chances of a variable operation will not be granted regardless of the type of the big win and the game status at the time of the big win In addition, “100 times” is set as the short-time operation count.

  Next, the variation pattern selection state in the eighth embodiment will be described. 97A is a schematic diagram showing a selection state transition pattern table in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 97B is a schematic diagram showing a selection state setting table in the eighth embodiment.

  As described above, the variation pattern selection state is one of selection conditions referred to when a variation pattern (variation pattern table) is selected. In this example, 11 types of selection states 0 to 10 are set as the variation pattern selection state. The selection state 0 is a variation pattern selection state set in a game state (normal state) in which none of the special symbol probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function is operating. The selection states 1 to 10 are variation pattern selection states set in a gaming state (probability variation state or time-short state) in which at least the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are operating. Therefore, after the end of the special game, any of the selection states 1 to 10 is set in the variable display within the above-mentioned short-time operation count (30 times or 100 times), and the above-mentioned short-time operation frequency (30 times or 100 times) In the outside variation display, the selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 97A, three types of selection state transition patterns X, Y, and Z in which the order of transition of the variation pattern selection state is defined are prepared. The selection state transition patterns X and Y are transition patterns corresponding to the number of time reductions of 100 times, and the selection state transition pattern Z is a transition pattern corresponding to the number of time reductions of 30 times. In the figure, as the variation pattern selection state, the transition of the selection states 1 to 10 within the above-mentioned number of times (30 times or 100 times) is shown. In the case of returning to the normal state), the selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs. That is, after the gaming state transitions to the normal state, the variation pattern selection state does not transition. However, as a modification, even when the gaming state is the normal state, the selected state 0-1 is set for 20 rotations after the transition to the normal state, and the selected state 0-2 is set thereafter. As described above, the variation pattern selection state may be changed even during stay in the normal state. The selection state transition pattern indicates a transition tendency of the variation pattern selection state, but the transition tendency may include “the variation pattern selection state does not transition”. That is, as the selected state transition pattern, a pattern (for example, selected state transition pattern A) in which the variation pattern selection state does not transition even once may be prepared.

  The selected state transition pattern X is selected state 3 (1 time) → selected state 4 (1 time) → selected state 5 (1 time) → selected state 6 (6 times) in the change display of 100 rotations after the end of the special game. ) → selection state 7 (once) → selection state 8 (30 times) → selection state 9 (59 times) → selection state 10 (once) in this order. When selection state 10 ends, selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs. Here, in the selection state 8 and the selection state 9, at least a part of the plurality of types of notice effects and the plurality of types of reach effects (SP reach effects) is common (in any selected state). It can also occur when you are staying), but the frequency of occurrence or expectation of jackpot is set differently.

  The selection state transition pattern Y is selected state 1 (29 times) → selection state 2 (one time) → selection state 1 (69 times) → selection state 2 (one time) in the display of fluctuations of 100 rotations after the end of the special game. ), The variation pattern selection state transitions. When selection state 10 ends, selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs.

  In the selected state transition pattern Z, the variation pattern selection state transitions in the order of selection state 1 (29 times) → selection state 2 (one time) in the 30-turn variation display after the end of the special game. When selection state 10 ends, selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (B), in the selection state setting table, a selection state transition pattern is associated with each jackpot type (symbol group). In this example, the selection state transition pattern is set according to the jackpot type (symbol group), the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the presence / absence of a V prize during a special game. Here, regardless of whether the current game state is a probability change state or a time reduction state, the selection states 3 to 7 in the selection state transition pattern X are the same, but the probability change selection states 3A to 7A and the time reduction state are common. The selection states 3B to 7B may be prepared, and the selection state may be branched according to the gaming state (that is, the transition timing is the same regardless of the gaming state, but the reference destination variation pattern table is different) Also good). In this case, some or all of the variation patterns that are selection candidates may be common to the selection states 3A to 7A for probability variation and the selection states 3B to 7B for time reduction.

  Specifically, if you win a special jackpot with a 16R condition in the first special symbol lottery, the selected state transition pattern X is always set regardless of the gaming status at the time of winning the jackpot and whether or not there is a V prize in the special game. Is done. In addition, if you win the 1st regular big hit with 6R condition or the 1st normal big hit with 5R condition in the 1st special symbol lottery, if you win V during special game, regardless of the game state at the time of the big win, A selected state transition pattern X is set. On the other hand, in the first special symbol lottery, if you win 1 normal bonus with 6R conditions or 1 normal bonus with 5R conditions, if you do not win V during special game, the game state at the time of winning the big prize is normal If there is, the selection state transition pattern Y is set, and if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the short-time state or the probability variation state, the selection state transition pattern X is set. Also, if you win the 2nd regular jackpot with 6R condition or the 2nd regular jackpot with 5R condition in the first special symbol lottery, if you win V during the special game, regardless of the gaming status at the time of the big win, A selected state transition pattern X is set. On the other hand, in the first special symbol lottery, if the 6R condition regular big hit 2 or 5R condition regular big hit 2 is won and the V is not won during the special game, the game state at the time of the big win is the normal state. If there is, the selection state transition pattern Z is set, and if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the short-time state or the probability variation state, the selection state transition pattern X is set.

  On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, one of the specified special big hits (16R conditional special big hit, 12R conditional special big hit, 8R conditional special big hit, 4R conditional special big hit, 2R conditional special big hit) In this case, the selected state transition pattern X is always set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit and the presence / absence of the V prize during the special game.

  Here, the way of transition of the variation pattern selection state can be said as follows when it is seen for each gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. First, when the game state is the normal state, when a conditional special jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, basically a V winning is generated during the special game and the selected state transition pattern X is set. Is done. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the conditional special jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, basically, the selected state transition pattern Y or A selected state transition pattern Z is set. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state and a big hit occurs in the first special symbol, the special game ends depending on whether the big hit type is a conditional special big hit or a conditional normal big hit The way of transition of the variation pattern selection state from the later to the 30th variation display can be different. However, the selected state transition patterns Y and Z have the same way of transition of the variation pattern selection state from the end of the special game to the 30th variation display.

  In addition, when the game state is a short-time state or a probable change state, when a big win occurs in the first special symbol, the selected state transition pattern X is always regardless of the big hit type and the presence or absence of a V prize in the special game. Is set, the way of transition of the variation pattern selection state from the end of the special game to the 100th variation display is the same.

  In any game state, when a big win occurs in the second special symbol, the selected state transition pattern X is always set regardless of the type of the big win and the presence or absence of a V prize during the special game. Therefore, the transition method of the variation pattern selection state from the end of the special game to the variation display of 100 times is the same.

  Here, in the 100-time variation display in which the variation pattern selection state transitions according to the selection state transition pattern X, the first-half variation display stays in the probability variation state, and the latter-half 90 variation display stays in the time-short state. . At this time, the fluctuation display in the first half 10 staying in the probability variation state, such as “selection state 3” → “selection state 4” → “selection state 5” → “selection state 6” → “selection state 7” The pattern selection state transits 4 times. On the other hand, in the second half of the fluctuation display staying in the short-time state, the fluctuation pattern selection state transits twice, such as “selection state 8” → “selection state 9” → “selection state 10”. Thus, the variation display count (10 times) when staying in the probability variation state is set to be smaller than the variation display count (90 times) when staying in the short-time state. The number of times the state transitions (4 times) is set to be larger than the number of times the variation pattern selection state transitions (2 times) in the short time state. As a modification, the number of transitions of the variation pattern selection state in the first half 10 and the number of transitions of the variation pattern selection state in the second half 90 may be reversed. That is, the number of transitions of the variation pattern selection state in the first half 10 (probability variation state) may be configured to be smaller than the number of transitions of the variation pattern selection state in the second half 90 times (short-time state). Good.

  Next, a special symbol variation pattern according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 to FIG. 108 are schematic views showing special symbol variation pattern tables in the eighth embodiment.

  The special symbol variation pattern table is set according to the type of variation pattern selection state during the current stay. In this example, a plurality of types of variation pattern tables 0 to 10 are prepared corresponding to the above variation pattern selection states (selection states 0 to 10). That is, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern selection state currently staying is referred to. Then, on the basis of the acquired special symbol variation pattern random value, jackpot type, number of activated balls, etc., one of the variation patterns set in the variation pattern table is selected. In the figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience. Actually, however, a decision value (range of random values) for determining the variation pattern is set based on the acquired special symbol variation pattern random value. The variation pattern is selected on the basis of which judgment unit the special symbol variation pattern random number value belongs to. Each variation pattern table has different reference fields for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and even if the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired, different variation patterns are selected. To be able to be. Here, if the number of the operation reservation balls described in each figure ("hold 0", "hold 1-2", "hold 3") is the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, It means the number of working reserve balls of the first special symbol (the number of working reserve balls after holding digestion), and if the variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of working reserve balls of the second special symbol (after holding digestion) Means the number of active holding balls. The number of the operation holding balls is the number of the operation holding balls existing at the time of the variation pattern lottery (at the start of the change display / after the hold digest) (the operation hold balls digested by the change display are not included). . As a modification thereof, the total value of the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

  Here, the variation effect of the decorative symbol performed in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. In FIGS. 98 to 108, the contents of the variation effect set corresponding to each variation pattern are described for reference. In the figure, “Very short fluctuation”, “short fluctuation”, and “normal fluctuation” are three lines of decorative symbols that change so that they do not go through the reach state and become “out of” with a so-called break. It is. Hereinafter, the super shortening variation, the shortening variation, and the normal variation are collectively referred to as “non-reach”. In this non-reach shift, the fluctuation modes differ from each other in that the fluctuation display stops in a shorter time than the normal fluctuation and the shorter fluctuation than the normal fluctuation in a shorter time. “N reach (N reach production)” is a state in which the same decorative symbol is stopped (reach state) in two columns (generally the left column and the right column) of the three columns of decorative symbols, and the remaining one column (reach state) In general, if a different decorative symbol stops in the middle row), it will be “out of”, and if the same decorative symbol stops in the remaining one row (generally the middle row), it will be “big hit”. . “SP Reach (SP Reach Production)” is a reach production with a relatively high expectation of big hits compared to the above-mentioned N Reach, and has developed from N Reach, for example, still images and moving images such as animation and live-action images are displayed. It is a production to be performed. In the variation pattern type in this example, the jackpot expectation is set higher in the order of non-reach <N reach <SP reach. Note that “N reach” in this example corresponds to “normal reach” in the above embodiment, and “SP reach” in this example corresponds to “super reach” in the above embodiment. Further, a plurality of types of N reach and SP reach may be prepared in each variation pattern table. In this case, it is preferable that “the number of types of N reach” <“the number of types of SP reach”. In addition, in at least one of the fluctuation pattern selection states, there is an SP reach (ie, an SP reach corresponding to 4 rounds or 8 rounds or more) in which 4 rounds or 8 rounds or more are determined as the number of rounds acquired May be. That is, it may be determined that the seven-star effect does not occur or the re-lottery effect occurs when the SP reach (SP reach Z as an example) occurs.

  Although omitted from FIGS. 98 to 108, a pseudo continuous variation effect (abbreviated as “pseudo train” for short) may be executed in the decorative symbol variation display. “Pseudo-continuous variation effect (pseudo-continuous)” makes it possible to display a fluctuating display multiple times in a pseudo manner by temporarily displaying a decorative symbol (pseudo-stop) during a single variation display of the decorative symbol. It is a production to show. This quasi-continuous variation effect has a configuration in which a re-variation display for starting re-variation is executed once or more after all three rows of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop) in a pseudo manner. In the variable display including the reach effect, the pseudo-ream is executed and displayed at the stage before the reach state is formed, and the higher the number of re-variable display (pseudo-ream), the higher the expectation of reach effect is expected. It can be done. In this example, “pseudo 1” means that one re-variation display (pseudo-continuous) is performed, “pseudo 2” means that two re-variable display (pseudo-continuous) is performed, and “pseudo 3”. Means that re-variable display (pseudo-continuous) is performed three times. In this example, the larger the number of pseudo-runs, that is, the big hit expectation is set in the order of pseudo-run 1 <pseudo-run 2 <pseudo-run 3. In addition, among the three rows of decorative symbols, the left row and right row decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach state (tempe), and the left row and right row decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the non-reach state. It is set so that the expected degree of jackpot is higher than the case. In this example, in addition to the various notice effects exemplified in the first embodiment (for example, the SU notice effect and the group notice effect) as an effect executed during the variation display of the decorative symbols, “reach” The “seven-star effect”, “re-lottery effect”, “final variation effect”, “special continuous effect”, “special jackpot effect”, and the like are set.

(Variation pattern table 0)
FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 0. FIG. The variation pattern table 0 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state that is currently staying is the selection state 0. The variation pattern table 0 is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss). In the figure, “SP reach A” is a story-based reach production in which a story associated with a predetermined character is developed. “Seven-star production” means that a winning hit was made by the appearance of a predetermined logo (letters of “7-star charge”) immediately after the execution of a reach-out effect that suggests that the result of the judgment is wrong. It is a rebirth production.

  The variation pattern table 0 for loss includes variation patterns PH0-1 (super shortened), PH0-2 (shortened), PH0-3 (normal), PH0-4 (N reach), PH0-5 (SP reach A). Is set. Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination is out of place, the fluctuation patterns PH0-1 (super shortened), PH0-2 (shortened), PH0-3 (normal), PH0-4 (N reach) , PH0-5 (SP reach A) is selected. At this time, if the result of the first special symbol determination is out of place, the table contents of the reference destination are set differently according to the number of reserved balls, and the special symbol variation pattern random number value is the same. However, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the variation pattern (super shortened variation or shortened variation) in which the variation time is set to be relatively short is more easily selected as the number of suspended balls is increased, and the variation time is relatively decreased as the number of activated balls is decreased. Long variation patterns (normal variation or N reach) are easily selected. On the other hand, when the result of the determination on whether the second special symbol is right or wrong is out of place, the variation pattern PH0-2 (shortened) or PH0-3 (normal) is selected. In other words, when the result of the second special symbol's success / failure determination is out of place, unlike the case where the result of the first special symbol's success / failure determination is out of place, the variation time is relatively independent of the number of suspended balls. Only a short variation pattern (shortened or normal) is selected. As a modification, when the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is wrong is out of the way, it does not depend on the number of pending operation of the second special symbol, and only the very short variation pattern is selected or the very short variation pattern is selected. It may be the most selectable (in that case, the selection ratio is the same regardless of the number of the operation reserved balls of the second special symbol).

  In the big hit variation pattern table 0, variation patterns PA0-1 (N reach), PA0-2 (SP reach A), PA0-3 (SP reach A → 7-star effect) are set. Here, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is successful is a big hit, the variation pattern PA0-1 (N reach) or PA0-2 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the big hit type. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit with a 16R condition, a specific big hit with a 12R condition, a specific big hit with an 8R condition, a specific big hit with a 4R condition, a variation pattern If PA0-2 (SP reach A) is selected and the big hit type is a specific big hit with 2R condition, the variation pattern PA0-3 (SP reach A → 7-star effect) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a table that varies depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss). In the figure, “SP reach B” is a mission that presents to the player a command with the content that the production result should exhibit a specific aspect as a pseudo condition for making the result of the determination of success or failure a big hit. Production. In the mission effect in this example, the command is an effect that the mission is successful (big hit) if the character selected by the player can defeat the enemy character, and the mission failure (out) if the enemy character is not defeated. “Seven Star Direction” means that a specified logo (letter “Nanasei Charge”) appears immediately after a team member defeated in the above mission direction and the mission failed (immediately after the execution of the mission effect out of Gase). This is a rebirth production showing that the big hit was won.

  In the variation pattern table 1 for loss, variation patterns PH1-1 (super shortened), PH1-2 (normal), and PH1-3 (SP reach B) are set. Here, when the result of the first special symbol determination is out of place, the variation pattern PH1-2 (normal) or PH1-3 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the number of operation-reserved balls. . That is, when the result of the first special symbol determination is out of date, the fluctuation pattern PH1-1 (super shortened) is not selected no matter how many operation-reserved balls are present. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is out of place, one of the variation patterns PH1-1 (super shortened), PH1-2 (normal), and PH1-3 (SP reach B) is selected. Is done. At this time, if the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is correct is out of order, the table contents of the reference destination are set to be different according to the number of the operation holding balls (specifically, depending on the presence or absence of the operation holding balls) Thus, even if the special symbol variation pattern random number values are the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern PH1-1 (super shortened) is not selected when the operation holding ball is not present, and only when the operation holding ball is present, the fluctuation pattern PH1-1 (super (Shortening) can be selected, so that a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time tends to be selected more easily when the operation holding ball is present than when the operation holding ball is present. .

  In the variation pattern table 1 for big hits, variation patterns PA1-1 (SP reach B) and PA1-2 (SP reach B → 7-star effect) are set. Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA1-1 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the big hit type. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit with a 16R condition, a specific big hit with a 12R condition, a specific big hit with an 8R condition, a specific big hit with a 4R condition, a variation pattern If PA1-1 (SP reach B) is selected and the big hit type is a specific big hit with 2R condition, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (SP reach B → 7-star effect) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss). In the figure, the “final variation effect A” is executed in the variation display of only one rotation staying in the selection state 2 as the variation pattern selection state (the variation display of the 30th rotation or the 100th rotation in the non-commissioned mission mode described later). This is a production. “Final change effect A (mode continuation / end)” is a shutter effect (the shutter image changes from an open state to a closed state to an open state in almost the entire area of the screen), and then the effect mode that is currently being executed (non-mission mission mode) ) Is a mode continuation effect that informs that it will continue after the next variable display, or a mode end effect that notifies that the currently executed effect mode (non-commissioned mission mode) ends with the current variable display. It is. That is, the “final variation effect A (mode continuation / end)” is an effect that indicates whether or not it is the final variation in the short time state (the last variation display). Specifically, if the current variation display is the variation display of the 30th rotation from the end of the special game, if the number of short operation times given at the time of winning the big hit is 100, “mode continuation effect” Is selected, and if the number of short operation times given at the time of winning the big hit is 30, the “mode end effect” is selected. On the other hand, if the current variation display is the variation display at the 100th rotation from the end of the special game, the number of short operation times given at the time of winning the big hit should be 100. Is selected. “Final change effect A (relief)” is a big hit when a premier character appears in this open state after a shutter effect (shutter image changes from open state to closed state to open state in almost the entire screen). This is a remedy effect that shows that it was won. “Final change effect A (seven stars)” is a shutter effect (the shutter image changes from the open state to the closed state to the open state in almost the entire area of the screen). ) Is a rebirth production showing that the big hit was won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the final variation effect A does not go through the shutter effect, but the effect such as reach establishment → SP reach B (→ seven star effect), that is, the same manner as the no-commission mission mode before the final change. Also good. Moreover, you may comprise so that either the winning way via a shutter effect and the said winning way may be selected by lottery.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 2 for deviation, a fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (final fluctuation effect A (continuation / end)) is set. Here, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct is out of the range, the variation pattern PH2-1 (final variation effect A (continuation / end)) is selected without depending on the number of reserved balls. Similarly, if the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is correct is out of place, the variation pattern PH2-1 (final variation effect A (continuation / end)) is selected without depending on the number of reserved balls. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of sync, only the variation pattern PH2-1 (final variation effect A (continuation / end)) is always selected. If the result of the first special symbol determination or the result of the second special symbol determination is out of place, it will always be a mode continuation effect or a mode end effect via the shutter effect, resulting in a relief effect or a seven-star effect. There is also no change production such as reach establishment → SP reach B.

  In the variation pattern table 2 for big hits, variation patterns PA2-1 (final variation effect A (relief)) and PA2-2 (final variation effect A (seven stars)) are set. Here, when the result of the determination whether or not the first special symbol is successful is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (final fluctuation effect A (relief)) is selected regardless of the type of the big hit. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit with a 16R condition, a specific big hit with a 12R condition, a specific big hit with an 8R condition, a specific big hit with a 4R condition, a variation pattern If PA2-1 (final variation effect A (relief)) is selected and the jackpot type is a specific jackpot with 2R conditions, the variation pattern PA2-2 (final variation effect A (seven stars)) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss). In the figure, the “special continuous effect” is an effect that is executed across one or a plurality of variable displays from the end of the special game. Note that the “special continuous effect” is essentially different from other effects (effects completed in one variation display described in the “effect content” column of FIGS. 98 to 108), one time or a plurality of times. Since it is an effect (moving image) displayed across the change display of the times, it is not the effect selected in the effect lottery at the start of the change, but it is like a background effect. In this example, the variation patterns selected in the selection states 3 to 5 (variation pattern tables 3 to 5) are all configured as variation patterns with special continuous effects. “Special jackpot effect” indicates that after the above-mentioned special continuous performance is finished, after the movable role 24 falls to the front of the screen and the winning of the jackpot is confirmed, the button operation is performed to respond to the jackpot type (special game type). This is an effect in which a count-up effect (round-up effect) is added, on which the number of award-scheduled winning balls (the number of award balls scheduled to be acquired by a player in a special game) is added.

  A variation pattern PH3-1 (special continuous effect) is set in the variation pattern table 3 for loss. Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol is wrong, the variation pattern PH3-1 (special continuous effect) is selected without depending on the number of reserved balls. Similarly, when the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is correct is out of place, the variation pattern PH3-1 (special continuous effect) is selected without depending on the number of the operation-reserved balls. That is, when the result of the determination on whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not right is selected, only the variation pattern PH3-1 (special continuous effect) is selected.

  On the other hand, a variation pattern PA3-1 (special continuous effect → special jackpot effect) is set in the variation pattern table 3 for the jackpot. Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the variation pattern PA3-1 (special continuous effect → special jackpot effect) is selected without depending on the jackpot type. Similarly, when the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-1 (special continuous effect → special big win effect) is selected without depending on the type of the big hit. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, only the variation pattern PA3-1 (special continuous effect → special big win effect) is always selected.

(Variation pattern table 4)
FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 4. The variation pattern table 4 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 4. The variation pattern table 4 is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss). In the figure, the “special continuous effect” and the “special jackpot effect” are the same as the effect contents described in the above-described variation pattern table 3 (FIG. 101), and therefore, redundant description is omitted here.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 4 for deviation, a fluctuation pattern PH4-1 (special continuous effect) is set. Here, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct is out of place, the variation pattern PH4-1 (special continuous effect) is selected without depending on the number of reserved balls. Similarly, if the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is correct is out of place, the variation pattern PH4-1 (special continuous effect) is selected without depending on the number of operation-reserved balls. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of sync, only the variation pattern PH4-1 (special continuous effect) is always selected.

  On the other hand, a variation pattern PA4-1 (special continuous effect) is set in the variation pattern table 4 for big hits. Here, when the result of the determination on whether or not the first special symbol is successful is a big hit, the variation pattern PA4-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is selected without depending on the type of the big hit. Similarly, when the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA4-1 (special continuous effect → special big win effect) is selected without depending on the big hit type. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, only the variation pattern PA4-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is always selected.

(Variation pattern table 5)
FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 5. The variation pattern table 5 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 5. The variation pattern table 5 is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss). Note that the “special continuous effect” and the “special jackpot effect” in the figure are the same as the effect contents described in the above-described variation pattern table 3 (FIG. 101), and thus redundant description is omitted here.

  A variation pattern PH5-1 (special continuous effect) is set in the variation pattern table 5 for loss. Here, when the result of the determination on whether the first special symbol is right or wrong is out of the range, the variation pattern PH5-1 (special continuous effect) is selected without depending on the number of the operation reserved balls. Similarly, when the result of the determination on whether the second special symbol is right or wrong is out of place, the variation pattern PH5-1 (special continuous effect) is selected without depending on the number of operation-pending balls. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of sync, only the variation pattern PH5-1 (special continuous effect) is always selected.

  On the other hand, a variation pattern PA5-1 (special continuous effect → special jackpot effect) is set in the variation pattern table 5 for the big hit. Here, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is successful is a big hit, the variation pattern PA5-1 (special continuous effect → special big win effect) is selected without depending on the type of the big hit. Similarly, when the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA5-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is selected without depending on the type of the big hit. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, only the variation pattern PA5-1 (special continuous effect → special big hit effect) is always selected.

(Variation pattern table 6)
FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 6. The variation pattern table 6 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state that is currently staying is the selection state 6. The variation pattern table 6 is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss). In the drawing, “reach” is an effect that determines whether or not reach is established. If reach is established, reach reach is successful, and if reach is not established, reach reach is failed. “SP reach C” is a reach effect in which a battle effect in which a teammate character battles an enemy character and decides the victory or defeat is developed. In this battle effect, basically, when the teammate character wins the enemy character, the big hit win is confirmed, and when the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character, the gap is confirmed. Therefore, in principle, the timing at which the battle is won or lost is set as the winning branch timing. “Re-lottery effect” is a promotion effect (variable display is in progress) that determines the number of rounds to be won (number of winnings) by re-lottery after winning the win in the above battle effect. Count-up effect / round-up effect). However, since the number of winning rounds (the number of balls that can be earned) is determined in advance according to the type of jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot, this re-lottery means a lottery for production. “Seven Star Direction” indicates that after the teammate character was defeated in the above battle direction (after the offense battle effect was executed), a big win was won by the appearance of a predetermined logo (letters called “7 Star Charge”). It is a rebirth production.

  In the fluctuation pattern table 6 for detachment, fluctuation patterns PH6-1 (reach roll) and PH6-2 (reach roll → SP reach C) are set. Here, when the result of the first special symbol determination is out of place, the variation pattern PH6-1 (reach stroke) or PH6-2 (reach stroke → SP reach C) is not dependent on the number of suspended balls. Is selected. Similarly, when the determination result of the second special symbol is out of place, the variation pattern PH6-1 (reach stroke) or PH6-2 (reach stroke → SP reach C) is obtained without depending on the number of suspended balls. Selected.

  In the variation pattern table 6 for big hits, variation patterns PA6-1 (reach roll → SP reach C), PA6-2 (reach roll → SP reach C → re-lottery effect), PA6-3 (reach roll → SP reach C). → Seven Star Production) is set. Here, when the result of the first special symbol's success / failure determination is a big hit, it does not depend on the big hit type, and the fluctuation pattern PA6-1 (reach roll → SP reach C) or PA6-2 (reach roll → SP reach). C → Re-lottery effect) is selected. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the special big hit with the 16R condition, the special big hit with the 12R condition, or the special big hit with the 8R condition, the fluctuation pattern PA6-2 (reach beat → SP reach) C → Re-lottery effect) is selected, and if the big hit type is a specific big hit with 4R condition, the variation pattern PA6-1 (reach roll → SP reach C) is selected, and if the big hit type is a specific big hit with 2R condition Then, the fluctuation pattern PA6-3 (reach roll → SP reach C → seven star production) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 7)
FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 7. The variation pattern table 7 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 7. The variation pattern table 7 is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss). “Mode entry effect” means that after the teammate character is defeated in the battle effect described above, the shutter effect (the shutter image changes from the open state to the closed state to the open state using almost the entire screen) and then the next effect mode This is an effect in which a rush entry into (Musou Fight Mode) is performed. “Re-lottery effect” is a promotion effect (variable display is in progress) that determines the number of rounds to be won (number of winnings) by re-lottery after winning the win in the above battle effect. Count-up effect / round-up effect). However, since the number of winning rounds (the number of balls that can be earned) is determined in advance according to the type of jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot, this re-lottery means a lottery for production. The “final variation effect B” is an effect that is executed in a variation display of only one rotation staying in the selection state 7 as the variation pattern selection state (the last variation display in the 7-star fighting mode described later). “Final change effect B (relief)” is a shutter effect (the shutter image is open in almost the entire area of the screen → closed) after the teammate character has been defeated in the battle effect (after the battle effect of the offense is executed). The state is changed from the state to the open state), and this is a relief effect indicating that the premium character has been won by the appearance of the premier character in the open state. “Final change effect B (seven stars)” is a shutter effect (the shutter image is open in almost the entire area of the screen → closed) after the ally character has been defeated in the battle effect (after the battle effect of the offense is executed) It is a revival effect indicating that a big hit is won by the appearance of a predetermined logo (characters of 7-star charge) in this open state.

  In the variation pattern table 7 for loss, a variation pattern PH7-1 (SP reach C → final variation effect B (end)) is set. Here, when the result of the first special symbol determination is out of place, the variation pattern PH7-1 (SP reach C → final variation effect B (end)) is selected without depending on the number of reserved balls. The Similarly, if the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is correct is out of place, the variation pattern PH7-1 (SP reach C → final variation effect B (end)) is always selected without depending on the number of reserved balls. Is done.

  The big hit variation pattern table 7 includes variation patterns PA7-1 (SP reach C), PA7-2 (SP reach C → re-draw lottery effect), PA7-3 (SP reach C → 7 star effect), PA7-4 ( SP reach C → final variation effect B (relief)) is set. Here, if the result of the first special symbol win / fail determination is a big hit, if it is a specific big hit with 16R condition, the variation pattern PA7-2 (SP reach C → re-lottery) or PA7-4 (SP reach C → If the final variation effect B (relief)) is selected and the other big hit type (normal big hit with 6R condition, normal big hit with 6R condition, 2 with normal big hit with 5R condition, 5 with normal big hit with 5R condition), The fluctuation pattern PA7-1 (SP reach C) is selected. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the special big hit with 16R condition, the variation pattern PA7-2 (SP reach C → re-lottery effect) or PA7-4 (SP reach C → If the final variation effect B (relief)) is selected and the 12R conditional special jackpot or the 8R conditional special jackpot, the variation pattern PA7-2 (SP reach C → re-lottery effect) is selected and the 4R conditional special jackpot If so, the variation pattern PA7-1 (SP reach C) is selected, and if it is a specific big hit with 2R condition, the variation pattern PA7-3 (SP reach C → 7-star effect) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 8)
FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 8. The variation pattern table 8 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 8. The variation pattern table 8 is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss). In the figure, “SP reach D” is a reach effect in which an annihilation effect is developed in which a teammate character defeats many small fish characters. In this annihilation effect, basically, if the ally character succeeds in eradicating the small fish group, the big hit win is determined, and if the ally character fails in the eradication of the small fish group, the difference is determined. “Re-lottery effect” is a promotion that determines the number of rounds earned (the number of balls that can be earned) by re-lottery after the winning character is confirmed as a result of the annihilation effect of the teammate character succeeding in the eradication of the small fish group. Production (count-up production / round-up production performed during variable display). However, since the number of winning rounds (the number of balls that can be earned) is determined in advance according to the type of jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot, this re-lottery means a lottery for production. “Seven-star production” was a big win after the failure to destroy the group of small fish in the above-mentioned extinction production (after the execution of the extermination of gasse was performed), and the appearance of a predetermined logo (character called “7-star charge”) It is a revival production showing.

  In the variation pattern table 8 for deviation, variation patterns PH8-1 (super shortened), PH8-2 (normal), and PH8-3 (SP reach D) are set. Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination is out of place, the variation pattern PH8-2 (ordinary) or PH8-3 (SP reach D) is selected without depending on the number of activated balls. . On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol determination is out of place, one of the fluctuation patterns PH8-1 (super shortened), PH8-2 (normal), and PH8-3 (SP reach D) is selected. Is done. At this time, if the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is correct is out of order, the contents of the table at the reference destination may differ depending on the number of the operation holding balls (specifically, whether or not the operation holding balls exist) Even if the special symbol variation pattern random number value is the same, a different variation pattern can be selected. Specifically, when the operation holding ball does not exist, the fluctuation pattern PH8-1 (super shortening) is not selected, and only when the operation holding ball exists, the fluctuation pattern PH8-1. (Very short) can be selected. For this reason, a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time tends to be selected when the operation holding ball is present rather than when the operation holding ball is not present.

  In the variation pattern table 8 for big hits, variation patterns PA8-1 (SP reach D), PA8-2 (SP reach D → re-lottery effect), PA8-3 (SP reach D → 7-star effect) are set. . Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, if it is a specific big hit with 16R condition, the variation pattern PA8-2 (SP reach D → re-lottery effect) is selected, and the other big hit If the type is a normal big hit with a 6R condition, a normal big hit with a 6R condition, a normal big hit with a 5R condition, and a normal big hit with a 5R condition, a fluctuation pattern PA8-1 (SP reach D) is selected. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the special big hit with 16R condition, the special big hit with 12R condition, or the special big hit with 8R condition, the variation pattern PA8-2 (SP reach D → If the lottery effect) is selected and the specific big hit with 4R condition is selected, the fluctuation pattern PA8-1 (SP reach D) is selected. If the special big hit with 2R condition is selected, the fluctuation pattern PA8-3 (SP reach D → 7 stars) Production) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 9)
FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 9. The variation pattern table 9 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 9. The variation pattern table 9 is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss). In the drawing, “SP reach D”, “re-lottery effect”, and “resurrection effect” are the same as the effect contents described in the above-described variation pattern table 8 (FIG. 106), and therefore, redundant description is omitted here.

  In the variation pattern table 9 for deviation, variation patterns PH9-1 (super shortened), PH9-2 (normal), and PH9-3 (SP reach D) are set. Here, when the result of the first special symbol determination is out of place, the variation pattern PH9-2 (normal) or PH9-3 (SP reach D) is selected without depending on the number of operation-reserved balls. . On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol determination is out of place, one of the fluctuation patterns PH9-1 (super shortened), PH9-2 (normal), and PH9-3 (SP reach D) is selected. Is done. At this time, if the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is correct is out of order, the contents of the table at the reference destination may differ depending on the number of the operation holding balls (specifically, whether or not the operation holding balls exist) Even if the special symbol variation pattern random number value is the same, a different variation pattern can be selected. Specifically, when the operation holding ball does not exist, the fluctuation pattern PH9-1 (super shortened) is not selected, and only when the operation holding ball exists, the fluctuation pattern PH9-1. (Very short) can be selected. For this reason, a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time tends to be selected when the operation holding ball is present rather than when the operation holding ball is not present.

  In the variation pattern table 9 for big hits, variation patterns PA9-1 (SP reach D), PA9-2 (SP reach D → re-lottery effect), PA9-3 (SP reach D → 7-star effect) are set. . Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, if it is a specific big hit with 16R condition, the variation pattern PA9-2 (SP reach D → re-lottery effect) is selected, and the other big hit If the type is a normal big hit with a 6R condition, a normal big hit with a 6R condition, a normal big hit with a 5R condition, and a normal big hit with a 5R condition, a variation pattern PA9-1 (SP reach D) is selected. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the special big hit with 16R condition, the special big hit with 12R condition, or the special big hit with 8R condition, the variation pattern PA9-2 (SP reach D → If the lottery effect) is selected and the specific big hit with 4R condition is selected, the fluctuation pattern PA9-1 (SP reach D) is selected. If the special big hit with 2R condition is selected, the fluctuation pattern PA9-3 (SP reach D → 7 stars) Production) is selected.

  In this variation pattern table 9, the SP reach D is selected with a probability of “20%” when the result of the success / failure determination is out of place, whereas “100” when the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit. SP reach D is selected with a probability of “%”. On the other hand, in the above-described variation pattern table 8, when the result of the determination is wrong, SP reach D is selected with a probability of “10%”, whereas when the result of the determination is a big hit. SP reach D is selected with a probability of “100%”. Therefore, the expectation degree for SP reach D is higher when staying in the selection state 8 than when staying in the selection state 9 as the variation pattern selection state. That is, it can be said that the expectation degree for SP reach D is higher in the first 30 rotations in the non-matching dance mode described later than in the latter 59 rotations.

(Variation pattern table 10)
FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 10. The variation pattern table 10 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 10. The variation pattern table 10 is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss). In the figure, “final variation effect C” is an effect that is executed in a variation display of only one rotation staying in the selection state 10 as the variation pattern selection state (the last variation display in the non-combat dance mode described later). . “Final change effect C (end)” is the effect mode currently being executed (mutual mission mode) after the shutter effect (the shutter image changes from the open state to the closed state to the open state over almost the entire screen). This is a mode end effect for notifying the end of the change display. “Final change effect C (relief)” is a big hit when a premiere character appears in this open state after a shutter effect (shutter image changes from open state to closed state to open state in almost the entire area of the screen). This is a remedy effect that shows that it was won. “Final change effect C (seven stars)” is a shutter effect (the shutter image changes from the open state to the closed state to the open state over almost the entire screen). ) Is a rebirth production showing that the big hit was won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the final variation effect C does not go through the shutter effect, but the effect such as reach establishment → SP reach D (→ seven-star effect), that is, the same match as the non-matching dance mode before the final change. May be. Moreover, you may comprise so that either the winning way via a shutter effect and the said winning way may be selected by lottery.

  In the variation pattern table 10 for deviation, a variation pattern PH10-1 (final variation effect C (end)) is set. Here, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct is out of the range, the variation pattern PH10-1 (final variation effect C (end)) is selected without depending on the number of operation-pending balls. Similarly, when the result of the determination on whether the second special symbol is right or wrong is out of the range, the variation pattern PH10-1 (final variation effect C (end)) is selected without depending on the number of reserved balls. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of sync, only the variation pattern PH10-1 (final variation effect C (end)) is always selected. If the result of the first special symbol determination or the result of the second special symbol determination is out of order, the mode end effect is always via the shutter effect, and no relief effect or seven star effect occurs. In addition, fluctuation effects such as reach establishment → SP reach D do not occur.

  In the big hit variation pattern table 10, variation patterns PA10-1 (final variation effect C (relief)) and PA10-2 (final variation effect C (seven stars)) are set. Here, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA10-1 (final variation effect C (relief)) is selected regardless of the type of the big hit. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit with a 16R condition, a specific big hit with a 12R condition, a specific big hit with an 8R condition, a specific big hit with a 4R condition, a variation pattern When PA10-1 (final variation effect C (relief)) is selected and the jackpot type is a specific jackpot with 2R conditions, a variation pattern PA10-2 (final variation effect C (seven stars)) is selected.

  As described above, in the variation pattern tables 0 to 10, the variation time of the special symbol is set for each variation pattern. However, when any variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time of the special symbol is “0. “3 seconds” is set. The special symbol fixed stop time is a time during which the special symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (a time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). Note that the decorative symbol variation time and the fixed stop time are also set corresponding to the special symbol variation time and the fixed stop time (the temporary stop time will be described later).

  Next, the effect mode in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the effect mode in the eighth embodiment. In this example, according to the variation pattern selection state (or game state) managed on the main control board 100 side, one of a plurality of types of effect modes is alternatively set, and the set A variable effect according to the effect mode is executed.

  In this example, as the above-described plurality of types of production modes, a normal production mode (production mode 0), a special production mode (production mode 0), a musou mission mode (production modes 1 and 2), a reserved continuous mode (production mode 3, 4, 5), Seven Star Fighting Mode (Directing Modes 6, 7), and Warrior Fighting Mode (Directing Modes 8, 9, 10). Regarding the correspondence between the variation pattern selection state and the production mode, the “normal production mode” and the “special production mode” correspond to the selection state 0, and the “non-mission mission mode” corresponds to the selection states 1 and 2. The “holding continuous mode” corresponds to the selection states 3, 4, 5, the “seven star fighting mode” corresponds to the selection states 6, 7, and “ "Musou Dance Mode" is supported. The normal performance mode and special performance mode are performance modes that are set when the electric support mode is not active, and the electric support mode is active in the Musou mission mode, the hold ream mode, the Seven Star Fighting mode, and the Musou mission mode. This is an effect mode that is set when In the following, the reservation continuous mode, the seven-star fighting mode, and the non-matching dance mode are collectively referred to as “renso mode”. Here, in the production modes 3 to 10, at least in any of the production modes 3 to 7 and 10, the big hit without reach is generated or the big hit with no reach is more likely to occur than the big hit through reach. The production modes 8 and 9 may adopt a specification that only a big hit via reach is generated or a big hit via reach is more likely to occur than a non-reach big hit. Note that the big hit without reach means the big hit in which the fluctuation variation of the decorative symbols in the three rows does not appear as a balance (without going through the reach state) as it is (a so-called hit).

  FIG. 110 is a transition diagram of the effect mode in the eighth embodiment. In the figure, “conditional special jackpot” means a case where a 16R conditional special jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery or one of the conditional special jackpots is won in the second special symbol lottery. “Conditional normal big hit” means that one of the conditional normal big wins is won in the first special symbol lottery.

  Basically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal effect mode is set as the effect mode. As described above, the normal effect mode is an effect mode corresponding to the selection state 0 as the variation pattern selection state. However, when transitioning to the normal state based on the completion of the short-time state, the special effect mode is set for the predetermined number of variable displays after the gaming state has shifted to the normal state, and the predetermined number of variable displays are finished. Normal production mode is set when The predetermined number of times is “four times” as the number of times of special symbol variation display. This means that the cumulative number of display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is “four times”. However, normally, in the four-turn fluctuation display staying in the special effect mode, the second special symbol generated when the gaming state is in the short-time state (the state where the electric chew support function is activated) is preferentially digested. Since the action-holding ball should be consumed (the second special symbol variation display should be executed), if a big win occurs during this special performance mode, it is expected to win a conditional special big win (V winning) A feeling increases. Here, when the current stay mode is the normal performance mode or the special performance mode, if you win a conditional special jackpot, the game will move to the hold continuous mode regardless of whether or not there is a V prize in the special game. If you win a big hit and don't win a V during a special game, you will move to Musou Mission Mode. However, even if the player wins a conditional regular big hit, if the player wins a V during the special game, the game shifts to the hold continuous mode.

  As described above, the Musou mission mode is an effect mode corresponding to the selection states 1 and 2 as the variation pattern selection state. The number of stays in the Musou mission mode is “30 times” or “100 times” as the number of times the special symbol is changed. Regardless of whether the number of stays in the Musou mission mode is “30” or “100”, the remaining number of times of fluctuation display until the bifurcation point (the fluctuation display at the 30th rotation) is displayed on the screen. . At this branching point (change display at the 30th rotation), the above-mentioned final change effect A is generated, and an effect is made to indicate whether the non-duplex mission mode (short time state) continues or the non-double mission mode (short time state) ends. (Shutter effect) is developed. If you are in Warrior Mission mode, the only possible gaming state is the short-time state. When the next jackpot occurs while staying in the no-commissioned mission mode, the mode shifts to the consecutive game mode (holding consecutive mode) regardless of the jackpot type and the presence or absence of the V prize in the special game.

  The Renso mode has “Reserved Ream Mode”, “Seven Star Fighting Mode” and “Musou Fighting Mode”. Reservation Ren Mode (3 revolutions) → Seven Star Fighting Mode (7 revolutions) → Musou Mai It changes in the order of mode (90 rotations). The number of stays in the consecutive-villa mode is “100 times” as the number of times the special symbol is displayed.

  As described above, the reservation continuous mode is an effect mode corresponding to the selection states 3 to 5 as the variation pattern selection state. When staying in the hold continuous mode, a possible gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short time state. The number of stays in the reservation continuous mode is “3 times” as the number of times the special symbol is changed. As will be described in detail later, while staying in the hold continuous mode, a special continuous effect is generated across the jackpot end demo. When this reservation continuous mode (1st to 3rd rotations) ends, the next production mode (Nanasei Fighting Mode) is entered.

  As described above, the seven star fighting mode is an effect mode corresponding to the selection states 6 to 7 as the variation pattern selection state. The number of stays in the Seven Star Fighting Mode is “seven times” as the number of times the special symbol is changed. If you are staying in Seven Star Fighting Mode, the possible gaming state is Probability or Short Time. When this seven-star fighting mode (fourth to tenth rotations) ends, the next production mode (non-matching dance mode) is entered.

  When the variation pattern with “SP reach C” is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol while staying in the seven star fighting mode, as described above, the ally character is used as the SP reach production as described above. A battle effect that battles enemy characters occurs. In this example, the same opponent (enemy character) every time, even when any battle display is generated in any of the seven rotation (fourth to tenth rotation) variation displays staying in the Seven Star Fight mode. ) Is selected. Here, the battle effect opponent (enemy character) is determined by a look-ahead lottery performed at the start of the 7-star fight mode (at the end of the third rotation display or at the start of the fourth rotation display). Is done. That is, according to the prior determination result (expected expectation of big hit) of one or more working balls that exist at the start of the 7-star fighting mode (at the end of the third rotation display or at the start of the fourth rotation display) Then, one of the plurality of enemy characters X1 to X5 is selected as an opponent. Here, the operation reservation ball to be pre-drawn lottery is the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol. The strength of the enemy character is set in the order of “enemy character X1”> “enemy character X2”> “enemy character X3”> “enemy character X4”> “enemy character X5”. That is, among the plurality of characters X1 to X5, the enemy character X1 is the strongest and the enemy character X5 is the weakest. For this reason, when the strongest enemy character X1 appears as an opponent, there is a high possibility that the teammate character will be defeated in the battle, and therefore, the SP hit performance expectation is relatively low. On the other hand, when the weakest enemy character X5 appears as an opponent, there is a high possibility that the teammate character will win the battle, so that the SP hit effect of the jackpot expectation is relatively high. When the 7-star fighting mode is started (when the fourth rotation change display is started), the opponent character name determined in the pre-read lottery is displayed on the screen. Yes. Therefore, based on the type of enemy character displayed on the screen, one or more action suspensions that exist at the start of the 7-star fight mode (at the end of the third rotation display or at the start of the fourth rotation display) The possibility that there is a jackpot hold in the sphere will be suggested or notified. In other words, if there is a big hit hold as a result of the pre-reading lottery, a weak enemy character is hard to be selected, and a weak character is likely to be selected. A weak character is difficult to select.

  As described above, the battleless mode is an effect mode corresponding to the selection states 8 to 10 as the variation pattern selection state. The number of stays in the battleless dance mode is “90 times” as the number of times the special symbol is changed. If you are staying in Warrior Dance mode, the only possible gaming state is the short state. When this non-matching dance mode (from the 11th rotation to the 100th rotation) is completed, that is, when the extended game mode is completed, the special performance mode is entered and the gaming state returns to the normal state. As a modification, the special effect mode may not be provided, and the transition to the normal effect mode may be performed when the extended play mode ends.

  On the other hand, when the current performance mode is the Renso mode (holding continuous mode, 7-star fighting mode, non-matching dance mode), if the next big hit occurs, whether or not there is a V prize in the special hit type and special game Regardless, the continuous play mode (holding continuous mode) is entered again, and the continuous play mode continues.

  When any one of these types of effect modes is set, the background dedicated to the effect mode is displayed on the screen as an effect (variation effect) indicating that the user is staying in the effect mode. An image is displayed, and a BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11.

  Then, the decoration design in 8th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram showing symbol attributes of decorative symbols in the eighth embodiment. The decorative design in this example is formed by a combination of an identification element made up of numerals and a color (display color) attached to the identification element. In this example, all nine types of numbers “1” to “9” are set as identification elements (that is, all nine types of decorative symbols exist). The decorative symbols are arranged in the order of “1” to “9” according to the arrangement of the symbol rows, and on the effect display device 70, the order of “1” to “9” (or the order of “9” to “1”). In the display areas Z1, Z2 and Z3, a cyclic display or a scroll display is performed, and after “9”, it returns to “1” again (or after “1”, it returns to “9” again). . This specification is the same in other embodiments. Each decorative design has a design attribute defined by the type of color assigned to the identification element. That is, even if a plurality of decorative symbols are composed of different identification elements, they are grouped into the same symbol attribute by being given the same color. In this example, three types of colors “blue”, “red”, and “gold” are set as the colors of the decorative symbols. In the drawing, the display modes of three kinds of decorative designs of “blue”, “red”, and “gold” are expressed by “white”, “slashed line”, and “filled”. Specifically, the decorative symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are classified into blue symbol attributes (blue attributes), and the decorative symbols “1”, “3”, “5”, “9” "Is classified as a red symbol attribute (red attribute), and the decorative symbol" 7 "is classified as a golden symbol attribute (gold attribute). In this example, as the design attribute of the decorative design, the expectation level for winning a ball and the expectation level for probability change (V winning) are increased by one step in the order of “blue” <“red” <“golden”. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, a blue attribute decoration symbol is also referred to as a “blue symbol”, a red attribute ornament symbol as a “red symbol”, and a gold attribute ornament symbol as a “gold symbol”.

  FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot symbol table in the eighth embodiment. In the jackpot symbol table, each jackpot type is associated with a jackpot symbol (a combination of decorative symbols when a jackpot occurs). In the eighth embodiment, “big hit symbol” refers to a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs.

  The jackpot symbol is composed of a combination of stop modes “*, *, *” in which three decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) are arranged (*: a decorative symbol of an arbitrary number). The jackpot symbol in this example is a combination of a gold symbol that is confirmed to be won for a specific jackpot with a condition of “7,7,7” (a specific jackpot with a 16R condition), “1, 1, 1”, “3.3”・ A red symbol combination indicating that there is a relatively high probability of winning a conditional special jackpot such as “3,” “5,5,5”, “9,9,9”; A distinction is made between blue symbol combinations indicating that the probability of winning a conditional special jackpot such as “4, 4, 4”, “6, 6, 6”, “8, 8, 8” is relatively low. In other words, for “7, 7, 7”, it is a jackpot symbol that is determined to have been selected as “conditional big jackpot”, while other odd symbol (red symbol) combinations and even symbols (blue symbol) With regard to the combination, it is an undetermined jackpot symbol which one of “conditional special jackpot” and “conditional regular jackpot” is won. In addition, even when winning a specific jackpot with a 16R condition, a red symbol combination or a blue symbol combination may be adopted as the jackpot symbol. In addition, when a special big hit with 2R condition is won, as a big hit symbol, a pattern including a break (for example, “1, 9, 8”), a missed reach (for example, “2, 1, 2”), or a special symbol is included. The eyes (for example, “3 · □ · 3”) may be adopted. Here, “□” may be, for example, a decorative symbol written as “seven stars”.

  The jackpot symbol is determined according to the jackpot type selected in the special symbol lottery process. In addition, in FIG. 112, it is configured as a common jackpot symbol table that does not depend on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, but is not limited to this, for example, a plurality of different types depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot A jackpot symbol table may be prepared.

  In the case of winning the “special jackpot with 16R condition” in the lottery process of the first special symbol, the gold symbol combination is selected as the jackpot symbol. In addition, in the first special symbol lottery process, one of “normal big hit with 6R condition”, “normal big hit with 6R condition”, “normal big hit with 5R condition” and “normal big hit with 5R condition” will be selected. In such a case, a red symbol combination or a blue symbol combination is selected as the jackpot symbol.

  In the case of winning the “special jackpot with 16R condition” in the lottery process of the second special symbol, a gold symbol combination is selected as the jackpot symbol. In addition, if you win one of the “special jackpot with 12R condition”, “special jackpot with 8R condition”, “special jackpot with 4R condition” and “special jackpot with 2R condition” in the lottery process of the second special symbol, A red symbol combination or a blue symbol combination is selected as the big hit symbol.

  Next, the big hit effect in the eighth embodiment will be described. The effect pattern of the big hit effect is basically determined based on the type of the big hit when the result of the determination is a big hit. However, even if the type of jackpot is the same, the effect pattern of the jackpot effect may differ depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot occurrence or the presence or absence of a V prize.

  As will be described in detail later in the big hit effect, a right-handed image is displayed in the upper right part of the screen to urge the player to launch the game ball toward the right-handed area, and a game during special games is displayed at the lower left part of the screen. A prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out to the player is displayed (refer to FIG. 122 for details). In addition, during consecutive resorts, the number of consecutive resorts that is the number of consecutive big hits in the specific gaming state is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. In the big hit effect, when a game ball enters a specific area in a specific round (second round in this example), a V winning notification image is displayed. The details of the prize ball number notification effect will be described later. As a modified example of the big hit effect, a pseudo decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo decorative symbol”) is displayed in a variable display and a stop display (temporary stop display, fixed stop display) in each round of the special game. You may comprise. It is preferable that this pseudo decorative design is a different design mode (a special design during jackpot) from a normal decorative design that is variably displayed during non-special games. However, it is desirable to use numbers (for example, “1” to “9”, etc.) as the identification elements of this pseudo decorative design, as in general identification elements (the number display mode is a special display mode). Is desirable). Naturally, the pseudo decorative design may be the same or similar design as the decorative design that is variably displayed during the non-special game. The fluctuating display and the stop display (temporary stop display, fixed stop display) of the pseudo decorative symbols are performed for each special game round. In other words, the pseudo-decorative symbol variation display is completed in round units. For example, when the number of rounds of a special game is 16, round display of fake decorative symbols is performed 16 times during the special game. When the pseudo-decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped in a specific combination mode, it is determined that the player is in an advantageous state. The advantageous state is, for example, that a jackpot type or a special game type is promoted. Specifically, after the special game that is currently being executed, a transition is made to a probability change state (high probability state), and the number of rounds of the special game that is currently being executed is increased (rounded up). In addition, it is also possible to determine a holding camp (that a big hit holding exists in the currently operating holding ball). Specific examples are as follows. Although not shown in the figure, first, a combination of even symbols (blue symbols) is displayed in a certain variable display to be confirmed and stopped, thereby suggesting or notifying that a low profit jackpot has been won. When the special game is started, the fuzzy decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each round. In other words, the game is developed as a one-round fluctuating display of one round. Here, up to the N-th round, at the end of each round (when the special prize opening is closed), the pseudo-decorative symbols are displayed in a non-specific combination manner. At the end of the (N + 1) -th round (when the big prize opening is closed), it is suggested or notified that the jackpot type has been promoted to a high profit jackpot by displaying a fixed stop display in a specific combination manner. The In this way, the pseudo-decorative symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed in a specific combination mode (for example, a combination of the same odd number of symbols (such as “3, 3, 3”, “7, 7, 7”)). Thus, it is suggested or notified to the player that the transition to the probability change state after completion of the special game or that the number of rounds of the special game has been rounded up. In addition, a reach effect (SP reach effect) with a pseudo-decorative pattern is performed during the execution of the special game, and it is seamless from the execution to the end of the special game (variable display after the end). By being displayed as a series of effects, it is possible to expand the time width of the notification regarding notification of a state advantageous to the player. By adopting the above-described modifications, it is possible to perform an unexpected big hit effect that is not found in conventional game machines, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  Here, FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot start demonstration time setting table, and FIG. 113B is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot end demonstration time setting table. The jackpot start demo time and jackpot end demo time are set based on the demo time setting table.

  The jackpot start demonstration time is determined according to the type of jackpot and the gaming state when the jackpot occurs. Note that when determining the big hit start demo time, unlike the case of determining the big hit end demo time, the presence or absence of the V prize is indefinite, so it is not included in the selection conditions for the big hit start demo time. When the game state at the time of occurrence of the big hit is a normal state, as a type of the big hit, “13 seconds” is won when a special big hit with 2R conditions is won, and “10 seconds” when a special big hit with other conditions is won. If the player wins a conditional big jackpot, “4.68 seconds” is selected. If the game state at the time of the big hit is a short-time state, as the type of the big hit, “13 seconds” if you win a specific big hit with 2R condition, if you win the other special special big hit and conditional normal big hit “2 seconds” is selected. When the game state at the time of occurrence of the big hit is a probable change state, “2 seconds” is selected regardless of the type of the big hit.

  The jackpot end demo time is determined according to the type of jackpot, the gaming state when the jackpot occurs, and the presence or absence of a V prize. When the game state is the normal state, if a win with a conditional normal big win is won and the V game is not won in the special game, “12.5 seconds” is set as the big hit end demo time. In other words, typically, “12.5 seconds” is selected in the case of winning a conditional normal jackpot as the first win (in the case of shifting to the no-commission mission mode after the end of the special game). The big hit end demonstration time (12.5 seconds) at the time of the first hit is used as a production scale of a warning notification effect for calling attention to prevent forgetting to take a prepaid card or theft. In this example, a character image of a message such as “Beware of forgetting to take a prepaid card or theft” is displayed on the incomparable mission entry screen displayed in the jackpot end demonstration. If you win a conditional special jackpot (except for the 2R conditional special jackpot) when the gaming state is normal, the jackpot ending demo time will be “1 second, regardless of whether or not there is a V prize in the special game. Is set. In that case, during the execution of the jackpot end demonstration, the warning notification effect regarding forgetting to take the prepaid card is not performed, and instead the warning notification effect is performed during the final round during the special game. It has become.

  On the other hand, in other cases, regardless of whether the winning status is a big hit or whether there is a V-winning in a special game, regardless of the type of big hit, “1 second” is set as the jackpot end demo time. Is set. Here, when the effect mode shifts to the extended game mode (holding continuous mode) after the special game ends, the jackpot end demonstration time “1 second” is used as an effect measure for the special continuous effect.

[Various productions]
In the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment having such a configuration, as described above, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game. It is configured. Hereinafter, among the various game effects, the “holding continuous mode effect” and the “nominated ball number notification effect” will be described in detail.

<On-hold continuous mode production>
The hold continuous mode effect is executed across the jackpot end demonstration and the hold continuous mode (variable display within 3 rotations after the end of the special game) when transitioning to the hold continuous mode as the effect mode after the special game ends. Production. This hold continuous mode production connects the big hit end demonstration production and the fluctuation production in the hold continuous mode as a series of continuous productions, and if a big hit occurs while staying in the hold continuous mode, It is an effect that makes it appear as if a big hit has occurred in the first rotation after the end of the special game.

  First, the fluctuating effect pattern set during the reservation continuous mode will be described. FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram showing a variable effect pattern table when the effect mode currently being executed is the reserved continuous mode. This variation effect pattern table dedicated to the reservation continuous mode is a variation effect pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern tables 3 to 5 for special symbols. In the figure, (A) shows a variation effect pattern table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern table 3 (first rotation in the reservation continuous mode), and (B) in the figure corresponds to the fluctuation pattern table 4 (second rotation in the reservation continuous mode). (C) in the figure is a variation effect pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern table 5 (third rotation in the reservation continuous mode). In this variation effect pattern table, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol is associated with the variation pattern of the special symbol for each determination result (big hit / loss).

  As shown in (A) in the figure, in the first rotation of the reservation continuous mode, the fluctuation effect pattern PEH3-1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern PH3-1 of the deviation, and the big hit fluctuation pattern PA3-1. The fluctuation effect pattern PEA3-1 is associated. The fluctuation effect pattern PEH3-1 is a fluctuating fluctuation effect pattern in which the special continuous effect is executed, and “0” is set as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous. On the other hand, the variation effect pattern PEA3-1 is a jackpot variation effect pattern in which a special continuous effect and a special jackpot effect are executed, and “3 times” is set as the number of executions of the pseudo-run.

  As shown in (B) in the figure, in the second rotation of the reservation continuous mode, the fluctuation effect pattern PEH4-1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern PH4-1 of the deviation, and the big hit fluctuation pattern PA4-1. The fluctuation effect pattern PEA4-1 is associated. The fluctuation effect pattern PEH4-1 is a fluctuating fluctuation effect pattern in which the special continuous effect is executed, and “0” is set as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous. On the other hand, the variation effect pattern PEA4-1 is a jackpot variation effect pattern in which a special continuous effect and a special jackpot effect are executed, and “twice” is set as the number of executions of the pseudo-run.

  As shown in (C) in the figure, in the third rotation of the reservation continuous mode, the fluctuation effect pattern PEH5-1 is associated with the deviation fluctuation pattern PH5-1, and with respect to the jackpot fluctuation pattern PA5-1. The fluctuation effect pattern PEA5-1 is associated. The variation effect pattern PEH5-1 is a fluctuating variation effect pattern in which the special continuous effect is executed, and “0” is set as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous. On the other hand, the variation effect pattern PEA5-1 is a jackpot variation effect pattern in which a special continuous effect and a special jackpot effect are executed, and “one time” is set as the number of executions of the pseudo-run.

  Next, an outline of the reserved continuous mode effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a time chart for explaining the flow of the reserved continuous mode effect. The reserved continuous mode effect is greatly divided into a “reserved continuous mode out effect” in which the fluctuation display during the hold continuous mode is all out of place, and a “reserved continuous mode jackpot effect” in which the big display is generated in the variable display during the reserved continuous mode. Separated. In the figure, (A) shows the flow of the reserved continuous mode off effect, and (B) to (D) in the figure show the flow of the reserved continuous mode jackpot effect. In the eighth embodiment, when it is not necessary to distinguish between the “reserved continuous mode off effect” and the “reserved continuous mode jackpot effect”, they are simply referred to as “reserved continuous mode effect” without distinguishing both.

  If the effect mode currently being executed is the hold continuous mode, the decorative symbol is displayed as a small symbol at the end of the screen, and is displayed as a temporary stop or a fixed stop (see FIGS. 117 and 118 for details). ). In the following, “determination stop” means that the decorative symbol is definitely stopped (completely stopped). “Temporary stop” means that a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a temporary state (not completely stopped and displayed, for example, slightly swinging up and down or left and right). The “determined stop time” is the time for holding the state where the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. “Temporary stop time” is the time for which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. In this example, the same time value (0.3 seconds) is set as the fixed stop time and the temporary stop time.

≪Direction out of hold continuous mode≫
As shown in FIG. 115 (A), the reserved continuous mode deviation effect is an effect that is executed when the variable display of the first to third rotations in the reserved continuous mode is all out of place. The hold continuous mode deviation effect is developed in a flow such as a big hit end demonstration → first rotation change display (out) → second rotation change display (out) → third rotation change display (out). As will be described in detail later, the special continuous effect is executed across the big hit end demonstration and the three-turn fluctuation display in the hold continuous mode. When the off-hold continuous mode finishes, the next production mode (Seven Star Fighting Mode) is entered and variable display for the fourth rotation is started.

  When the off-hold continuous mode effect is executed, in principle (when each variable display is performed without interruption), from the start of the first rotation display to the end of the third rotation display. Is set to “7 seconds”. The above time scale is the sum of each fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation to the end of the fluctuation display of the third rotation and its fixed stop time (excluding the fixed stop time of the third rotation). Consists of values. Specifically, in the fluctuation display of the deviation at the first rotation (see the fluctuation effect pattern PH3-1 in FIG. 114), “4.4 seconds” is set as the fluctuation time. In the fluctuation display of the deviation of the second rotation (see the fluctuation effect pattern PH4-1 in FIG. 114), “1 second” is set as the fluctuation time. In the variation display of the deviation at the third rotation (see the variation effect pattern PH5-1 in FIG. 114), “1 second” is set as the variation time. Therefore, the time scale is as follows: the first rotation fluctuation time (4.4 seconds) + the first rotation fixed stop time (0.3 seconds) + the second rotation fluctuation time (1 second) + the second rotation final stop time (0.3 seconds) + 3rd rotation time (1 second) = “7 seconds”. The time scale of “7 seconds” is a standard production time for a special continuous production which will be described later (a standard production scale when each variable display is continuously performed without interruption).

  Here, when all of the first to third rotations in the hold continuous mode are out of place as described above, the variation time of the first rotation among the variation times of the first to third rotations is the longest time (4 .4 seconds). The fluctuation time of this first rotation (4.4 seconds) is the display of the normal symbol fluctuation time and the normal symbol (winning symbol, non-winning symbol) when the electronic chew support function is activated (easy entry). It is preferable that the time is set to be longer than the opening time (total opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 622. On the other hand, the fluctuation time (1 second) of the 2nd and 3rd rotations is the fluctuation time of normal symbols and normal symbols (winning symbols, non-winning symbols) when the electric chew support function is activated (easy entry) It is preferable to set the stop display time to be shorter than the opening time (total opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 622.

≪Holding mode jackpot production≫
As shown in FIGS. 115 (B) to 115 (D), the reserved continuous mode jackpot effect is an effect that is executed when a big hit occurs in any of the three-rotation fluctuation displays staying in the reserved continuous mode. . For this reason, the reservation continuous mode jackpot effect includes a case where a big hit occurs in the first rotation display, a case where a big hit occurs in the second rotation display, and a case where a big hit occurs in the third rotation display. There is. The hold continuous mode jackpot effect that is performed when a big hit is generated in the fluctuation display of the first rotation is developed in the flow of a big hit start demonstration → a fluctuation display of the first rotation (hit). Hold-on consecutive mode jackpot presentation performed when a big hit is generated in the fluctuation display of the second rotation is developed in the flow of a big hit end demonstration → fluctuation display (disconnection) of the first rotation → fluctuation display (big hit) of the second rotation Is done. When the big hit is generated in the fluctuation display of the third rotation, the holding continuous mode big hit effect is a big hit end demonstration → first fluctuation fluctuation display (miss) → second rotation fluctuation display (miss) → third rotation It is developed in the flow of fluctuation display (big hit). As will be described in detail later, the hold consecutive mode jackpot effect will be described later, but after a special continuous effect is performed across the jackpot end demo and the three-turn fluctuation display of the hold consecutive mode, the winner will be announced and the number of rounds (acquired) This is a special jackpot production where the expected number of balls is promoted.

  Even if a big hit occurs in any of the fluctuation displays of the first to third revolutions in the hold continuous mode, the fluctuation display related to the occurrence of the big hit from the start of the first revolution fluctuation display. The time scale until the end is always set to “24 seconds”. The time scale is composed of a total value of a variation time from a variation display at the first rotation to a variation display related to occurrence of a big hit and a fixed stop time thereof (excluding a fixed stop time at the time of big hit occurrence). In this example, the time scale is set as the same time value (24 seconds), even if a big hit occurs in the fluctuation display of any rotation among the fluctuation displays of the first to third rotations. Yes. In addition, although the effect time of special continuous production in the case of a big hit during the reservation continuous mode is designed so as to be the same time value even if a big hit occurs in any of the first to third rotations. There may be some errors, and they may be substantially the same (a time value other than the time value shown in FIG. 114 may be adopted as the design value of the variation time).

  As shown in (B) in the figure, when a big hit is generated in the fluctuation display of the first rotation, the fluctuation display related to the big hit occurrence (the fluctuation display of the first rotation) from the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. The time scale until the end is set to “24 seconds”. Specifically, in the variation display of the big hit at the first rotation (see the variation effect pattern PEA3-1 in FIG. 114), as described above, “24 seconds” is set as the variation time. Therefore, the above time scale is the fluctuation time of the first rotation (24 seconds) = “24 seconds”.

  As shown in (C) of the figure, when a big hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second rotation, the fluctuation display (fluctuation display of the second rotation) related to the big hit occurrence from the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. The time scale until the end is set to “24 seconds”. Specifically, in the fluctuation display of the deviation at the first rotation (see the fluctuation effect pattern PEH3-1 in FIG. 114), “4.4 seconds” is set as the fluctuation time. In the variation display of the big hit at the second rotation (see the variation effect pattern PEA4-1 in FIG. 114), “19.3 seconds” is set as the variation time. Therefore, the above time scale is: fluctuation time of the first rotation (4.4 seconds) +1 fixed stop time of the first rotation (0.3 seconds) + variation time of the second rotation (19.3 seconds) = “24 seconds” It becomes.

  As shown in (D) in the figure, when a big hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the third rotation, the fluctuation display related to the big hit occurrence (the fluctuation display of the third rotation) from the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. The time scale until the end is set to “24 seconds”. Specifically, in the fluctuation display of the deviation at the first rotation (see the fluctuation effect pattern PEH3-1 in FIG. 114), “4.4 seconds” is set as the fluctuation time. In the fluctuation display of the deviation at the second rotation (see the fluctuation effect pattern PEA4-1 in FIG. 114), “1 second” is set as the fluctuation time. In the variation display of the big hit at the third rotation (see the variation effect pattern PEA5-1 in FIG. 114), “18 seconds” is set as the variation time. Therefore, the time scale is as follows: the first rotation fluctuation time (4.4 seconds) + the first rotation fixed stop time (0.3 seconds) + the second rotation fluctuation time (1 second) + the second rotation final stop time (0.3 seconds) + 3rd rotation time (18 seconds) = “24 seconds”.

(Number of symbol stops in hold continuous mode)
Even if a big hit occurs in any of the fluctuation displays of the first to third revolutions in the hold continuous mode, the fluctuation display related to the occurrence of the big hit from the start of the first revolution fluctuation display. The total number of stoppages of the decorative symbol up to the end (the total number of stoppages of the number of times that the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped) is set to the same number. As shown in (B) in the figure, when the fluctuation display at the first rotation is a big hit, three temporary stops and one final stop are generated by the pseudo-ream in the fluctuation display at the first rotation. The total number of stoppages of the decorative symbol is “4 times”. As shown in (C) in the figure, when the second rotation fluctuation display is a big hit, one final stop occurs in the first rotation fluctuation display, and the second rotation fluctuation display is performed twice by the pseudo-ream. Therefore, the total number of stoppages of the decorative symbols is “4 times”. As shown in (D) in the figure, when the third rotation fluctuation display is a big hit, one final stop occurs in the first rotation fluctuation display, and one final stop in the second rotation fluctuation display. And a temporary stop and one final stop due to the pseudo-ream occur in the variable display at the third rotation, so the total number of stoppages of the decorative symbol is “4 times”. In this way, when the big hit is generated in the fluctuation display of any of the first to third rotations while staying in the hold continuous mode, the big hit is generated from the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. The total number of stops of the fixed stop count and the temporary stop count of the decorative symbols until the end of such variable display is always “4 times”. As a result, even if any one of the fluctuation displays of the first to third rotations in the hold continuous mode is a big hit, the big hit always occurs through the same number of fluctuation displays. It can look like In addition, when this configuration requirement is generalized or described as a general concept, “the total number of variable displays, which is the sum of the number of variable displays of the first symbol and the number of variable displays of the second symbol, is calculated from the end of the special game. If the result of the first success / failure determination or the second success / failure determination result is a big win in the situation of X times or less, the fluctuation display related to the big win is counted from the end of the special game to the Yth time ( Y ≦ X), the number of times that the decorative symbol combination is displayed with a fixed stop and the number of times that the decorative symbol combination is displayed with a temporary stop between the end of the special game and the Yth variation display. From the end of the special game to the Zth change display when the total number of times and the change display related to the jackpot is the Zth display (Z ≦ X and Z ≠ Y) after the end of the special game Decorative pattern combination is confirmed during Can be a combined count of the number of times as the decorative symbol combination is stopped display is temporarily stopped and displayed is expressed as configured "be the same. As a modification, “2 times” is the number of pseudo reams in the big hit fluctuation when the big hit is made in the first rotation of the reservation continuous mode, and the number of pseudo consecutive times in the big hit fluctuation in the case of the big hit in the second rotation of the reservation continuous mode May be set to “0”, and the number of quasi-reams in the big hit variation when the big hit is made in the third rotation of the hold continuous mode. In other words, in FIG. 115, the third pseudo ream in the big hit variation when the big hit is made in the first rotation of the hold continuous mode, and the second pseudo change in the big hit variation in the big hit in the second rotation of the hold continuous mode. It is also possible to abolish the first pseudo-ream in the big hit fluctuation when the big hit is made in the third rotation of the ream and the hold continuous mode, and continue the fluctuation as it is.

(Drop pattern in hold continuous mode)
In the variable display of the first to third rotations in the hold continuous mode, the combination of the temporary stop symbols when displaying the temporary stop as a combination of the three symbols of the decorative symbols is “2 · 4 · 6”. . Similarly, in the variable display of the 1st to 3rd rotations in the hold continuous mode, the combination of the fixed stop symbol when the fixed symbol is displayed as a combination of the three symbols of the decorative symbols is “2 · 4 · 6”. It is. Therefore, in the decorative symbol lottery processing in the reservation continuous mode, “2” as the disjoint symbol (non-reachable symbol) is used as the combination of the off symbol, the combination of the temporary stop symbol or the combination of the fixed stop symbol. “4, 6” is selected. For a player who pays attention to the variation display of decorative symbols, the same outlier symbol is used every time by adopting an even-numbered and same-colored feature of “2, 4 and 6” as a combination of off-point symbols. Can be impressed strongly to the player that the temporary stop display or the fixed stop display is displayed, and the effect of the production during the reserved continuous mode can be further enhanced.

  Next, specific contents of the reserved continuous mode effect will be described. As described above, the hold continuous mode effect is configured to include a special continuous effect that is executed across the jackpot end demonstration and the hold continuous mode. Even when the reserved continuous mode jackpot effect is executed or when the reserved continuous mode out-of-hold effect is executed, the content of the effect of the special continuous effect is basically the same.

≪Special continuous production≫
The special continuous effect is a movie effect that plays a predetermined video throughout the entire period of the effect scale. Specifically, in the special continuous production, a predetermined character image is sequentially displayed on the screen in the order of “seven” → “star” → “fight” → “dance”, and finally “seven stars”. This is an effect of displaying a character image (logo image) called “Tofu”. This final screen (the logo image of “Seven Star Fighting Dance”) is displayed in a loop using the remaining period until the end timing of the special continuous performance comes. That is, the special continuous effect is configured as an effect that is displayed in a flowing manner without any restriction on the display time of the final screen.

  The end timing of the special continuous effect is basically the end of the variable display at the third rotation when the variable display at the first to third rotations in the hold continuous mode is out of place. When a big hit occurs in the fluctuation display of any one of the first to third rotations in the continuous mode, it is 17 seconds before the fluctuation display relating to the big hit occurrence ends. The time scale of “17 seconds” is the production time (fixed time) of the special jackpot production.

  During the execution of this special continuous effect, a series of movie effects are played on the screen after the start of the big hit end demo, and the three rows of decorative symbols change as a small symbol, for example, reduced to the right corner of the screen Is displayed. Thereby, the player can be watched for the main effect (special continuous effect), and this special continuous effect can be shown as if it was an effect during a big hit end demonstration. Therefore, after the special continuous effect is finished, it is possible to make the appearance such that the change display of the first rotation after the end of the special game is started. Therefore, in any case where the big hit occurs in the fluctuation display from the first rotation to the third rotation, it can be seen as if the big hit has occurred in the fluctuation display of the first rotation. As described above, even if the decorative symbol is displayed as a small symbol at the edge of the screen, the special game ends when the decorative symbol suddenly appears and the first variable display is started. (The start of the fluctuation display for the first rotation) may be easily given to the player, so the decorative symbol (for example, the combination of the previous jackpot symbol) must be displayed before or after the big hit end demo. By displaying it as it is and connecting it to the fluctuation display of the first rotation as it is, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the special game has ended (that the fluctuation display of the first rotation has started).

  Here, in this example, regardless of the hold status at the end of the special game (presence / absence of active hold ball, number, win / no-go), the fluctuation display of the first to third rotations from the start of the big hit end demonstration ( Special continuous effect until the end of the fluctuation display of all deviations, or until the arrival of the predetermined timing (the above-mentioned end timing) of the fluctuation display related to the occurrence of the big hit in the first to third rotations Is executed (movie production is played back). Specifically, when there are 3 or more active reserve balls at the end of the special game, or there is an active reserve ball that is a big hit even if there are less than 3 active reserve balls at the end of the special game Since the variable display during the hold continuous mode can be continuously executed without interruption, the movie effect (special continuous effect) can be reproduced during the above-mentioned reference effect time (7 seconds). On the other hand, when there is no action hold ball at the end of the special game, or there are less than three action hold balls (all off action hold balls) at the end of the special game, all of them are digested When there is no longer an operation holding ball, a blank time (a state in which the fluctuation display is temporarily interrupted) occurs in which the variable display is interrupted each time during the holding continuous mode. However, in this example, in order to play the movie effect from the end of the special game (at the start of the big hit end demo), and to display the final screen in a loop without time restrictions after a certain amount of time has passed. Even if the above-mentioned blank time (the time when the variable display is stopped because there is no operation holding ball) occurs, the playback time of the final screen is only extended by the amount corresponding to the standard rendering time (7 seconds). The above problem does not occur (the problem that the movie production ends in the middle does not occur).

  Moreover, in this example, it is comprised so that a chance up effect can be performed during execution of the reservation continuous mode (special continuous effect). The chance-up effect is a look-ahead effect that suggests or notifies the possibility of a big hit in the variable display from the first rotation to the third rotation during the hold continuous mode. This chance-up effect is an effect in which a logo image of “one hit tosen” is emitted and displayed in a predetermined display color at a predetermined timing during execution of the special continuous effect, and whether or not the logo image appears, or Depending on the type of the luminescent color of the logo image, the level of expectation of the big hit during the reservation continuous mode is suggested or notified (details will be described later).

  Whether or not the chance-up effect can be executed and its effect pattern are determined in accordance with the jackpot expectation degree of the operation holding ball that exists immediately before the start of the jackpot end demonstration. That is, the prefetch lottery timing of the chance up effect is set to any timing from the end of the round game (final round) to the start of the jackpot end demo. The operation reservation balls to be prefetched lottery are the first to third operation reservation balls of the second special symbol. Therefore, no matter how many operation holding balls of the first special symbol exist, they are not subject to the prefetch lottery. The reason for this is that, as described above, so-called preferential digestion is employed in this example, in which the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol. In addition, the reason for limiting the number of active holding balls of the second special symbol to be pre-read to 3 or less (1st to 3rd) is that this chance up effect is whether or not a big hit occurs during the holding continuous mode This is because it is necessary to target the pre-drawing lottery for the operation holding balls (holding 1 to holding 3) corresponding to the first to third rotations staying in the holding continuous mode. Therefore, even if there are four reserve holding balls of the second special symbol immediately before the big hit start demonstration, all four operation holding balls are subject to the prefetch lottery. Instead, the first to third actuated balls are subject to the prefetch lottery. In addition, when there are less than 3 action-reserving balls of the second special symbol existing immediately before the big hit end demonstration, less than 3 (1 or 2) action-retaining balls are subject to pre-drawing lottery. However, as a modified example, the pre-read lottery for the chance-up effect may be executed only when there are three or more action-pending balls of the second special symbol at the pre-read lottery timing.

  FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram showing a Chang-up effect lottery table. In the chance up effect lottery table, whether or not the chance up effect can be executed and its effect pattern are defined. In the figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience, but actually, a determination number (lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a chance-up effect and its effect pattern according to the acquired lottery random value. (Random value range) is set, and whether or not the chance-up effect can be executed and its effect pattern are determined based on which judgment value the lottery random value belongs to. In this example, whether or not the chance-up effect can be executed and its effect pattern are determined by whether or not the jackpot is held in the action holding ball of the second special symbol (first to third action holding balls) subject to the prefetch lottery. It is determined depending on whether or not it exists. In the chance-up effect lottery table in the figure, any of the effect patterns “No effect”, “Normal pattern (white)”, or “Premier pattern (rainbow)” is selected for the pre-judgment result (whether or not a big hit) A selection rate (decision number) is assigned so that selection is possible. The normal pattern is an effect pattern in which a logo image “Seven Star Fighting Dance” is displayed in white on the screen. The premier pattern is an effect pattern in which a logo image “Seven Star Fighting Dance” is displayed in a rainbow color on the screen. The premier pattern is selected when the jackpot is present in the pre-determined result, but is not selected when the jackpot is not present in the pre-determined result (all cases are out of place). This is the production pattern. Therefore, with regard to this chance-up effect, there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur during the execution of the reserved continuous mode (first rotation to third rotation) in the order of “no effect” <“normal pattern” <“premier pattern”. It can be said.

  Here, the execution timing of the chance-up effect (normal pattern, premier pattern) during the reservation continuous mode is as follows. That is, when the first to third rotations in the hold continuous mode are all out of place, the execution timing of the chance-up effect is set to the third rotation. In addition, when the first rotation in the hold continuous mode is a big hit, the execution timing of the chance-up effect is set to the pseudo third continuous of the first rotation. In addition, when the second rotation in the reservation continuous mode is a big hit, the execution timing of the chance-up effect is set to the second pseudo turn of the second rotation. In addition, when the third rotation in the hold continuous mode is a big hit, the execution timing of the chance-up effect is set to the pseudo first station of the third rotation. As a modification, the chance-up effect may not be configured as a pre-reading effect, but may be configured as the variation effect (that is, the effect of effect lottery / decision at the start of variation). In that case, if the fluctuation display of the first rotation to the third rotation is out of place, the effect lottery / decision is made at the start of the fluctuation display of the third rotation, and the fluctuation display of any of the first rotation to the third rotation is performed. In the case of a big hit, the effect lottery / decision may be made at the start of the variable display for the first, second, and third rotations. In addition, it is preferable that the production execution timing is the same as the above timing.

  Next, an example of a special continuous production (including a chance-up production) will be described. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect of the special continuous effect when the first to third rotations in the hold continuous mode are all out of place, and FIG. 118 is a big hit for the third rotation in the hold continuous mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of special continuous production when becoming.

  First, an example of the effect of the special continuous effect in the case where the variation display of the first rotation to the third rotation in the hold continuous mode is all out of place will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in (A) in the drawing, when a special game is ended, a big hit end demo is started, whereby reproduction of a predetermined movie effect is started as a special continuous effect. With the start of this special continuous effect, “7, 7, 7” is reduced and displayed as the previous jackpot symbol at the right end of the screen. Note that the first “seven” characters of the character string “Nanasei Tobu” are displayed on the screen. In addition, a pre-fetch lottery for a chance-up effect is executed at the start of the big hit end demo. In this look-ahead lottery, based on the preliminary determination result of the first to third actuated balls of the second special symbol existing at the end of the jackpot, whether there is an actuated ball that is a big hit in the actuated ball It is determined whether or not the chance-up effect can be executed and its effect pattern according to the determination result. It is assumed that “no execution” is determined as the result of the pre-read lottery this time.

  As shown in (B) in the figure, the effect mode shifts to the hold continuous mode, and the variable display of the first rotation after the end of the special game is started. As described above, even when the effect mode shifts to the hold continuous mode, the special continuous effect (predetermined movie effect) is continuously displayed on the screen. On the screen, the second character “star” is displayed in the character string “seven star fight dance”. Further, while staying in the reserved continuous mode, the three rows of decorative symbols are variably displayed as small symbols at the right end of the screen.

  As shown in (C) in the figure, the fluctuation display for the first rotation is finished, and “2, 4, 6” is displayed as a definite stop display as the off symbol. On the screen, the third character “battle” in the character string “Nanasei Tobu” is displayed.

  As shown in (D) in the figure, the fluctuation display for the second rotation is started. On the screen, the fourth character “Mai” is displayed in the character string “Seven Star Fighting Dance”. In this way, in the early stage of the special continuous production, the character string “Nanasei Tobumai” is displayed while switching one character at a time in the order of “Seven” → “Star” → “Battle” → “Mai”.

  As shown in (E) in the figure, the fluctuation display of the second rotation is finished, and “2 · 4 · 6” is displayed as a fixed stop display as the off symbol. On the screen, the final screen of the movie production (logo image of “Seven Star Fighting Dance”) is displayed. This final screen is displayed in a loop until the end time of the special continuous effect (seven seconds after the start of the first rotation display) is reached.

  As shown in (F) in the figure, the change display of the third rotation is started. On the screen, the final screen of the movie effect is continuously displayed.

  As shown in (G) in the figure, the change display of the third rotation is finished, and “2, 4, 6” is displayed as a fixed stop display as the off symbol. In this way, the same outlier symbol “2, 4, 6” is displayed as a fixed stop display as the stop symbol of the variable display for the first to third rotations. At this time, the end timing of the special continuous effect arrives, and the playback of the movie effect ends. In addition, the hold continuous mode ends when the fluctuation display of the first to third rotations ends.

  As shown in (H) in the figure, the characters “1st BATTLE” are displayed on the screen, and the next display mode (seven-star fighting mode) is entered. Is started.

  Subsequently, an example of the effect of the special continuous effect when the change display of the third rotation in the hold continuous mode is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in (A) in the drawing, when a special game is ended, a big hit end demo is started, whereby reproduction of a predetermined movie effect is started as a special continuous effect. With the start of this special continuous effect, “7, 7, 7” is reduced and displayed as the previous jackpot symbol at the right end of the screen. Note that the first “seven” characters of the character string “Nanasei Tobu” are displayed on the screen. In addition, a pre-fetch lottery for a chance-up effect is executed at the start of the big hit end demo. In this look-ahead lottery, based on the preliminary determination result of the first to third actuated balls of the second special symbol existing at the end of the jackpot, whether there is an actuated ball that is a big hit in the actuated ball It is determined whether or not the chance-up effect can be executed and its effect pattern according to the determination result. It is assumed that “Premier Pattern” is determined as a result of this pre-read lottery.

  As shown in (B) in the figure, the effect mode shifts to the hold continuous mode, and the variable display of the first rotation after the end of the special game is started. As described above, even when the effect mode shifts to the hold continuous mode, the special continuous effect (predetermined movie effect) is continuously displayed on the screen. On the screen, the second character “star” is displayed in the character string “seven star fight dance”. Further, while staying in the reserved continuous mode, the three rows of decorative symbols are variably displayed as small symbols at the right end of the screen.

  As shown in (C) in the figure, the fluctuation display for the first rotation is finished, and “2, 4, 6” is displayed as a definite stop display as the off symbol. On the screen, the third character “battle” in the character string “Nanasei Tobu” is displayed.

  As shown in (D) in the figure, the fluctuation display for the second rotation is started. On the screen, the fourth character “Mai” is displayed in the character string “Seven Star Fighting Dance”. In this way, in the early stage of the special continuous production, the character string “Nanasei Tobumai” is displayed while switching one character at a time in the order of “Seven” → “Star” → “Battle” → “Mai”.

  As shown in (E) in the figure, the fluctuation display of the second rotation is finished, and “2 · 4 · 6” is displayed as a fixed stop display as the off symbol. On the screen, the final screen of the movie production (logo image of “Seven Star Fighting Dance”) is displayed. This final screen is displayed in a loop until the end time of the special continuous effect (seven seconds after the start of the first rotation display) is reached.

  As shown in (F) in the figure, the change display of the third rotation is started. On the screen, the final screen of the movie effect is continuously displayed. Immediately after the start of the variable display of the third rotation, a chance-up effect is generated, and a character image of “one hit tosen” is lit and displayed.

  As shown in (G) in the figure, “2 · 4 · 6” is temporarily stopped during the third rotation display. Thus, during the execution of the special continuous effect, the same outlier symbol “2, 4, 6” is used as the fixed stop symbol for the first rotation, the fixed stop symbol for the second rotation, and the temporary stop symbol for the third rotation. The fixed stop display or temporary stop display is displayed.

  As shown in (H) in the figure, when the re-variation display of the decorative symbol is started (when the third-rotation variation display is resumed), the characters “1st BATTLE” are displayed (see FIG. 117 (above). The same screen as H) is displayed), and it looks as if the change display of the first rotation after the end of the special game has started (appears as if entering the Seven Star Fighting Mode). When the re-variable display is thus started, a special jackpot effect (detailed below) is started.

≪Special jackpot production≫
Next, the special jackpot effect in the reservation continuous mode will be described. As shown in FIG. 115, the special jackpot effect is a jackpot notification effect informing that the movable accessory 24 has been dropped and won the jackpot, and the number of prize balls that the player can acquire in the special game after the jackpot winning is confirmed. And a count-up effect for informing the user. It should be noted that the same time value (17 seconds) is set for the time scale of the special big hit effect regardless of which of the first to third rotation fluctuation displays during the hold continuous mode.

  The jackpot notification effect is an effect of notifying that the winning combination has been confirmed because the movable accessory 24 has dropped to the front of the screen. At this point, the player is not notified of which jackpot type is won, and the jackpot type (the number of prize balls theoretically earned in this special game) is played by the count-up effect described below. Is notified to the person.

  The count-up effect is a promotion effect that displays a process in which the number of theoretical prize balls that can be obtained in the special game executed based on the big hit this time (the number of obtainable prize balls) is added. Note that the number of awardable winning balls (may be referred to as “the number of scheduled winning balls”) is actually determined in advance according to the jackpot type (actual number of rounds). Here, the promotion effect (count-up effect) in this example is after suggesting or notifying the provisional profit mode that can be enjoyed based on the jackpot announced during the change display, and then the degree of profit than the provisional profit mode. It is configured as an effect that suggests or reports a high true profit mode. Specifically, a false earnable number of winning balls “0” is temporarily presented as a temporary profit mode (or without displaying the temporary profit mode), and the profit mode ( The number of obtainable award balls) is promoted, and finally a true profit mode (the true number of obtainable award balls set in accordance with the jackpot type) is presented. That is, the count-up effect in this example is a round-up effect (round-up effect) that suggests or notifies that the number of real rounds will increase as the number of awardable winning balls that can be enjoyed by the player increases (promotion). ).

  The count-up effect is a midway effect in which the process of adding the number of prize balls according to the player's operation of the effect button 15 is displayed, and the final result in which the theoretically obtainable number of prize balls is displayed as the final result. It consists of directing. Note that the final result of the number of awardable winning balls is presented to the player at the timing when the variation display of the decorative symbols ends (timing at which the big hit symbol is confirmed and stopped) or before that timing.

  The “number of awardable winning balls” is a theoretical winning ball that can be acquired by a player based on a game ball entering the big prize opening 65 in one special game executed based on the current big hit. Means a number (theoretical value). Therefore, the number of awardable winning balls is set in advance based on the type of jackpot (special game). The number of winning balls (the number of scheduled winning balls) is the number of long open rounds (substantial number of rounds) in the special game executed this time, and the maximum number of balls that can be entered into the big winning opening 65 in one round game ( (Predetermined count number) and the number of prize balls to be paid out each time a game ball enters the big prize opening 65 (number of unit prize balls in the big prize opening). In this example, “10 balls” is set as the specified count number, and “10 balls” is set as the unit prize ball number. For example, in a special game executed by winning a “16R conditional special jackpot”, the number of awardable winning balls is 16 rounds (substantial rounds) × 10 balls (prescribed count number) × 10 balls (unit prize balls) Number) = 1600.

  FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram showing a count-up effect pattern table. The lottery timing of the count-up effect is when the variable display related to the jackpot starts (or when the special continuous effect starts or ends). The count-up effect pattern includes a count-up effect pattern A and a count-up effect pattern B. The count-up effect pattern A is effect content in which the number of prize balls is added by a single operation of the effect button 15. In this count-up effect pattern A, the number of effective operations of the effect button 15 allowed for one operation input instruction displayed on the screen is one. In this example, since a total of two operation input instructions are generated during the special big hit effect, the operation of the effect button 15 is made effective twice. The count-up effect pattern B is the effect content in which the number of prize balls is added by continuous operation of the effect button 15 (so-called continuous hitting). In the count-up effect pattern B, basically, there is no restriction on the number of effective operations of the effect button 15 while the “continuous hitting” instruction is displayed on the screen (or 50 times greatly exceeding 2 times). The player can operate the effect button 15 a plurality of times (can be continuously hit). In this example, the expected value of the number of winning balls obtained in the special game is higher when the count-up effect pattern A is displayed than when the count-up effect pattern B is displayed. In other words, it won a big hit with a relatively large number of winning balls (a big hit with a large number of real rounds) rather than winning a big hit with a relatively small number of winning balls (a big hit with a small number of real rounds). In the case, the count-up effect pattern A is set to be more likely to be selected (in contrast, the count-up effect pattern B is set to be less likely to be selected). . As a modification, the expected value of the number of prize balls obtained in the special game is higher when the count-up effect pattern B is displayed than when the count-up effect pattern A is displayed. Also good. In other words, it won a big hit with a relatively large number of winning balls (a big hit with a large number of real rounds) rather than winning a big hit with a relatively small number of winning balls (a big hit with a small number of real rounds). In this case, the count-up effect pattern B may be set to be more likely to be selected (the count-up effect pattern A may be set to be less likely to be selected). In the case of winning a big hit (normal big hit with 6R condition, 1,2,5R normal big hit with 1,2R condition, special big hit with 2R condition, 2R specific special big hit) with the number of real rounds set to 4 rounds or less The count-up effect pattern A is not selected, and only the count-up effect pattern B is selected. As a modification, the jackpot in which the number of substantial rounds is set to 4 rounds or less may be configured so that the count-up effect itself does not occur in the variable display. Further, for the special big hit with 16R condition when the big win is made with the gold symbol combination (“7, 7, 7”), the count-up effect may not be executed by the variable display.

  FIG. 120 is a schematic diagram showing a count-up effect lottery table. In this example, the count-up effect lottery table is used to determine the added value of the number of prize balls displayed in the midway effect and the final display value (number of obtainable prize balls) displayed in the final effect. To do. Here, as a method of determining the addition value, an addition value corresponding to one button operation may be determined one by one from the count-up effect lottery table, or a scenario (addition value) as a count-up effect may be determined. Or the like may be determined. In the case of the count-up effect pattern A, the scenario may be determined by determining the combination of the first and second addition values at once, and in the case of the count-up effect pattern B, the combination of the first to 50th addition values. May be determined at a time. In the figure, for the sake of convenience, the numerical values used for the lottery are omitted, but in actuality, the determination value for determining the display value of the count-up effect for the acquired lottery random number value (range of the lottery random value) ) Is set, and the display value of the count-up effect is determined on the basis of which determination unit number the lottery random number value belongs to.

  In the figure, the final display value (the number of awardable winning balls) that is finally displayed in the count-up effect patterns A and B is defined. This final display value (the number of winable winning balls) is determined according to the type of jackpot (the number of real rounds). When it is a specific jackpot with 2R condition, it is “200”, 5R condition normal jackpot or 6R condition "300" for a normal big hit with a 4R condition, "400" for a specific big hit with a 4R condition, "800" for a specific big hit with an 8R condition, "1200" for a specific big hit with a 12R condition, “1600” is set in the case of a specific big hit with 16R condition.

  In the figures (B) and (C), in the count-up effect pattern A, an added value (addition value) of the number of prize balls displayed each time the effect button is operated is determined. In the figure, (B) defines the added value of the number of prize balls for the first operation of the effect button, and (C) in the figure defines the added value of the number of prize balls for the second operation of the effect button 15. Specifically, “200”, “400”, “600”, “800”, “1000”, “1200”, “1200”, “200”, “400”, “600”, “800”, “1000”, “ 1400 "is set. Thus, the added value of the number of prize balls set in the count-up effect pattern A is a value that is an integral multiple of the number of unit prize balls (10 balls) of the big prize opening 65. In addition, the added value of the number of prize balls of each time is selected within a range in which the total value of the added value of the number of prize balls for the first time and the added value of the number of prize balls for the second time does not exceed the number of winning balls Is done. Here, as a modification, “0” may be included in the candidate for the addition value shown in FIG. On the other hand, “1600” may be included in the addition value candidates shown in FIG.

  In (D) in the figure, in the count-up effect pattern B, the number of prize balls (additional value) displayed each time the effect button is operated is determined. Specifically, “1”, “2”, “3”, “5”, “10”, “20”, “30” are added values of the number of prize balls displayed by operating the effect button once. ”,“ 50 ”,“ 100 ”,“ 200 ”,“ 300 ”,“ 500 ”, and“ 1000 ”. Thus, the added value of the number of prize balls set in the count-up effect pattern B is different from the added value of the number of prize balls set in the count-up effect pattern A, and the number of unit prize balls (10 In some cases (for example, “1” to “5”). Here, as a modification, “0” may be included in the candidate for the addition value shown in FIG. The added value of “0” is preferably selected at the time of successive hits after reaching the final display value (number of winable winning balls), but before reaching the final display value (number of winable winning balls). It may be selected.

  Next, an example of a count-up effect will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a count-up effect. A count-up effect pattern A is shown in the upper part of the figure, and a count-up effect pattern B is shown in the lower part of the figure. As will be described in detail later, in the eighth embodiment, after the final display value (the number of awardable winning balls) is displayed, the decoration symbol combination “7, 7, 7”, etc. is confirmed and stopped. The count-up effect may be executed after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol combination “7, 7, 7” or the like. In addition, the display of “Get ***” in the figure may be omitted.

  First, an example of the count-up effect pattern A will be described. Here, (A1) to (A4) in the figure indicate intermediate progress effects, and (A5) in the figure indicates the final effect.

  As shown in (A1) in the figure, at the start of the count-up effect, a message (operation input instruction) of “one blow” is displayed on the screen together with an image imitating the effect button 15. Note that a display area for presenting the number of awardable winning balls at the current stage is provided at the upper left of the screen, and “Get0000” is displayed as the initial value of the number of awardable winning balls.

  As shown in (A2) in the figure, when the player operates the effect button 15 once, a numerical value “+200” is displayed as the added value of the number of prize balls, and “200 pieces of prize balls that can be obtained at the current stage” are displayed. "Is added. Thereby, the numerical value of the number of awardable winning balls displayed on the screen is updated to “200”.

  As shown in (A3) in the drawing, a message (operation input instruction) “Blow” is displayed on the screen again together with an image imitating the effect button 15.

  As shown in (A4) in the figure, when the player operates the effect button 15 once, a numerical value “+800” is displayed as the added value of the number of prize balls, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained at the current stage is “800 pieces”. It is notified that a prize ball of “is added. As a result, the value of the number of awardable winning balls displayed on the screen is updated to “1000”.

  As shown in (A5) in the figure, the final display value “1600” is displayed at the timing when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished and the big hit symbol “7, 7, 7” is confirmed and stopped. In this special game, it is notified that the number of winning balls that can be acquired by the player is “1600”. In this way, the player can be notified of the true number of winning balls that can be earned. As a modification, the added value displayed by the second operation of the effect button 15 is an added value that reaches the final display value (added value that reaches the final display value when added to the first added value). You may comprise as follows. That is, as the second addition value, a difference value between the final display value and the first addition value may be selected. Specifically, when applied to the illustrated example, a numerical value “+1400” is displayed as the second addition value, and the final display value (1600) is reached.

  Subsequently, an example of the count-up effect pattern B will be described. Here, (B1) to (B4) in the figure indicate intermediate progress effects, and (B5) in the figure indicates the final effect.

  As shown in (B1) in the figure, at the start of the count-up effect, a message (operation input instruction) “continuous hit” is displayed on the screen together with an image imitating the effect button 15. Note that a display area for presenting the number of awardable winning balls at the current stage is provided at the upper left of the screen, and “Get0000” is displayed as the initial value of the number of awardable winning balls.

  As shown in (B2) in the figure, when the player operates the effect button 15 once, a numerical value of “+5” is displayed as the added value of the number of prize balls, and the number of prize balls that can be acquired at the current stage is “5”. It is notified that a prize ball of “is added. Thereby, the numerical value of the number of awardable winning balls displayed on the screen is updated to “5”.

  As shown in (B3) in the figure, when the player operates the effect button 15 again, a numerical value “+30” is displayed as the added value of the number of prize balls, and “30” prize balls are included in the number of prize balls that can be obtained. It is notified that is added. Thereby, the numerical value of the number of awardable winning balls displayed on the screen is updated to “35”.

  As shown in (B4) in the figure, when the player strikes the effect button 15 repeatedly (operating a plurality of times), the added value of the number of prize balls is displayed one after another, and the prize ball corresponding to the total number of the added values is displayed. It is notified that the number has been added to the number of winning prize balls. As a result, the numerical value of the number of awardable winning balls displayed on the screen is updated to “355”.

  As shown in (B5) in the figure, the final display value “800” is displayed at the timing when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished and the big hit symbol “3. In this special game, it is notified that the number of winning balls that can be acquired by the player is 800. In this way, the player can be notified of the true number of winning balls that can be earned. As a modification, the final display value may be reached during continuous hitting. Specifically, when applied to the illustrated example described above, a numerical value “GET800” is displayed on the upper left of the screen during continuous hitting and reaches the final display value (800). Here, after reaching the final display value, it is preferable that “0” is always displayed as the added value even if the effect button 15 is operated again (even if it is repeatedly hit).

<Prize ball notification effect>
Next, the prize ball number notification effect in the eighth embodiment will be described. The number-of-balls notification effect is the number of prize balls (acquired number of prize balls) paid out based on the number of game balls entered into the big prize opening 65 or the general prize opening 54 during execution of the special game to the player. This is a notification effect.

  FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen for a prize ball number notification effect displayed during a special game. In the prize ball number notification effect, as the number of prize balls paid out during the special game, the first prize prize number A1, the second prize prize number A2, the first cumulative prize prize number B1, and the second cumulative prize award. The number of balls B2 is to be notified.

  The first winning award number A1 is the number of award balls that have been acquired so far based on the number of game balls that have been entered in the special winning opening 65 in one special game that is currently being executed (the award that has been actually acquired) Number of balls). Since the first winning prize ball number A1 is the number of winning balls that the player has actually acquired, the first winning prize ball number A1 is smaller than the above-mentioned number of winable winning balls (theoretical expected winning ball number) set according to the type of jackpot Will not exceed the number of awardable balls.

  The number of the second winning prize balls A2 is the number of prize balls that have been won so far based on the number of game balls that have been entered into the general winning opening 54 in one special game that is currently being executed (the prize that has actually been obtained). Number of balls). The second winning prize ball number A2 is added with the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the general winning opening 54 arranged in the right-handed area, but is arranged in the left-handed area. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the general prize opening 51 to 53 is not added. In other words, the second winning prize ball number A2 is such that a game ball launched with the aim of a right-handed area (big winning opening 65) during execution of the special game cannot enter the big winning slot 65, and instead, the general winning opening The number of prize balls to be paid out when the player can enter the ball 54 is the subject of notification. It should be noted that the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the general prize opening 54 during the specific game state is not added to the second number of prize balls A2.

  The first cumulative winning prize ball number B1 is the number of prize balls that have been obtained to date based on the game balls entering the special prize opening 65 in the special game in Renso (the number of prize balls that have actually been obtained) ). "Landsou" or "rensou state" means returning to a non-specific gaming state after the first occurrence that triggers a transition from a non-specific gaming state to a specific gaming state as a gaming state in a non-special gaming state It is a state in which the specific game state continues (a state in which the big hits in the specific game state are continuously generated). This first cumulative number of winning balls B1 includes the number of winning balls that can be acquired by entering a game ball into the big winning opening 65 in the special game at the time of first hit. Note that the “special game state” is a state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than the normal state (low probability state, non-open extended state). This is a state in which at least one of the time shortening function and the electric Chu support function is activated. In this example, it means a gaming state in which at least the electric chew support function is operating as the specific gaming state. Therefore, the specific game state in this example corresponds to a probability change state and a short time state. In this example, even if any of the big hit types is won, at least 30 electric rotations or 100 rotations after the special game is displayed, the electric chew support state is activated. During the 100 revolutions, the game state is in a specific game state, and the extended game state continues on condition that a big hit occurs during this time.

  The second cumulatively acquired prize ball number B2 is the number of prize balls that can be obtained to date based on the game balls entering the general prize opening 54 in the special game in Renso (the number of prize balls that can be actually obtained). ). The second cumulative number of winning balls B2 includes the number of winning balls that can be acquired by entering a game ball into the general winning port 54 in the special game at the time of first hit. Note that the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the general prize opening 54 during the specific game state is not added to the second cumulative prize ball number B2.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the effect control board 200 has a first winning prize ball for counting the first winning prize number A1 in order to manage each winning ball number A1, A2, B1, B2 during the big hit. A number counter CA1, a second earned prize ball number counter CA2 for counting the second earned prize ball number A2, and a first cumulative earned prize ball count CB1 for counting the first accumulated prize ball number B1. And a second cumulative earned prize ball number counter CB2 for counting the second cumulative earned prize ball number B2. Specifically, when a game ball enters the grand prize opening 65 during execution of the special game, each time a big prize opening prize command is received from the main control board 100, the first winning prize ball number counter A1 and The count value of the first cumulative acquired prize ball number counter B1 is updated, and the acquired information (first acquired prize ball number A1 and first cumulative acquired prize ball number B1) displayed on the screen is updated accordingly. The first acquired prize ball number counter A1 and the first cumulative prize ball number counter B1 are reset to zero at the start or end of the special game. Similarly, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 54 arranged in the right-handed area during execution of the special game, the second winning prize is received every time a general winning opening winning command is received from the main control board 100. The count values of the ball number counter CA2 and the second cumulative earned prize ball number counter CB2 are updated, and the obtained information displayed on the screen accordingly (second earned prize ball number A2 and second cumulative earned prize ball number B2) Will also be updated. The second acquired award ball number counter CA2 and the second cumulative award ball number counter CB2 are reset to zero at the end of the extended game (when the time-short state is completed or when the normal state is restored).

  With regard to the number of winning balls, the specification is such that “10” winning balls are paid out with respect to one ball entering the winning prize opening 65 (that is, the number of winning unit balls in the winning prize opening 65 is 10). Therefore, the first winning prize ball number A1 and the first cumulative winning ball number B1 are updated in units of “10”. Similarly, in this example, the specification is such that “3” prize balls are paid out for one entry into the general prize opening 54 (that is, the number of unit prize balls in the general prize opening 54 is 3). The second winning prize ball number A2 and the second cumulative winning ball number B2 are updated in units of “three”.

  As described above, in the prize ball number notification effect in this example, during the execution of the special game (round game), the first winning prize ball number A1, the second winning prize ball number A2, and the first cumulative winning prize ball number B1. Then, the second cumulative earned ball number B2 is displayed. In FIG. 122, “1280” as the first winning prize ball number A1, “30” as the second winning prize ball number A2, “9850” as the first cumulative winning ball number B1, and the second cumulative winning prize on the screen. “160” is displayed as the number of balls B2. As a result, in one special game that is currently being executed, at the present stage, 1280 prize balls are obtained based on the entrance to the big prize opening 65, and the general winning entrance 54 arranged in the right-handed area is obtained. The player is presented with 30 winning balls based on the entry. Similarly, in the special game in Renso, at the present stage, 9850 prize balls are obtained based on the entry to the big prize opening 65, and based on the entry to the general prize opening 54 arranged in the right-handed area. The player is presented with 160 prize balls. In this way, by actively notifying the number of award balls based on the number of balls entered to the general winning port 54 during special games that the player has not been much conscious of in the past, the player can enter the large winning port 65. It becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize that the game ball (spilled ball) that did not exist has entered the general winning opening 54, and the player can enjoy not only the large winning opening 65 but also the general winning opening 54. (It can be expected that the player has an opportunity to actively enter the game ball into the general winning opening 54). As a modified example, instead of individually displaying the first winning prize ball number A1 and the second winning prize ball number A2, the first winning prize ball number A1 and the second winning prize ball number A2 are displayed in total. Alternatively, the first cumulative earned prize ball number B1 and the second cumulative earned prize ball number B2 are not individually displayed, but the first cumulative earned prize ball number B1 and the second cumulative earned prize ball number. B2 and the total may be displayed. In other words, the total number of the first winning prize ball number A1 and the second winning prize ball number A2 may be displayed, and the total of the first cumulative winning prize ball number B1 and the second cumulative winning prize ball number B2 may be displayed. A number may be displayed. Specifically, when applied to the example shown in FIG. 122, “1310” is the total number of the first winning prize ball number A1 (1280) and the second winning prize ball number A2 (30) as the winning prize ball number. ”Is displayed, and“ 10010 ”, which is the total number of the first cumulative earned prize ball number B1 (9850) and the second cumulative earned prize ball number B2 (160), is displayed as the cumulative earned prize ball number.

(Variation 1 of prize ball number notification effect)
In the above-described embodiment, during the execution of the special game, the first acquired award ball number A1 that the player can actually acquire in this one special game is displayed. You may display 1 acquisition prize ball number A1 and the theoretically obtainable prize ball number which a player can acquire in a pair. For example, when a special jackpot with a 16R condition is won as a jackpot type, the number of winning balls that can be earned is “1600”, and therefore the first number of winning balls A1 at the current stage is “780” For example, it is preferable to display the first acquired award ball number A1 and the acquirable award ball number as a pair such as “780/1600”. Here, when an over-winning to be described later occurs, the number of obtainable winning balls “1600” may be exceeded, and “1610/1600” or “1650/1600” may be displayed. That is, the number of winning balls (theoretical value) is displayed in excess of the number of winning balls based on over winning. In addition, for such pair display, the first winning prize ball number A1 and the second winning prize ball number A2 may be displayed in total. In this case, “1605/1600” or “1635/1600”. Can be a display. That is, the number of winning balls (theoretical value) is displayed in excess of the number of winning balls based on the number of game balls that enter the general winning opening 54.

(Variation 2 of prize ball number notification effect)
In addition to the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the number of game balls entered within the specified count to the big prize opening 65, the first prize winning number A1 and the first cumulative prize prize number B1 are included in the big prize opening 65 The number of prize balls paid out based on the number of game balls entered outside the prescribed count (ie, the number of prize balls due to excess winning) may be added. The over-winning is a form of winning that is commonly called an over-winning. In one round game, the number of game balls exceeding the specified count (10 balls) enter the big prize opening 65 and the big prize opening switch. It is detected at 651. This excess winning is not actually generated in the short open round, but is generated in the long open round. Here, as in the above-described modification, when displaying the first winning ball number A1 and the number of winable winning balls as a pair, the number of winning balls won by the extra winning each time an extra winning occurs. Is preferably added to the first acquired award ball number A1, and the awardable number of award balls is also updated accordingly. For example, the number of obtainable prize balls “1600” is updated by the number of prize balls based on over winning, and “1610/1610” or “1650/1650” is displayed. In other words, when an excessive winning occurs, the theoretical numerical value (the number of winable winning balls) is also changed, so that it is possible to accurately notify the player that the excessive winning (over winning) has occurred. . It should be noted that the number of winning balls due to excessive winning is not added to the first winning prize ball number A1 and the first cumulative winning ball number B1, but is added to the second winning prize ball number A2 and the second cumulative winning prize ball number B2. You may make it add. In other words, the number of winning balls due to excess winnings may be handled as “bonus”, and the theoretically obtainable winning ball number itself may hold a numerical value as originally set.

(Variation 3 of prize ball number notification effect)
In the above-described embodiment, every time a game ball enters the general winning opening 54 during execution of the special game, the second acquired prize ball number A2 displayed on the screen is updated in units of “5”. However, for example, the total number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the general prize opening 54 during execution of the special game is displayed together at the end of the special game. It may be configured. According to the configuration, when the number of unit winning balls in the general winning opening 54 is a small number, or when it is difficult to enter the general winning opening 54, the number of winning balls is updated and displayed in a small amount. Is also effective when the production effect is low.

(Variation 4 of prize ball number notification effect)
Next, a modified example in which the above-mentioned prize ball number notification effect is applied to a game machine of a type called “small hit V” will be described. This model includes a first big prize opening corresponding to a big hit game (including a case where a small hit development big hit) and a second big prize opening corresponding to the small hit game. In the present modification, big hits, small hits, and disengages are set as the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination. There are two types of “Small Bonus”: “Small Bonus with Small Time”, which shifts to the short-time state after the end of the special game as a small-hit development jackpot, and transitions to the normal state after the end of the special game with the small-hit development big hit. There is a "small hit without time". Here, when the result of the determination is a small hit, one round game (unit game) accompanied by the opening of the second big prize opening is performed as the small hit game. In this small hit game, when a game ball enters the specific area (V zone) provided in the second big prize opening, it is promoted from “small hit” to “big hit” (that is, winning the small hit development big hit) ), As a special game (a big hit game), a plurality of round games (unit games) accompanied by the opening of the first big prize opening are performed. After the special game is over, if the gaming state shifts to a short-time state, a small hit is likely to occur when the game ball enters the second starting port 62, and the possibility of developing from the small hit to the big hit is likely. Also gets higher. In addition, when a small hit occurs in the short-time state, the probability that the gaming state will shift to the short-time state after the end of the special game is higher than when a small hit occurs in the normal state (in other words, there is a short time) The probability of winning a small win increases). For this reason, in this model called “small hit V”, the game is aimed to continue the so-called “renso” by repeating the small hit development big hit in a short time state. That is, by continuing the short-time state, the game aiming at the small hit V can be continued by causing the game ball to enter the second starting port 62 under the electric chew support state (easy entry state). Become. On the other hand, after the special game is over, if the gaming state does not shift to the short-time state (transition to the normal state), the electric chew support state (the easy entry state) ends, so the second start Since it becomes difficult (substantially impossible) to enter the game ball into the mouth 62, the game is aimed at the first start port 61. In addition, in the small hit game, when the game ball cannot be entered in the specific area (V Thorn), the game state before the small hit occurrence continues without shifting to the special game (that is, Small wins are winning types that do not trigger game state transition). In the prize ball number notification effect of this model having such a configuration, the number of prize balls actually paid out when a game ball enters the first big prize opening during the execution of one special game (big hit game) ( The total number of winning balls) is reported as “first winning winning ball number A1,” and it was actually paid out when a game ball entered the second big prize opening during one small hit game. The number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls) is preferably notified as “second winning ball number A2”. That is, when a small hit development jackpot occurs, the number of winning balls won in the small hit game (one round game) is notified as the second winning prize number A2, and the big hit game based on the small hit development jackpot ( The number of winning balls acquired in a plurality of round games) is notified as the first winning winning ball number A1. The same applies to the first cumulative prize ball number B1 and the second cumulative prize ball number B2. Here, the number of winning balls acquired by entering the game ball into the general winning opening 54 may be added to the second winning winning ball number A2. Also, in the above-described modified example 4, the first earned prize ball number A1 and the second earned prize ball number A2 may be displayed in total, and the first accumulated earned prize ball number B1 and the second accumulated earned prize ball number B2 may be displayed. And may be displayed in total. Furthermore, the specifications of the above-described modifications 2 and 3 may be applied to the above-described modification 4.

  As described above, the main effects achieved in the eighth embodiment are summarized as follows.

  (1) The variation pattern is selected according to the game status and the type of jackpot when the bonus is displayed until the number of times the symbol has been changed after the special game ends. Since the state transition modes are different, various game characteristics can be created, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  (2) When a big hit occurs when the gaming state is a normal state and a transition to a relatively short entering easy state occurs, if a big hit occurs again in the short entering easy state, Since the transition to the easy entry state for a long period of time is made, the possibility that the big hits can be continued in the easy entry state for a relatively long period of time (the continuous play state is continued) is increased. In other words, once a transition is made from a relatively unfavorable gaming state (non-electric chew support state) to a relatively advantageous gaming state (electric chew support state), the relatively advantageous gaming state is likely to continue. It is possible to realize game play of the system, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  (3) In the variable display of the predetermined number of times after the end of the special game, the sum of the number of fixed stop and the number of temporary stop of the decorative symbol is set to the same number, and the temporary stop symbol and the fixed stop symbol of the decorative symbol are the same symbol. Thus, even if a big hit occurs in any of the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times after the end of the special game, as if viewed from the player, it is as if the same timing (the last round in the hold continuous mode) In addition, it is possible to create a new game production that has never existed before, and the production of the production mode (holding continuous mode) set after the end of the special game. The effect can be enhanced, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  (4) It seems as if the jackpot end demonstration is continuing the process of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays by connecting the end of the special game and the predetermined number of fluctuation displays after the end as a series of continuous effects. By making it an effect, even if a big hit occurs in any of the fluctuation displays of the predetermined number of times, when viewed from the player, it is as if the fluctuation display of the first rotation after the end of the special game Because it can be recognized as if a big hit has occurred (because it can look like if the big hit and the current big hit are generated in succession), a new unprecedented A game effect can be created, and the effect of the effect mode (holding continuous mode) set after the end of the special game can be enhanced. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  (5) As an effect pattern of promotion effect (count-up effect) executed during the change display of symbols, effect pattern A and effect pattern B having different display processes in the middle are provided, and various effects development of promotion effect is provided. In addition to eliminating the monotonous nature of the game production, it is possible to prevent the final display result (number of award balls) from falling ahead in the middle of the display process, and the winning prize until the final display result is obtained. The player's expectation on the number of balls can be maintained, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  (6) Announces the number of prize balls obtained when a game ball enters the big prize opening and the number of prize balls obtained when the game ball enters the general prize opening during the execution of special games By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player's sole concern whether or not a large number of prize balls can be obtained by aiming at the big prize opening in the special game in the recreational resort, and aiming at the general prize opening Can be enjoyed by the player (the player can be expected to increase opportunities to actively enter the game ball into the general winning opening), increase the player's excitement, and make the game even more interesting It becomes possible to make it rich.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the game state after the end of the special game is in a high probability state (based on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area of the big prize opening in the specific round during the special game) The configuration adopting the so-called ball-like machine that decides whether or not to shift to (probable change state) has been described as an example. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the end of the special game shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state) depending on which of the following is a normal big hit). In this case, in FIG. 94, “conditional big hit” in this example corresponds to “specific big hit (probable variation big hit)”, and “conditional big hit” in this example becomes “normal big hit (non-probable big hit)”. Equivalent to. With regard to the application of FIG. 96 and FIG. 97, when “special jackpot” is won, the column of “game state or variation pattern selection state when winning V” is applied, and “normal jackpot” is won Is applied to the column of “game state or variation pattern selection state when V is not won”.

[Eighth embodiment-first modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. Is mainly described in the different parts.

  In the gaming machine according to the above-described eighth embodiment, 11 types of selection states are provided as the variation pattern selection state, but in the gaming machine according to the present modification, 12 types of selection states are provided as the variation pattern selection state. Yes. That is, in this modification, “selection state 2A” and “selection state 2B” are prepared as modifications of the above-described “selection state 2”. More specifically, in the eighth embodiment, in the fluctuation display at the 30th rotation in the non-commissioned mission mode, regardless of whether or not the time-short state ends in the fluctuation display, “selected” is selected as the fluctuation pattern selection state. “State 2” was set. In the present modification, in the fluctuation display at the 30th rotation in the non-bidirectional mission mode, the state selectively branches to the selection state 2A or the selection state 2B according to the number of short-time operation times (30 times or 100 times) given by the occurrence of the big hit. It is configured as follows. In other words, in the variable display at the 30th rotation in the non-commissioned mission mode, when the number of short-time operation is set to 30 (when the short-time state continues after the 31st rotation), the state shifts to the selection state 2A and the short-time operation When 100 is set as the number of times (when the time-short state is completed at the 30th rotation this time), the state shifts to the selection state 2B.

  Here, FIG. 124A is a schematic diagram showing a selected state transition pattern in the first modified example of the eighth embodiment. As described above, the variation pattern selection state is one of selection conditions referred to when a variation pattern (variation pattern table) is selected. In this modification, 12 types of selection states 0, 1, 2A, 2B, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 are prepared as the variation pattern selection states. Of the twelve types of selection states, the selection states other than the selection states 2A and 2B are the same as those in the eighth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 124A, three types of selection state transition patterns X, Y, and Z in which the order of transition of the variation pattern selection state is defined are prepared. The selection state transition patterns X and Y are transition patterns corresponding to 100 times of short-time operation, and the selection state transition pattern Z is a transition pattern corresponding to 30 times of short-time operation. Since the selected state transition pattern X is the same as that in the eighth embodiment, it is omitted in the following description unless otherwise specified.

  The selection state transition pattern Y is selected state 1 (29 times) → selected state 2A (one time) → selected state 1 (69 times) → selected state 2B (one time) in the display of fluctuations of 100 rotations after the end of the special game. ), The variation pattern selection state transitions. When selection state 2B ends, selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs.

  In the selected state transition pattern Z, the variation pattern selection state transitions in the order of selection state 1 (29 times) → selection state 2B (1 time) in the 30-turn variation display after the end of the special game. When selection state 2B ends, selection state 0 is set until the next big hit occurs.

  Next, FIG. 124B is a schematic diagram illustrating a selection state setting table in the first modification of the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 124 (B), in the variation pattern selection state setting table, a selection state transition pattern is associated with each jackpot type (symbol group). Also in this modification, the selected state transition pattern is set according to the jackpot type (symbol group), the gaming state when the jackpot occurs, and the presence or absence of a V prize during the special game.

  When the game state is the normal state, the selected state transition pattern Y wins “6R condition normal big hit 1” or “5R condition normal big hit 1” in the first special symbol lottery process, and the special game This is a transition pattern that is set when a V prize is not awarded. In other words, the selected state transition pattern Y is a transition pattern during a change display of a total of 100 rotations to which the time reduction state is given. For this reason, even when the one-turn fluctuation display (fluctuation display at the 30th rotation) staying in the selection state 2A as the fluctuation pattern selection state is completed, the time-saving state continues.

  On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state, the selected state transition pattern Z wins “6R condition normal big hit 2” or “5R condition normal big hit 2” in the first special symbol lottery process, This is a transition pattern set when a V prize is not won during a special game. In other words, the selected state transition pattern Z is a transition pattern during a change display of a total of 30 rotations to which the time reduction state is given. Therefore, when the one-turn variation display (variation display at the 30th rotation) staying in the selection state 2B as the variation pattern selection state is terminated, the time-short state is terminated and the normal state is restored.

  Next, FIGS. 125 to 126 are schematic views showing a special symbol variation pattern table in the first modification of the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, only the variation pattern table set corresponding to the selection states 2A and 2B will be described. Since “final variation effect A” in the figure has already been described, redundant description is omitted here.

(Variation pattern table 2A)
FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 2A. The variation pattern table 2A is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 2A. The variation pattern table 2 </ b> A is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss).

  In the variation pattern table 2A for loss, a variation pattern PH2A-1 (final variation effect A (continuation)) is set. Here, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct is out of place, the variation pattern PH2A-1 (final variation effect A (continuation)) is selected without depending on the number of operation-pending balls. Similarly, when the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is correct is out of place, the variation pattern PH2A-1 (final variation effect A (continuation)) is selected without depending on the number of reserved balls. That is, when the result of the determination on whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is wrong is selected, only the variation pattern PH2A-1 with the final variation effect A (continuation) is selected.

  In the big hit variation pattern table 2, variation patterns PA2A-1 (final variation effect A (relief)) and PA2A-2 (final variation effect A (seven stars)) are set. Here, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2A-1 (final variation effect A (relief)) is selected regardless of the type of the big hit. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit with a 16R condition, a specific big hit with a 12R condition, a specific big hit with an 8R condition, a specific big hit with a 4R condition, a variation pattern If PA2A-1 (final variation effect A (relief)) is selected and the big hit type is a specific big hit with 2R condition, the variation pattern PA2A-2 (final variation effect A (seven stars)) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 2B)
FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table 2B. The variation pattern table 2B is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 2B. The variation pattern table 2 </ b> B is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss).

  A variation pattern PH2B-1 (final variation effect A (end)) is set in the variation pattern table 2B for deviation. Here, when the result of the determination on whether the first special symbol is right or wrong is out of the range, the variation pattern PH2B-1 (final variation effect A (end)) is selected without depending on the number of operation-pending balls. Similarly, when the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is correct is out of place, the variation pattern PH2B-1 (final variation effect A (end)) is selected without depending on the number of operation-pending balls. That is, when the result of the determination on whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not right is selected, only the variation pattern PH2B-1 with the final variation effect A (end) is selected.

  In the variation pattern table 2 for big hits, variation patterns PA2B-1 (final variation effect A (relief)) and PA2B-2 (final variation effect A (seven stars)) are set. Here, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2B-1 (final variation effect A (relief)) is selected regardless of the type of the big hit. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit with a 16R condition, a specific big hit with a 12R condition, a specific big hit with an 8R condition, a specific big hit with a 4R condition, a variation pattern If PA2B-1 (final variation effect A (relief)) is selected and the big hit type is a specific big hit with 2R condition, the variation pattern PA2B-2 (final variation effect A (seven stars)) is selected.

  Here, the fluctuation time (12 seconds) of the “outlier fluctuation pattern PH2A-1” selected in the selection state 2A and the fluctuation time (11 seconds) of the “outlier fluctuation pattern PH2B-1” selected in the selection state 2B. ) Are set as different time values. Further, the fluctuation effect (final fluctuation effect A (continuation)) selected in the selection state 2A and the fluctuation of the “loss fluctuation pattern PH2B-1” selected in the selection state 2B. It is set as production contents (production mode) different from the production (final variation production A (end)). The fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern PH2A-1 may be a time value (for example, 8 seconds) shorter than the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern PH2B-1.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation time (13 seconds) of the “big hit fluctuation pattern PA2A-1” selected in the selection state 2A and the fluctuation time (13 seconds) of the “big hit fluctuation pattern PA2B-1” selected in the selection state 2B. Are set as the same time value, and similarly, the variation time (10 seconds) of the “big hit variation pattern PA2A-2” selected in the selection state 2A and the “big hit variation pattern PA2B” selected in the selection state 2B -2 "fluctuation time (10 seconds) is set as the same time value. Further, the fluctuation effect (final fluctuation effect A (relief)) of the “big hit fluctuation pattern PA2A-1” selected in the selection state 2A and the fluctuation of the “big hit fluctuation pattern PA2B-1” selected in the selection state 2B. The effect (final change effect A (relief)) is set as the same effect content (effect mode), and similarly, the change effect (final change effect A ( (Seven stars)) and the variation effect (final variation effect A (seven stars)) of “big hit variation pattern PA2B-2” selected in the selection state 2B are set as the same effect contents (effect mode).

  It should be noted that during the period in which any one of the selection states 1, 2A, 2B is set as the variation pattern selection state, it stays in the no-commission mode as the effect mode. Here, the final fluctuation effect A that appears in the fluctuation display at the 30th rotation (selection state 2A, 2B) in the non-commissioned mission mode is the fluctuation display (selection state 1) at the previous first rotation to the 29th rotation. It is configured as a production that never appears. That is, this final variation effect A is a limited effect that appears only in the variation display (the first variation display) at the 30th rotation among the variation displays at the first rotation to the 30th rotation. .

  As described above, according to the first modified example of the eighth embodiment, after the special game ends, the number of times the symbol display is changed until the predetermined number of times (the final number of electronic support functions) is reached. Since the transition mode of the variation pattern selection state differs depending on the game state and jackpot type, it is possible to create a variety of game characteristics, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

[Eighth embodiment-second modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration. Is mainly described in the different parts.

  In the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, the prize ball number notification effect is executed during the execution of the special game. However, in the gaming machine according to the present modification, in addition to the execution of the special game, the extended game state ends. Sometimes a prize ball number notification effect is executed.

  FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen of a prize ball number notification effect and a number of consecutive times notification effect executed at the end of the extended game state. In this example, “at the end of the reaming state” means that when the reunion mode ends, that is, the last variation display in the non-matching dance mode (the 100th rotation variation display after the end of the special game) is executed. When you are. As described above, this non-matching dance mode is an effect mode that is set when the gaming state is in the short-time state, and the gaming state is changed from the short-time state to the normal state by the end of the last variation display. Will return.

  At the end of this extended game mode, in addition to the above-mentioned prize ball number notification effect, the extended game number notification effect is executed. In the prize ball number notification effect, “the first cumulative earned prize ball number B1” and “the second cumulative earned prize ball number B2” are reported as the cumulative number of the prize balls paid out in the special game in the consecutive game. It becomes the object of. On the other hand, in the consecutive resort number notification effect, the so-called “continuous resort number C” is the subject of notification as the consecutive number of jackpots in the consecutive resort (the number of consecutive occurrences of big hits that trigger the transition to the specific gaming state). Become.

  In the consecutive resort count notification effect, the characters "Musou N times" are displayed in correspondence with the aforementioned consecutive resort count (N = consecutive resort count C). In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 123, in order to manage the number of consecutive resorts, a consecutive resort counter CC for counting the number of consecutive resorts is provided. The count value of the consecutive resort count counter CC is updated every time a big hit occurs in a state where the consecutive resort is continued. The consecutive resort number counter CC counts the first hit as “one time”. Then, the consecutive resort count CC is reset to zero at the end of the consecutive resort state.

  Here, the number-of-balls notification effect and the number of consecutive times notification effect are executed on the condition that the result of the determination of success / failure is out of place in the last variation display in the non-matching dance mode. In other words, the result of the determination of success / failure is lost in the last variation display in the non-matching dance mode, and the gaming state shifts from the specific gaming state (short time state) to the non-specific gaming state (normal state) from the next variation display. Is determined (when it is determined that the extended villa state ends), the prize ball number notification effect and the extended number of times notification effect are executed. In this example, the accumulated winning ball numbers B1 and B2 and the number of consecutive games C are individually displayed on the screen at a predetermined timing during the final variation display in the non-matching dance mode. Also in this modification, the first cumulative earned prize ball number B1 and the second cumulative earned prize ball number B2 are not individually displayed, and the first cumulative earned prize ball number B1 and the second cumulative earned prize ball number B2 are not displayed. And may be displayed together. The predetermined timing is, for example, a timing at which the decorative symbol is removed and temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle of the last variation display. In this way, the cumulative number of winning balls B1, B2 and the number of consecutive games C are individually displayed on the screen from the temporary stop display to the final stop display through the re-variable display. If the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit in the last variation display in this non-matching dance mode, the consecutive resort state will continue after the next variation display. Zhuang count notification effect is not performed. As a modification, in the case of a big hit in the final variation display, the winning ball number notification effect and the extended number of times notification effect may be performed, and then hit.

  As shown in FIG. 127, in the prize ball number notification effect and the extended game number notification effect in this example, the first cumulative acquired prize ball number B1, the second cumulative acquired prize ball number B2, and the extended game number C are displayed. In the example shown in the drawing, “15420” is displayed as the first cumulative winning ball number B1, “580” as the second cumulative winning ball number B2, and “Musou 10 times” as the number of consecutive games C on the screen. . As a result, in multiple special games in the villa, at the present stage, 15420 prize balls are acquired based on the entry to the big prize opening 65, and the general prize opening 54 arranged in the right-handed area is obtained. Based on the entry, 580 winning balls are acquired, and the player is notified that the number of consecutive resorts has been reached 10 times.

  As described above, according to the second modified example of the eighth embodiment, at the end of the consecutive resort state, the number of prize balls acquired by the game balls entering the big winning opening in the special game in the consecutive resorts and In addition to notifying individually the number of prize balls earned by game balls entering the general prize opening and notifying the final number of consecutive games, aiming for the big prize opening in special games in the consecutive games It is possible to prevent the player's only concern from being able to win a large number of prize balls and to allow the player to enjoy the fun of aiming for a general winning mouth (the player actively plays games) It is expected to increase opportunities for the ball to enter the general winning opening), and it will be possible to increase the player's gambling and make the game even more interesting.

[Eighth embodiment-third modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the third modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. Is mainly described in the different parts.

  Like the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present modification is called a so-called “ST machine” in which the probability variation entry rate is set to 100% when a big hit is made with a special symbol. Is a gaming machine. For this reason, the game state after the end of the special game continues to be in a probable state until the number of times that the special symbol has been changed reaches the predetermined end number (ST number). In this modification, “100 times” is set as the ST number, but it is needless to say that other numbers may be set. As in the first embodiment, when the variation display of the ST number (100 times) is completed, the gaming state returns to the normal state.

  In the present modification, as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6) described above, as the symbol group of the first special symbol jackpot, the 16R specific short-time symbol symbol (hereinafter, the jackpot type is “16R specific jackpot”). And 8R specific short-lived symbol (hereinafter, the jackpot type is also referred to as “8R specific big hit”), and 2R specific short-lived symbol (hereinafter, the jackpot type is also referred to as “2R specific big hit”). ing. Similarly, as the big special symbol group of the second special symbol, the 16R specific short-time symbol (hereinafter, the jackpot type is also referred to as “16R specific big hit”) and the 8R specific short-term symbol (hereinafter, the big hit type is “ 8R specific big hit ").

  In this modified example, when the game state after the end of the special game becomes a certain change state, the change pattern selection state in the change display of 100 rotations after the end of the special game (during ST) is “selection state A” → “selection” Transition is made in the order of “state B” → “selected state C”. That is, the selection states A to C are variation pattern selection states that are set when the gaming state is a probability variation state. Specifically, the selection state A is set in the variable display from the first rotation to the third rotation during the ST after the special game ends. The selection state B is set in the variable display from the 4th rotation to the 7th rotation in ST after the end of the special game. The selection state C is set in the variable display from the 8th rotation to the 100th rotation during ST after the end of the special game.

  128 to 130 are schematic views showing a variation pattern table in the third modification example of the eighth embodiment. In this modification, only the variation pattern tables A, B, and C among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables will be described as an example. The variation pattern table A is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state is the selection state A. The variation pattern table B is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state is the selection state B. The variation pattern table C is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state is the selection state C.

(Variation pattern table A)
FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table A. The variation pattern table A is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state that is currently staying is the selection state A. Therefore, the variation pattern table A is set for the first to third rotations after the special game ends. The variation pattern table A is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss).

  In the fluctuation pattern table A for loss, a fluctuation pattern PHA-1 (super shortening) is set. Here, when the result of the determination on whether the first special symbol is right or wrong is out of the range, the variation pattern PHA-1 (super shortened) is selected without depending on the number of the activated balls. Similarly, when the result of the determination on whether the second special symbol is right or wrong is out of place, the variation pattern PHA-1 (super shortened) is selected without depending on the number of operation-reserved balls. That is, when the result of the determination on whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of place is always selected, only the variation pattern PHA-1 (super shortened) is selected.

  In the big hit variation pattern table A, variation patterns PAA-1 (immediate hit) and PAA-2 (immediate hit (special big hit notification effect A)) are set. Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, if the big hit type is 8R specific big hit or 2R specific big hit, the variation pattern PAA-1 (immediate hit) is selected and the big hit type is 16R. If it is a specific jackpot, the variation pattern PAA-2 (immediate hit (special jackpot announcement effect A)) is selected. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is 8R specific big hit, the fluctuation pattern PAA-1 (immediate hit) is selected, and if the big hit type is 16R specific big hit , The variation pattern PAA-2 (immediate hit (special jackpot announcement effect A)) is selected. “Immediate hit” is an effect in which a big hit symbol is confirmed and stopped in a short time without going through reach after the change display is started. The “special jackpot notification effect A” is an effect for notifying (determining notification) that a specific jackpot has been won. “Specific jackpot” means a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot). The special jackpot announcement effect A will be described in detail later. Here, as a modified example of the variation pattern table A, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is wrong is out of place, only when the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is 0 to 3, If the result of the second special symbol determination is out of place, the normal variation (14 seconds) variation pattern can be selected only when the number of the operation-reserved balls in the second special symbol is zero. Good. On the other hand, when the determination result is a big hit, when the big hit type is 8R specific big hit or 2R specific big hit, the fluctuation pattern of SP reach A (40 seconds) may be selectable, or SP reach A ( A variation pattern of 40 seconds) may be selected and a variation pattern of immediate hit (4 seconds) may not be selected.

(Variation pattern table B)
FIG. 129 is a schematic diagram showing the fluctuation pattern table B. FIG. The variation pattern table B is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state B. Therefore, the variation pattern table B is set at the fourth to seventh rotations after the end of the special game. The variation pattern table B is a table that differs depending on the result of the determination (big hit / loss).

  The variation pattern PHB-1 (super shortened) is set in the variation pattern table B for loss. Here, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct is out of order, the variation pattern PHB-1 (super shortened) is selected without depending on the number of the operation-reserved balls. Similarly, when the result of the determination on whether the second special symbol is right or wrong is out of the range, the variation pattern PHB-1 (super shortened) is selected without depending on the number of operation-reserved balls. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of sync, only the variation pattern PHB-1 (super shortened) is always selected.

  In the big hit variation pattern table B, variation patterns PAB-1 (immediate hit) and PAB-2 (immediate hit (special big hit notification effect A)) are set. Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, if the big hit type is 8R specific big hit or 2R specific big hit, the variation pattern PAB-1 (immediate hit) is selected and the big hit type is 16R. If it is a specific jackpot, the variation pattern PAB-2 (immediate hit (special jackpot announcement effect B)) is selected. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is 8R specific big hit, the fluctuation pattern PAB-1 (immediate hit) is selected, and if the big hit type is 16R specific big hit The variation pattern PAB-2 (immediate hit (special jackpot announcement effect B)) is selected. “Immediate hit” is an effect in which a big hit symbol is confirmed and stopped in a short time without going through reach after the change display is started. The “special jackpot notification effect B” is an effect for notifying (determining notification) that a specific jackpot has been won. “Specific jackpot” means a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot). The special jackpot announcement effect B will be described in detail later. Here, as a variation of the variation pattern table B, if the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is wrong is out of place, only when the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is 0 to 3, If the result of the second special symbol determination is out of place, the normal variation (14 seconds) variation pattern can be selected only when the number of the operation-reserved balls in the second special symbol is zero. Good. On the other hand, when the determination result is a big hit, when the big hit type is 8R specific big hit or 2R specific big hit, the fluctuation pattern of SP reach B (40 seconds) may be selectable, or SP reach B ( A variation pattern of 40 seconds) may be selected and a variation pattern of immediate hit (4 seconds) may not be selected.

(Variation pattern table C)
FIG. 130 is a schematic diagram showing a fluctuation pattern table C. The variation pattern table C is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state C. Therefore, the variation pattern table C is set at the 8th to 100th rotations after the end of the special game. The variation pattern table C is a table that differs according to the result of the determination (big hit / loss). In the drawing, “reach” is an effect that determines whether or not reach is established. If reach is established, reach reach is successful, and if reach is not established, reach reach is failed. “SP reach C” is a reach effect in which a battle effect in which a teammate character battles an enemy character and decides the victory or defeat is developed. In this battle effect, basically, when the teammate character wins the enemy character, the big hit win is confirmed, and when the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character, the gap is confirmed. Therefore, in principle, the timing at which the battle is won or lost is set as the winning branch timing. “Seven Star Direction” indicates that after the teammate character was defeated in the above battle direction (after the offense battle effect was executed), a big win was won by the appearance of a predetermined logo (letters called “7 Star Charge”). It is a rebirth production.

  In the variation pattern table C for detachment, variation patterns PHC-1 (reach roll) and PHC-2 (reach roll → SP reach C) are set. Here, when the result of the first special symbol determination is out of place, the variation pattern PHC-1 (reach stroke) or PHC-2 (reach stroke → SP reach C) is not dependent on the number of operation-pending balls. Is selected. Similarly, when the result of the determination on whether or not the second special symbol is correct is out of place, the variation pattern PHC-1 (reach stroke) or PHC-2 (reach stroke → SP reach C) is not dependent on the number of the operation-reserved balls. Selected.

  In the variation pattern table C for big hits, the variation patterns PAC-1 (reach beat → SP reach C) and PAC-2 (reach beat → SP reach C → seven star effect) are set. Here, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is successful is a big hit, the variation pattern PAC-1 (reach roll → SP reach C) is selected without depending on the big hit type. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PAC-2 is a special big hit with a 16R condition, a specific big hit with a 12R condition, a specific big hit with an 8R condition, and a specific big hit with a 4R condition. If (Reaching → SP reach C) is selected and the big hit type is a specific big hit with 2R condition, the variation pattern PAC-2 (reach rolling → SP reach C → 7-star effect) is selected. Here, as a modified example of the variation pattern table C, when the result of the determination is wrong, a variation pattern of ultrashort (2 seconds) or a variation pattern of normal variation (14 seconds) may be selectable. At that time, when the result of the second special symbol determination is out of place, the fluctuation pattern of the super shortening (2 seconds) is provided only when the number of the operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 to 3. It may be selectable. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol's success / failure determination is out of place, the result of the second special symbol's success / failure determination is only when the number of the operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0-3. In the case of a deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation (14 seconds) may be selectable only when the number of the operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero.

  FIG. 131 is a transition diagram of the effect mode in the present modification. Also in this modified example, one of a plurality of types of effect modes is alternatively selected and set according to the variation pattern selection state (or game state) managed on the main control board 100 side. A variable effect according to the effect mode is executed. However, in FIG. 131, only the transition of the effect mode in the extended resort mode is shown for convenience of explanation.

  In this modification, as in the above-described eighth embodiment, after the special game is over, the mode is shifted to the extended resort mode. The number of stays in the Renso mode is “100 times” as the number of times the special symbol is changed. In other words, while the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, the user stays in the extended resort mode.

  The ream mode includes a limited frequency mode A, a limited frequency mode B, and a probability change effect mode. The limited frequency mode A (3 rotations) → the limited frequency mode B (4 rotations) → the probability change effect mode (93 rotations) ) In this order. The limited frequency mode A is an effect mode that is set when the variation pattern selection state is the selection state A. The limited frequency mode B is an effect mode that is set when the variation pattern selection state is the selection state B. The probability variation effect mode is an effect mode that is set when the variation pattern selection state is the selection state C. That is, after the special game ends, the limited frequency mode A is set for the first to third rotations, the limited frequency mode B is set for the fourth to seventh rotations, and the probability variation effect mode is set for the eighth to 100th rotations. In addition, after the 101st rotation, it will return to normal production mode (normal state).

  Also in this modified example, basically, when any production mode is set, a background dedicated to the production mode on the screen as an production (variation production) suggesting that the user is staying in the production mode. An image is displayed, and a BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11.

  Specifically, during staying in the limited frequency mode A, a special continuous effect is displayed across the jackpot end demo. While staying in the limited frequency mode B, a background image dedicated to the probability variation state (a background image notifying that the gaming state is the probability variation state) is displayed. While staying in the probability variation effect mode C, as in the limited frequency mode B, a background image dedicated to the probability variation state (a background image notifying that the gaming state is the probability variation state) is displayed. In this way, in the limited frequency mode MB and the probability variation effect mode MC, a common background image is displayed, and it can be impressed that the player is staying in the same effect mode (the same game state).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 131, an example of the effect during the extended mode in this modification will be described. In the figure, (A) shows an effect screen displayed when a big hit occurs in the limited frequency mode A, and (B) in the figure shows an effect screen displayed when a big hit occurs in the limited frequency mode B. In the figure, (C) shows an effect screen displayed when a big hit occurs during the probability variation effect mode.

  First, as shown to (A) in a figure, while staying in limited frequency mode A, a special continuous effect is performed straddling between big hit end demonstration effects. That is, similarly to the above-described eighth embodiment, a movie effect that plays a predetermined video is performed using the effect scales of the big hit end demonstration and the limited frequency mode A (variable display of the first to third rotations). The Specifically, in special continuous production, after displaying character images one by one in order of “seven” → “star” → “fight” → “mai” on the screen, finally “seven star fight dance” A character image (logo image) is displayed. At this time, in order to make the player pay attention to the main effect (special continuous effect), the three rows of decorative symbols are variably displayed as small symbols, for example, in a reduced state in the right corner of the screen. Therefore, in the first to third rotations staying in the limited frequency mode A, it can be seen as if the big hit end demo is continuing.

  Here, when the current performance mode is the limited frequency mode A and the high profit big hit (16R specific big hit) occurs in the variable display, the special big hit immediately after the variable display is started. As a notice effect A, a message “next notice” is displayed on the screen, and the message immediately hits in a short time without going through reach. This special jackpot announcement effect A is that when the currently performed performance mode is the limited frequency mode A (first rotation to third rotation), a specific big hit (high profit big hit) occurs in the variable display. This is a notice effect for informing (confirmed notification). Therefore, the special big hit announcement effect A is generated on the condition that the big win is won with a variable display within 3 rotations after the end of the special game, so between the current big hit and the previous big hit. Thus, it can be said that this is an effect (post-reservation in-reservoir production) to post-announce that the in-reservation inn is established. However, in reality, the situation where a big hit occurs during the hold continuous mode is that (1) the big hit hold is stored at the end of the special game, and the big hit hold is displayed in the variable display after the special game ends. (2) When the special game ends, the big hit hold is not memorized, and the big hit hold is generated by the start winning after the special game, and the fluctuation display after the special game ends. In some cases, the jackpot is generated by digesting the jackpot reservation. Therefore, the special big hit notification effect A is the same result that the reserved renso was actually established at the end of the previous special game, or as a result that the reserved renso was established as a result. It is an effect to announce that it has become. The special jackpot announcement effect A is configured as a highly rare effect that does not appear in any scene other than the limited frequency mode A or is difficult to appear in scenes other than the limited frequency mode A.

  Subsequently, as shown in (B) in the figure, while staying in the limited frequency mode B, a background image (probability variation background image) dedicated to the probability variation state is displayed. Therefore, the first variation display that has shifted to the limited frequency mode B is actually the variation display of the fourth rotation after the end of the special game, but as described above, the probability variation state is not until the transition to the limited frequency mode B is performed. By displaying the dedicated background image for informing that, it is possible for the player to appear as if it is the first-rotation variable display after the end of the special game. Therefore, the change display of the total of 4 rotations staying in the limited frequency mode B (change display of the 4th to 7th rotations) is as if the display is the 1st to 4th rotation display after the end of the special game. Can be shown to the player in a pseudo manner.

  Here, when the effect mode currently being executed is the limited frequency mode B, if a big hit occurs in the variable display, immediately after the variable display is started, the special big hit notification effect B is displayed on the screen. A premium character is displayed and hits immediately in a short time without going through reach. This special jackpot announcement effect B is that when the currently performed performance mode is the limited frequency mode B (fourth to seventh rotation), a specific big hit (high profit big hit) occurs in the variable display. This is a notice effect for informing (confirmed notification). Therefore, the special big hit notification effect B is noticed that the big hit is generated by the change display of the first rotation to the fourth rotation (actually the fourth rotation to the seventh rotation) after the special game. Therefore, it can be said that this is an effect (pseudo and post-reservation in-reservoir production) that makes it appear as if the on-reservation reunion was established in a pseudo manner between the current jackpot and the previous hit. However, if the fourth action holding ball (the action holding ball corresponding to the fourth rotation fluctuation display) existing at the end of the big hit is the big hit holding, the fluctuation display of the fourth rotation after the special game ends (limited) The result is that a big hit occurs during the stay in the frequency mode B), and at the time of the end of the special game, there was actually a pending renso between the current big hit and the previous big hit ( It can be said that this is a post-reservation rendezvous production.) The special jackpot announcement effect B is configured as a highly rare effect that does not appear in any scene other than the limited frequency mode B or is difficult to appear in scenes other than the limited frequency mode B.

  Subsequently, as shown in (C) in the figure, while staying in the probability variation effect mode, a background image (probability variation background image) dedicated to the probability variation state is displayed. Here, when the effect mode currently being executed is the probability change effect mode MC, and a big hit occurs in the change display, the low expectation effect selected by the effect lottery such as the SP reach effect or the notice effect, for example. Alternatively, a high expectation effect is developed (a relatively long time fluctuation display is executed). In other words, when a big hit is made while staying in the probability variation effect mode, special effects such as immediate hit and special jackpot announcement effects A and B are not executed.

  As described above, according to the third modified example of the eighth embodiment, in actuality, there is no case where the on-hold ranger is established exceeding the upper limit number of the operation-reserved balls existing at the end of the special game. By connecting the predetermined number of fluctuation displays after the end of the special game as a series of continuous effects, the predetermined number of fluctuation display processes after the end of the special game are made as if the jackpot end demo is continuing. Thus, when viewed from the player, the fluctuation display after the predetermined number of times can be shown as the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times immediately after the end of the special game (variation display corresponding to the upper limit number of holdings). Since it is possible to make it appear as if the on-hold consecutive resort was established at the end (because the timing at which the on-hold consecutive resort is established can be artificially extended) A game Able to create output, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the eighth embodiment and the modification described above, priority digestion that preferentially digests the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol over the operation reservation ball of the first special symbol as the digestion order of the operation reserved ball of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the order of entering the first start port 61 and the second start port 62 by causing the number of the active special reserve balls of the first special symbol and the number of active reserve balls of the second special symbol to exist together. You may comprise so that the action reservation ball of 2 special symbols may be digested. In this way, when the digestion order of the operation-reserved balls is set to the order of entering the start ports 61 and 62, naturally, the special symbol variation start condition is different from that in the priority digestion. That is, in the order of entry, the special symbol variation start condition is (1) that there is no big hit or small hit, and (2) both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation. (3) The number of working balls to be retained exists in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and (4) the digestion order of the working balls to be digested this time is consistent with the entering order. When all the conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the fluctuation can be started. Further, when the digestion order of the operation reservation balls is the order of entering the start ports 61 and 62, when the operation reservation balls are updated, that is, when the operation reservation balls are acquired or digested, the operation reservation balls This is different from the case where the preferential digestion is adopted in that it is necessary to update the total number of suspended balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol and to update the order of entering the balls.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned 8th Embodiment and modification, even when an operation reservation ball exists in both the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, the number of the operation reservation balls is digested. Thus, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are so-called in-line models in which no success / failure lottery or symbol variation is performed at the same time. On the other hand, a so-called parallel model in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are independently selected and the lottery or symbol variation is performed may be adopted. According to this parallel model, it is not necessary to put the operation state of the other party's special symbol (that is, the variable is waiting for the change) into the special symbol variation start condition, so that the processing load related to control is reduced. .

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, basically, a model in which only one big winning opening (attacker) is mounted in the game area has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may employ | adopt the model equipped with two or more big prize openings (attacker) of the big prize opening provided with (V area | region), and the big prize opening which is not provided with a specific area | region.

  In order to make the technical significance of the above-described eighth embodiment clearer and easier to understand, finally, the problems of the eighth embodiment will be outlined.

  In conventional pachinko gaming machines, for example, a probability variation gaming state in which the winning probability of winning / failing determination is increased, and a short-time gaming state in which the efficiency of symbol variation for suggesting or notifying the result of the winning / failing determination is increased. A game state is provided, and a variation effect according to the type of the game state is developed (see, for example, “JP 2011-115441 A”).

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the number of prize balls that are paid out based on the fact that a game ball entered the big prize opening during the execution of a special game is notified (for example, `` Special (See Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-033452).

  However, there are already many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration as conventional models, and in order to differentiate from the conventional models, further enhancement of the amusement of the game is required. .

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, the above-described configuration is adopted to achieve the above-described effects for the purpose of improving the fun of the game.

[Common variations]
Next, a gaming machine according to a common modification of the first to eighth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this common modification basically has the same configuration as that of any of the above-described first to eighth embodiments, and hereinafter the same configuration. Parts having the same reference numerals are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Common modification 1)
In the first modification, when a big hit is made with the second special symbol in the non-probable change state (short time state, easy entry state), execution of the on-hold extended resort production is more effective than a big win with the second special symbol in the probability change state. The configuration is configured such that the probability is low, or the on-hold consecutive resort production is not executed. As described above, in the non-probability change state and the probability change state, since the transition is made to different effect modes, the tendency of the effect during the symbol variation is different. Therefore, in the non-probable change state, if the second special symbol is a big hit, and the transition to the probable change state after the end of the special game, the non-probable change will occur through the event of the reserved villa (occurrence of two jackpots). Designed as a series of continuous effects (consistent story effects) by seamlessly connecting the symbol variation effect during the state, the previous special game, the symbol variation effect during the probabilistic state, and the later special game. Is difficult. Therefore, even if it is a situation where the second special symbol is a big hit in the uncertain change state and the reserved renso is confirmed, there is a high possibility that the effect of the reserved renso production will not be fully demonstrated. The execution probability is reduced or not executed. As an example, in the production mode (battle mode) in the probabilistic state, a special jackpot symbol dedicated to the production mode (a jackpot symbol “fist / fist / fist”) is set, and the stoppage display of this particular jackpot symbol is performed. Considering the case where special continuous production (battle-type special continuous production) is started when the on-hold continuous resort is finalized, when the production mode in the short time state (non-battle mode), Even under the circumstances where the occurrence of this is not possible, the specific jackpot symbol does not appear, and if the special continuous performance is not generated, the connection between the front and rear jackpots and the consistency of the performance can be achieved. Because.

(Common modification 2)
In the first embodiment described above, even if any one of the multiple types of big hits (16R big hit, 8R big hit, 2R big hit) corresponds to a big hit (second special bonus) The limited frequency table (high probability special variation state γ) is shifted to the limited frequency table only for a limited period of time (variable display over the variable display of the number of symbol fluctuations (4 rotations) corresponding to the maximum number (4) of activated balls of symbols) With reference to (special variation pattern table), a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected. On the other hand, in the second modification, the special game is terminated only when a specific big hit (high profit big hit: 16R big hit) among a plurality of types of big hits (16R big hit, 8R big hit, 2R big hit). It shifts to the limited frequency state only for a certain period (four rotations) immediately after, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected with reference to the limited frequency table. In the limited frequency state, when the determination result is a specific big hit, a variation pattern of shortening variation (for example, variation time = 2 seconds) is selected. At this time, as mentioned above, a specific big hit (high profit big hit) among multiple types of big hits is a big hit with the second special symbol than a big hit with the first special symbol The probability of becoming is high. Therefore, basically, if you win a big hit with the second special symbol (in the case of Renso) than if you win a big hit with the first special symbol (first win), the special game It can be said that it is easy to shift to the limited frequency state immediately after the end. In this limited frequency state, a shortened variation pattern (for example, variation time = 2 seconds) is selected on the main control board 100 side, and various design variation effects corresponding to this shortened variation pattern are displayed on the effect control board 200 side. Is to be selected.

  Here, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (especially, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol that is scheduled to be digested four times after the big hit (after the end of the special game) is generated before the big hit starts. There are cases where it occurs after the start of jackpot (or after the end of jackpot). Specifically, when the game ball enters the second starting port during the symbol variation display and the action holding ball of the second special symbol occurs, the number of action holding balls of the second special symbol is four (maximum There may be a case in which a game ball enters the second start port and an operation hold ball of the second special symbol occurs during execution of the special game under a situation where the number of the hold is less than the hold number). In addition, in the situation where the number of active reserve balls of the second special symbol is less than 4 (maximum number of reserves) at the end of the special game, the change of the second special symbol after the end of the special game When the game ball enters the second starting port 62, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol may occur. At this time, as described above, whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa effect (special continuous effect) is determined at the start of the big hit, so in order to generate the on-hold consecutive villa effect (special continuous effect), at least the big hit It is assumed that there is a specific hold at the start. For this reason, when a specific hold is generated before the big hit starts with reference to the start of the big hit, the on-hold consecutive villa production B (special continuous production) can be generated, but after the big hit starts (or after the big hit ends) When a specific hold is generated, the in-hold extended zone effect B (special continuous effect) cannot be generated. As a result, if a specific hold occurs before the big hit starts, a special symbol variation effect will occur within the limited period (four rotations) immediately after the special game ends, If the specific suspension occurs after the start (or after the big hit), the special symbol variation effect does not occur within the limited period (four rotations) immediately after the end of the special game. As described above, the four rotations that are the limited period correspond to the maximum number (four) of the operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol.

  Therefore, when a specific suspension is generated before the big hit starts, the on-hold extended resort is established, and the symbol variation related to the specific suspension corresponds to a shortened variation in the limited frequency state (for example, variation time = 2 seconds). A special symbol variation effect (for example, a series of movie images is developed and a pattern variation and a big hit are inconspicuous) is made consistent with the previous special game, the symbol variation effect and the later special game. Connect seamlessly with stylistic performance. On the other hand, when a specific hold is generated after the big hit starts and the in-hold extended resort is established, the special symbol variation effect (special continuous effect) does not occur in the symbol variation related to the specific hold, but the shortened variation in the limited frequency state By generating an immediate hit effect (a mode in which the occurrence of a big hit is emphasized) corresponding to (for example, the variation time = 2 seconds), the delay until the big hit is prevented is prevented. That is, in the second modification, even if the timing of occurrence of the specific suspension is before or after the start of the big hit, if the specific big hit symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern selection state after the special game is Since the transition is made to the limited frequency state, the contents of the subsequent big hit variation effect can be made different according to the timing of occurrence of the specific hold with the occurrence of the shortening variation in the limited frequency state. In this modified example, when determining whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production (special continuous production), it was set at the time of the big hit, but it is not limited to this, and during the big hit (special game execution) The middle timing may be set as the predetermined timing.

(Common modification 3)
Further, in the first to eighth embodiments described above, the configuration in which only one type of off symbol is provided as the special symbol stop symbol is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of off symbol are provided. May be. At this time, for example, only when a specific loss symbol is selected as the prior determination result, the on-hold consecutive villa effect (gase effect) may be generated. In addition, in the seventh to eighth embodiments described above, a configuration (one attacker format) having only a single big winning opening 65 having a specific area in the game area PA is adopted. Not limited, as in the second embodiment described above, a configuration (two-attacker format) including a large winning opening 64 having no specific area and a large winning opening 65 having a specific area is adopted. May be.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although two types of on-hold extended resort productions A and B which differed in generation | occurrence | production time were illustrated and demonstrated, the specification which a held internal extended resort is decided at the generation | occurrence | production time of on-hold extended resort production A However, it is not necessary to generate the on-hold renso production A alone, and it may be a specification in which the on-hold renso production is confirmed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The specification that the villa can be determined may be sufficient, or the generation of the on-hold renso production B is not sufficient, and the specification that the on-hold villa B is fixed when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be used. Moreover, in the said embodiment, even if it is the structure performed only when one or more specific reservation exists in the subsequent operation reservation ball | bowl, specific reservation in a subsequent operation reservation ball | bowl is carried out. Even if it does not exist (as a so-called gas effect), the configuration may be executed.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment and modification, If it is a range which does not deviate from the summary of this invention, it can improve suitably. In addition, the components described in the above embodiments and modified examples are appropriately combined, or some of the components described in the above described embodiments and modified examples are deleted or converted by known / conventional techniques, etc. These are also included in the scope of the present invention. Further, in the present invention and the above embodiment, “not executed” may include a low execution probability (occurrence frequency), and “low execution probability” includes not being executed. May be. Further, in the present invention and the above-described embodiment, “the jackpot expectation is high” or “the special game transition expectation is high” means that the jackpot expectation is 100% or the special game transition expectation is 100%. May be included.

PM Pachinko machine PA Game area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 20 Game board 34 Prize ball dispensing unit (prize ball dispensing means)
54 General prize opening (specified prize opening)
61 1st start opening 62 2nd start opening 64 1st grand prize opening 65 2nd big prize opening 70 Production display device 71 1st special symbol display device (1st symbol display device)
72 2nd special symbol display device (2nd symbol display device)
100 Main control board 135 Pre-determining means 141 Special symbol success / failure judging means (win / no-go judging means)
143 Special symbol variation pattern determination means (variation display time selection means)
156 Special symbol display control means (symbol display control means)
160 Electric character control means (special game execution means)
165 Game state control means (lottery state control means, entry state control means)
200 Production control board 220 Production control means (production determination means)
400 payout control board (prize ball payout means)

Claims (1)

A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening provided at a position different from the first start opening of the game area, wherein the game ball changes into an open state in which entry is easy and a close state in which entry is difficult;
A first success / failure determination means for executing a first success / failure determination triggered by entering the first start opening;
A second success / failure determination means for executing a second success / failure determination triggered by entering the second start opening;
A first symbol display device on which a first symbol indicating the result of the first determination of success / failure is variably displayed and stopped;
A second symbol display device in which a second symbol indicating the result of the second determination of success or failure is variably displayed and stopped;
First variation display time selection means for selecting the variation display time of the first symbol in accordance with the result of the first success / failure determination;
A second variation display time selection means for selecting a variation display time of the second symbol in accordance with the result of the second success / failure determination;
Special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the first success / failure determination or the result of the second success / failure determination is a big hit;
A low probability state in which the result of the first success / failure determination and the result of the second success / failure determination are big hits with a predetermined probability, and the result of the first success / failure determination and the result of the second success / failure determination are the predetermined probability. A lottery state control means for performing control to shift to a low probability state or a high probability state, having a high probability state that becomes a big hit with a higher probability than
It has a normal entry state and an easy entry state in which the ease of entering the second starting port is higher than the normal entry state, and performs control to shift to the normal entry state or the easy entry state. Entry state control means,
An effect display device on which an effect suggesting the result of the first success / failure determination or the result of the second success / failure determination is displayed;
Production determination means for determining production contents displayed on the production display device,
On the effect display device, a plurality of decorative symbols showing the results of the first success / failure determination or the second success / failure determination are displayed in a variable manner, and a combination of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped or displayed. Configured to be stopped,
It has a plurality of types of variation selection states, and is configured to be able to transition between the plurality of types of variation selection states.
Depending on the type of variation selection state, the selection tendency of the variation display time differs,
The result of the first success / failure determination or the result of the second success / failure determination is out of order under the situation where the number of times of the variable display of the first symbol and the second symbol is within X times from the end of the special game. The number of candidates for the variable display time of the first symbol or the second symbol that can be selected in the case is that the number of variable display times of the first symbol and the second symbol is X or more after the end of the special game. It is configured to be smaller than the number of candidates for the variable display time of the first symbol or the second symbol that can be selected when the result of the first success / failure determination or the result of the second success / failure determination is out of place,
In the variable display of the first symbol and the second symbol in which the number of times of variation display is within X times after the end of the special game, the result of the first success / failure determination or the result of the second success / failure determination is a big hit. In this case, the decoration stop display in the case where the decoration symbol combination temporarily displayed at a timing before the fixed stop display in the case where the result of the first determination on the right or wrong or the result of the second determination on the right is out of place. The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the decorative pattern combination to be made is the same.

Images